Part 02-2 de 04 PS GS

Contract- DE-04 – Particular Specification- Annexure-23 (25 kV cable Specification) of Chapter 8A
Draft No. DFA/3337 Attachment:Section VI Employer’s Requirements PS (Part-3).pdf

DMRC Electrical Standards & Design Wing DMES-T/0019
SPECIFICATIONS FOR 25 kV CABLES FOR ELEVATED AND Revision-0

UNDERGROUND METRO RAIL CORRIDOR
4.2 The Contractor shall confirm the cross section of the cables in as regard to:
- the route installation,
- the thermal conditions in service,
- the climatic conditions,
- the energy and currents flowing through these cables, taking into account the
worst electrical conditions,
- operation under permissible overload conditions,
4.3 The protective sheath will carry the indications listed below, in letters and digits at
least 6 mm high:
 designation of ownership
 nature and cross-sectional area of conductors
 specified cable voltage
 Manufacturer’s name
 Year and month of manufacturing
 Length of cable shall be marked at 1 m interval.
4.4 The Contractor shall provide clamps of non-metallic/ metallic & non-magnetic sturdy
type as per IEC 61914 at specified locations and with cable ties at every meter.
Material of cable tie shall be approved by the Engineer. Cable ties should last for 35
years.
4.5 The cable shall be manufactured by a company having ISO accreditation for quality.
The cable manufacturer shall have NABL accredited laboratory facility to conduct
routine and acceptance test.
4.6 The Employer may decide to visit the works of cable manufacturer to verify the
manufacturing processes.

Page 13 of 26
DMRC/Contract DE-04 /Vol-4/PS


4.7 The Bidder along with the Bid, shall submit the details regarding cable construction,
bill of material, the manufacturing process proposed to be adopted for the
manufacturing of 25 kV cables to be used in the project, along with Quality control
measures adopted by the Manufacturer, to ensure :-
 The values and tolerances are strictly as per IEC.

 The cable manufacturer exercises strict quality control measures, including
stage inspections, routine inspections etc. to ensure conformity to standards.
Periodical inspections of the Manufacturer works, manufacturing processes, Internal

Quality control records of the manufacturer etc shall be carried out by the User
(DMRC/Nominated agency), to ensure compliance to Quality standards.
5. MAINTENANCE & LIFE

The cable should be designed for maintenance free service of minimum 35 years for
all types of installation & under prescribed environmental conditions.
6. SPECIAL CONDITIONS
6.1 All type of Cables to be used in Underground Sections shall be Fire Retardant
Low Smoke Zero Halogen Type (FRLSZH) and cables to be used in elevated
and at grade sections shall be FRLS Type. Cables from TSS to Feeding point on
Viaduct/Station shall also be FRLS type excluding portion laid in underground section
(station and tunnel) which shall be FRLSZH type. The interconnections between the
elevated & underground section shall be dealt accordingly with minimum number of
joints.
6.2 Cable drum schedule should be selected in manner to minimise run-through joints in
the cable laid from TSS to Feeding point. Maximum weight of one cable drum can be
upto 8 ton.
Page 14 of 26


7. TESTING
7.1 All type tests to be conducted as per IEC 60840. The 25 kV cable shall comply with
following Test Standards in addition to the test standards of IEC 60840:
a. IEC 60332 Part 1 and 3, category A, test on single and bunched cables under fire
condition.
b. Limiting Oxygen Index, at least 30, tested as per ASTM D-2863.
c. Temperature index of minimum 250 deg C, as per IS 7098 (Part-2).
d. Smoke density Test (on sheathing material), when tested in accordance to ASTM
D-2843 for FRLS cables, maximum smoke density rating shall be 60 as per IS
7098 Part – 2.
e. Smoke density Test, when tested in accordance to IEC 61034 for FRLSZH cables,
minimum light transmittance shall be 60%.
f. Insulation is to be moisture and heat resistant, with temperature rating
appropriate to the application conditions and in no case lower than 90 deg C.
In addition to the above FRLSZH cables used in U/G section shall also comply
with following test standard: -
g. Determination of the amount of halogen Acid Gases as per IEC 60754 Part 1
(Maximum HCL gas shall not exceed 0.5%) and IEC 60754 Part –II
7.2 The contractor on advise of the Engineer shall arrange for repetition of the following
type tests as per IEC 60840, from independent laboratory after delivery of cables by
collecting random sample from site –
- Bending Test
- Tan δ measurement for cables
- Heating cycle voltage test
- Lightning Impulse voltage test followed by a power frequency voltage test
- Partial Discharge test
- Hot set Test
Page 15 of 26


7.3 Test to prove the Short Circuit withstand capacity of Power Cable and Metallic Screen
shall be conducted as per the relevant standard. If no guidelines are available, as a
general practice, routine test such as High Voltage, Partial Discharge, Check of
Electrical Parameters shall be conducted prior and after performing short circuit test
on the cables, to prove the integrity of cables under short circuit test
7.4 The manufacturer shall not change the Bill of Material used in the manufacturing of
samples for routine and Type testing as repeated above and in cables intended to be
supplied against the contract.
Page 16 of 26


8. DATA SHEET- 25KV CABLES
DESCRIPTION UNIT VALUES
Manufacturer
Cable Size Sq.mm. 400 240
Cable Type Al/XLPE/AlWS/DATA Cu/XLPE/CuWS/DATA
Voltage Grade U0/U
KV 26/45 (52) 26/45 (52)
(Um)
IEC 60228, IEC 60228,
Reference Standard IEC 60502-2, IEC 60502-2,
IEC 60840 IEC 60840
No. and cross sectional
1C x 400 sq.mm 1C x 240 sq. mm
area of conductor
Conductor Material Aluminum Copper
Circular compact stranded Circular compact stranded

Shape
Class 2/
Class/Standard Class 2/ IEC 60228
IEC 60228
Conductor and
Extruded semi- conducting Extruded semi- conducting
Insuation Screen
com’d com’d
Materials
Nominal thickness of
mm 0.7 0.7
conductor screen
Insulation Material XLPE XLPE
Nominal thickness of
mm 10 10
insulation
Nominal Thickness of
mm 0.8 0.8
Insulation screen
Conductor screen, insulation and insulation screen shall be extruded in a single process
Aluminium round wires Copper round wires followed
followed by helically applied by helically applied Copper
Insulation screen
Aluminium Tape Tape
material (Metallic)
Metallic screen should be able to withstand specified earth fault
current (minimum 14 kA for 3 sec
Page 17 of 26


*Polyethylene
laminated Aluminium mm - -
Tape
Flame retardant polyvinyl Flame retardant polyvinyl
chloride for elevated. chloride for elevated.
Inner Sheath Material
Flame retardant low smoke Flame retardant low smoke
zero halogen for UG zero halogen for UG
Minimum Thickness of
mm 1 1
extruded inner sheath
Double layer of Aluminium Tape (nominal thickness of
Armouring
each type -0.5mm)
Flame retardant polyvinyl Flame retardant polyvinyl
Extruded Outer sheath chloride for elevated. chloride for elevated
material Flame retardant low smoke Flame retardant low smoke
zero halogen for UG zero halogen for UG
Minimum Thickness of
mm 3.5 3.5
outer sheath
*Minimum bending
mm - -
radius
Max. Conductor
temperature on Deg.C 90 90
continuous
Max. Conductor
temperature in short Deg.C 250 250
circuit
Min. Short circuit
current 14 kA for 3 sec 14 kA for 3 sec
rating (Conductor)
*Nominal Diameter of mm - -
Conductor
*Nominal Diameter mm - -
Over Insulation
*Nominal Thickness of
mm - -
Tape
*No. and diameter of
No./mm - -
wires
Page 18 of 26


*Cross sectional Area

Sq.mm - -
of Metallic Screen
*Nominal overall
mm - -
diameter (± 2mm)
*Capacitance per
uF/km - -
phase
*Charging current per
A/km - -
phase at U0, 50 Hz
*Max. Current rating in
A - -
Air
*Max. Current rating in
A - -
Ground
*Maximum Pulling force
of the cable for laying
Length marking: Length shall be marked with number at one meter intervals on the sheath.
*Bidder to furnish the data at the time of vendor approval or design approval stage.
Page 19 of 26


9. TENTATIVE LIST OF TEST TO BE PERFORMED ON CABLES
INDICATIONS TYPE of TEST

Factory
Type On site Specials
Acceptance
IR Test X X
Hot set X
Lightning Impulse test X
Short Circuit test* X
Eccentricity X
High Voltage Test X X
Measurement of Resistance X
As per IEC 60502
Partial discharge test X X
Capacitance Test X
Flame Spread Test X
Acid Gas Generation X
Smoke density test X
Oxygen index test on outer sheath X
Temperature index test on outer

X
sheath
Outer sheath test X X
Visual check X X
*Test to prove the Power Cable and Metallic Screen Short Circuit Withstand Capacity to be
conducted as per the relevant Standard Recommendations. If no guidelines are available, as
Page 20 of 26


a general practice routine test such as High Voltage, Partial Discharge, Check of Electrical
Parameters etc., to be conducted prior and after performing short circuit test on the cables, to
prove the integrity of cables under short circuit test.
10. JOINTS AND TERMINATIONS

Joints and terminations shall constitute perfectly all elements of the MV cables, so as to
obtain electrical and mechanical characteristics at least equal to those of the cable. The
Contractor shall submit to the client, for approval, a detailed description of the technique to
be used for execution of connections in MV Cables. However, maintenance and repair being
carried out only during a short period of time, at night, due consideration shall be given to
connection processes having the following characteristics, quality being otherwise equal:
 quickness of execution,
 possibility of replacement without having to disturb the cable,
The jointing & termination materials and components shall be offered in the form of kits. The
kits shall be supplied complete with all necessary tubings and components (ferrules / lugs /
earthing/ cable preparation etc.) to form a ready to use and energize joint / termination/cable
.
Material used in jointing and termination should be FRLS and FRLSZH compliant in Elevated
and UG section respectively.
10.1 System Data

The distribution system in which the cables along with the joints and terminations are
expected to perform reliably over a period of 30-35 years, is a single phase, operating at 25
kV designed to carry earth fault current upto 14KA and maximum possible continuous
voltages being 52 kV, and cable conductor temperatures up to 90°C on a continuous basis
and under short circuit conditions up to 250°C. The service conditions shall be as per GS
clause 1.12.
Page 21 of 26


10.2 Governing Specification for Straight Through Joints

All 25kV Straight Through Joints shall be of Heat Shrinkable Type, conforming to IEC 60840
and shall be of 26/45 kV (52 kV) grade. The jointing kit should majorly consist of following
components and accessories-
i. Conductor Connection-
Mechanical shear bolt type connections (lugs and ferrules), made from the corrosion
resistant, high strength, high conductivity material shall be used for jointing of
copper/aluminium cable conductors. They should be designed and Type Tested as
per IEC 61238.
The connection design should be such that the resistance of the conductor connection
shall be less than 1.1 times the conductor resistance.
ii. Heat Shrink Tubing-

The electrical stress control for the cable insulation screen ends and over the
connectors shall preferably be achieved with a combination of a high permittivity void
filling mastic and a heat shrinkable stress control tubing. The stress control tubing
shall have a defined impedance property comprising of a resistance and high
permittivity. The AC Impedance of this tubing material shall remain constant inspite of
temperature rise and thermal ageing as a consequence of the temperature rise of the
conductor.
Following shall be the part of technical document for taking approval of Engineer-
a. A technical explanation in relation to the proposed electrical properties of the
material i.e. specific volume resistivity and permittivity to give a specific AC
Impedance.
b. Reports showing the effects of temperature and thermal ageing on the
impedance of the stress control material offered.
Page 22 of 26


c. The recommended lengths of the stress control material.

d) Volume resistivity and permittivity of the material considered for stress
relieving void filling mastic.
All types of heat shrink tubes shall be extruded and cross-linked before expansion. In
addition to the design and testing requirements as per IEC 60840, dimension check of
tubes when expanded and recovered shall be proved as per IEEE 404.
iii. Earthing and Bonding-

Tinned copper braids, Constant force springs, mechanical connector, sealing tapes &
mastics shall form the earthing/sheath continuity connection (as per approved bonding
plan for any special bonding technique). Additionally, Copper wire mesh shall be
wrapped around the joint with 50% overlapping followed by cotton tape. Continuity of
metallic screen/sheath shall be ensured to carry the fault current of 14kA for 3 sec.
10.3 Governing Specification for Terminations-

All 25kV Terminations shall be of Heat Shrinkable Type conforming IEC 60840 and
shall be of 26/45 kV (52 kV) grade. Also, in particular to design aspect, terminations
shall be of Class 1A type as per IEEE 48. The termination kit should majorly consist of
following components and accessories-
i. Conductor Connection-
All lugs shall be screwed connectors with shear head bolts, made from the corrosion
resistant, high strength, high conductivity material shall be used for terminating
Copper/Aluminium cable conductors. They should be designed and Type Tested as
per IEC 61238. The connection design should be such that the resistance of the
conductor connection shall be less than 1.1 times the conductor resistance.
Page 23 of 26


ii. Heat Shrink Tubing

The terminations for Indoor and Outdoor application shall comprise of a single non-
tracking, erosion and weather resistant heat shrinkable tubing. The stress control
system shall have excellent electrical stress distribution of the electrical field along the
length of the termination and prevent any overstressing of the material.
Following shall be the part of technical document for taking approval of engineer in
charge-
a. A technical explanation in relation to the proposed electrical properties of the
material i.e. specific volume resistivity and permittivity to give a specific AC
Impedance.
b. Reports showing the effects of temperature and thermal ageing on the
impedance of the stress control material offered.
c. The recommended lengths of the stress control material.
d. Volume resistivity and permittivity of the material considered for stress relieving
void filling mastic.
e. Minimum 2 number and 4 number of sheds to be considered for indoor and
outdoor terminations respectively and calculations proving the requirement of
creepage length to withstand specified voltage levels shall be part of the
technical document.
iii. Earthing and Bonding-

Tinned copper braids, Constant force springs, mechanical lug, sealing tapes & mastics
shall form the earthing connection. The cross section of copper braids shall be
suitable for the short circuit rating specified for the cable.
Bonding of cable metal screen to the armour and flexible copper braid shall be
provided with a constant force arrangement and further they shall be bonded (as per
approved bonding plan for any special bonding technique) with support clamps
Page 24 of 26


ensuring a lowest possible resistance path. The bonding area shall be adequately
sealed and shaped.
10.4 PACKING AND MARKING:

The packing of the kits shall be such as to prevent any ingress of moisture and or dust as
well protects the contents against mechanical damage. The external packing shall carry a
cable with the following information clearly marked
 Name of the manufacturer
 Manufacturer’s Batch No.
 Manufacturers Reference Kit No., Size(s), ratings of the Cable for which it is offered.
 Year of manufacturer.
 Expiry date of kit or any component(s) included in the kit contents.
A checklist stating the description and quantities of each component contained in the kit shall
be supplied in each kit with an illustrated installation instruction containing complete step-by-
step instruction. Each component of the kit shall be separately packed in a sealed
polyethylene wrapping and the component’s name and part No. shall be marked on the
packing. All components comprising the kit shall be clearly and permanently marked with the
suppliers and manufacturers names, product identification, batch number and year of
manufacture. Extruded and moulded components shall additionally be marked with their
expanded (as supplied) diameters and fully recovered internal diameters. Components and
kits shall be capable of being stored without deterioration in an ambient air temperature
between –5°C to 45°C when protected from direct sunlight or exposure to rain.
10.5 Additional requirement-

Cable jointing will be done by a qualified jointer, preferably the employee of the jointing kit
manufacturer, or a person duly trained and verified by the jointing kit manufacturer. In case
the jointer is not a regular employee of the jointing kit manufacturer, valid certificate of
Page 25 of 26


authorisation, issued by the kit manufacturer in favour of such jointer, will be produced before
stating the jointing/termination of the cable. Approved procedure for jointing/termination
issued by the jointing kit manufacturer and vetted by cable manufacturer will be submitted by
the contractor for approval of the Engineer, at least 28 days before commencement of
jointing/termination work. Due care should be taken before commencing jointing/termination
work at site and if any pre-condition of site requirement is not fulfilled, jointing/termination
work shall be cancelled till the time site condition is made favourable.
Page 26 of 26

Contract- DE-04 – Particular Specification- Annexure-24 (Iterface Document)1
Draft No. DFA/3337
78569/2021/O/o CSTE/P-I Attachment:Section VI Employer’s Requirements PS (Part-3).pdf
APPENDIX-2D (Corrected up-to 22.02.2021)
INTERFACE MANAGEMENT DOCUMENT FOR CIVIL & S&T (SIGNALLING, TELECOM, AFC/IT, PSD, UPS, GSM),
TUNNEL VENTILATION, ECS, E&M, POWER SUPPLY, ESCALATORS, LIFTS, SOLAR SYSTEM AND TRACK
CONTRACTORS OF UNDERGROUND, ELEVATED SECTION(s) & DEPOTS.
INDEX
S. No. Interface Page

No.
1 ATTENDANCE OF CIVIL CONTRACTOR(S) ON ALL SYSTEM WIDE 2
CONTRACTOR(S)
2 GENERAL INTERFACE REQUIREMENTS BETWEEN CIVIL AND ALL SYSTEM 8
WIDE CONTRACTOR(S)
3 INTERFACE BETWEEN CIVIL / DDC AND INDIVIDUAL SYSTEM WIDE 10
CONTRACTOR(s) (ELECTRICAL)
3.1 Civil with Tunnel Ventilation System (TVS) 10
3.2 Civil with ECS 11
3.3 Civil with E&M 12
3.4 Civil with Power Supply (ASS & ROCS) 14
3.5 Civil with Escalators 15
3.6 Civil with Lifts 17
3.7 Civil / PEB with Solar Power Plant Developer 18
3.8 Civil with Elevated OHE & ASS contractor 19
4 INTERFACE BETWEEN CIVIL / DDC AND INDIVIDUAL SYSTEM WIDE 21
CONTRACTOR(s) (SIGNAL,TELECOM, AFC, PG/ PSD, UPS(S&T)/ PS (S&T).
4.1 Common requirements 21
4.2 Tunnel requirement 23
4.3 Via Duct requirement 24
4.4 S&T Rooms Requirements 24
4.5 Operational Rooms requirement 26
4.6 Telecom Specific Requirements 26
4.7 PG/PSD Specific Requirements 28
4.8 AFC Specific Requirements 29
4.9 Signalling with Track Supplier/manufacturer 31
4.10 Signalling with Track Installation 32
5 Interfacing Requirements of Traction with Design & Build Contractor of
Tunnel / Box Section / Ramp (referred to as RAMP) 36
6 Interfacing Requirements - Traction with Viaduct Contractor (VDC) 36
7 Interfacing Requirements – Traction with Station Building Contractor(s) 37
(SBC)
8 Interfacing Requirements - Traction with Track Contractor(s) 38
9 Interfacing Requirements – Traction with Depot Contractor(s) 39
Page 1
Sd/- Sd/- Sd/- Sd/- Sd/- Sd/- Sd/-

ED / Elect. GM / E / UG-1 GM / E / UG-2 GM / E / RC-1 GM / E / Plg. CSTE/P-1 CSTE/P-2
Sd/- Sd/- Sd/- Sd/- Sd/- Sd/-

CPM-2 CPM-3 CPM-4 CPM-5 ED/Civil/P-2 CA

Draft No. DFA/3337
INTERFACE MANAGEMENT DOCUMENT FOR CIVIL & S&T (SIGNALLING, TELECOM, AFC/IT, PSD, UPS, GSM),
TUNNEL VENTILATION, ECS, E&M, POWER SUPPLY, ESCALATORS, LIFTS, SOLAR SYSTEM AND TRACK
CONTRACTORS OF UNDERGROUND, ELEVATED SECTION(s) & DEPOTS.
This document describes the interface responsibilities and obligations of Civil / DDC Contractor(s) with other system
contractors viz. Signalling, Telecom, AFC/IT, PSD, UPS (S&T), GSM, Tunnel Ventilation, ECS, E&M, Power Supply,
Escalators, Lifts, Solar System and Track and vice versa.
All above “Contractors” have been addressed as “SYSTEM WIDE CONTRACTOR(s)” for all interface purposes
wherein any specific mention has not been done. This document shall be made part of all these contracts so that clear
responsibility of each contractor is defined in every contract. This document is for underground, elevated & depot
works.
S. No. Item Description Role of Civil Contractor(s) Role of System Wide Contractor(s)
1. Attendance of Civil Contractor(s) on System Wide Contractor(s)
Work Areas i) Civil to provide properly levelled and debris i) System Wide Contractors to advise
free site storage space and works areas, requirements and date for handover
(i)
access to and within the site, offloading and to suit civil Contractor’s site program.
lowering areas for the use of all Contractors
subject to availability.
ii) System Wide Contractor to
coordinate with Civil Contractor for
ii) Civil to provide compacted and fully proper Work Areas, Access to/from
levelled space for movement of Hydra and site and loading / unloading areas.
parking of Cranes for lifting and lowering
activities including the space required for
crane outriggers.
(ii) Cranes Civil to permit use of cranes on site by other System Wide Contractors to ensure their
Contractors on a mutually agreed rental basis own arrangements for cranes and other
and subject to the availability of the same at machinery in case of the unavailability of
the worksite. the same with civil contractor
(iii) Scaffold Civil to permit other Contractors the usage of System Wide Contractors have to
scaffolding erected at site but only within the arrange their own scaffolding. The usage
timings as agreed by the Civil Contractor so of scaffolding erected by the civil
that it does not hamper the progress of civil contractor shall be allowed only during
works at mutually agreed terms and the periods as agreed by the civil
conditions. contractor, under the supervision of SHE
staff of System Wide Contractors.
(iv) Medical As per Phase-4 “Conditions of Contract on As per Phase-4 “Conditions of Contract
Safety & Health and Environment”. on Safety & Health and Environment”.
(v) Drinking Water As per Phase-4 “Conditions of Contract on As per Phase-4 “Conditions of Contract
(vi) Lighting Civil to provide general lighting to all common / Task lighting will be the responsibility of
general areas of the worksite till permanent the various agencies / system
lights become functional in that area or contractors.
issuance of Taking over certificate whichever
is earlier.
(vii) Power i) Civil to supply power distribution boards at System Wide Contractors may obtain
Page 2



Draft No. DFA/3337

each end of the concourse and platform power supply from civil contractor on
and at 150m intervals along the tunnel mutually agreed basis.
length for the use of all Contractors, power
capacity to suit the combined requirements
of each Contractor. The energy charge rate
per unit of consumption is to be mutually
agreed with the system Contractors.
ii) The power supply shall be maintained until

one month after energization of the LV
system at ASS level or the confirmation
from the system Contractors whichever is
later.
iii) Thereafter Civil may take power supply at

single point from ASS level on chargeable
basis from DMRC, as per the rates
conveyed by DMRC to the contractor for
that period and the same shall be re-
distributed to all system wide contractors by
civil contractor on suitably revised rates. In
Elevated station (two nos. at concourse
and two nos. at each platform level)
(viii) Survey and i) Civil to provide survey/ setting out grid line
Marking and level reference for stations and
tunnels.
ii) Civil Contractor to promptly provide Grid

Marking, Finish Floor Level (FFL), Platform
Centre & Platform Edge marking at
station(s) and Track Centre line marking as
required by system wide contractors for
ducting, piping, and cable tray work etc. in
case the marking gets faded/ erased due to
painting or any other work, then civil should
restore it promptly.
iii) In Elevated station (only FFL, False Floor

Level and False Ceiling Level)
(ix) Cleaning i) Civil will be responsible for general site, i) Once technical room is handed over,
Tunnel & Viaduct cleaning (except for the principal system contractor for
removal of material pertaining to System that room will take over responsibility
contractors) and will identify separate for cleaning the room.
designated dump areas for each contractor
for material to be deposited prior to
ii) Other system contractors to be
removal.
permitted to continue their work
following a mutually agreed and
ii) In case any system contractor fails to reasonable sequence on sharing
remove his material, the Engineer / basis without hampering/ damaging
Engineer's representative (DMRC the work of any other system
Page 3



Draft No. DFA/3337

employee) of Civil contract along with the contractor. System wide contractor
Engineers / Engineer's representative shall be responsible only for cleaning
(DMRC employee) of respective system of room/ area after taking over the
wide contractors shall inspect the site room / area from civil.
jointly and prepare a joint note. After written
notice of minimum three days to the system
contractor to remove his material,
thereafter civil Engineer may instruct civil
Contractor to remove it and the cost of the
same shall be borne by the system
contractor as mutually agreed upon by the
DMRC Engineers of various system wide
contractors and civil. Civil will hand over the
rooms to respective system contractors in
properly cleaned condition and after
providing proper lockable door & keys in a
secured condition.
(x) Security i) Civil in general will be responsible for i) System wide contractors has to
establishing an overall site security system provide prior authorisation in case
to the approval of the Engineer. The they have to bring-in/remove any
system should ensure that no person from material from worksite. No
any agency working at site may take out / loading/unloading of material shall be
bring in material without written allowed without prior authorisation.
authorization from the respective
contractor’s nominated site incharge and
ii) In case civil contractor is demobilized
civil security-in-charge.
before completion of System wide
contractors work, the Engineer /
ii) The verification of any person removing Engineer's representative (DMRC
material from site or bringing any material employee) of Civil contract along
to site, shall be sole responsibility of the with the Engineers / Engineer's
contractor to whom the material belongs. representative (DMRC employee) of
system wide contractors shall decide
to entrust the responsibility to the
iii) The system once approved by the Engineer
system wide contractor generally
of Civil contractor shall be binding on all
having the largest scope of
system contractors.
remaining work.
iv) In case civil contractor is demobilized

before completion of System wide
contractors work, the Engineer / Engineer's
representative (DMRC employee) of Civil
contract along with the Engineers /
Engineer's representative (DMRC
employee) of system wide contractors shall
decide to entrust the responsibility to the
system wide contractor generally having
the largest scope of remaining work.
(xi) Safety As per Phase-4 “Conditions of Contract on As per Phase-4 “Conditions of Contract
(xii) Toilet & As per Phase-4 “Conditions of Contract on As per Phase-4 “Conditions of Contract
Amenities Safety & Health and Environment”. on Safety & Health and Environment”.
Page 4



Draft No. DFA/3337

(xiii) Drainage Civil Contractor to provide and maintain Civil and E&M contractors will coordinate
temporary pump arrangements for all to install permanent pumps such that
requirements related to station and tunnel until drainage of the sump is not interrupted.
commissioning of permanent pumps or E&M contractor shall promptly
completion of civil works (issue of Taking over commission the permanent pumps post
certificate). installation.
(xiv) Access Dates Civil contractor to provide and update System System Wide Contractor to coordinate
Wide Contractor the access date for various and interface with Civil contractor to
area in station, tunnel, ancillary building etc. obtain the access dates for various area
in station, tunnel, ancillary building etc.
(xv) Civil Drawings i) Civil Contractor to provide the same as i) System Wide Contractor shall collect
requested by System Wide Contractor. Any Station, Tunnel Architectural/
proposed Change in drawings to be Structural drawings and sectional
promptly communicated by Civil contractor views in the concourse level,
to System Wide Contractor for his consent platform, and under croft level,
and subsequent up-dation of drawings prior ground level and etc. from Civil
to execution of civil works Contractor.
ii) In case common BIM interface is ii) Any proposed design / drawing
implemented, the drawings to be obtained changes as communicated by civil
from the same. contractor to System Wide
Contractors are to be approved /
commented by respective System
Wide Contractors promptly prior to
execution of civil works.
iii) Any proposed Change in system

drawings which may affect civil
drawings to be promptly
communicated by System Wide
Contractor to Civil contractor for his
consent and subsequent up-dation of
drawings prior to execution of civil
works.
iv) In case common BIM interface is

implemented, drawings shall be
obtained from the same.
(xvi) Services Civil Contractor to carry out works as per System Wide Contractor to timely
Requirements requirements of latest approved drawings. provide the room size, door size and
finish details for equipment rooms to
DDC for incorporation in Drawings.
(xvii) Niches Civil Contractor to provide the following niches System Wide Contractor to timely
as per latest approved drawings. provide details of Niches required by
a) Niches for ESP/PSP/L2-Switch/PSA at them in the station area along with
1200 mm from FFL necessary cut-outs.
b) Niche for FHC (Fire Hoze Cubicle) with
proper drain arrangement
Page 5



Draft No. DFA/3337

(xviii) Site Office and Civil contractor to provide properly levelled System Wide Contractor to coordinate
Storage Space and debris free site storage space and Office with Civil Contractor for provision of
(applicable for Space to System Wide Contractor as per the Proper and adequate Site Office and
underground instructions of the Engineer. Storage Space.
stations)
(xix) Regular Civil Contractor to organize coordination System wide contractors to attend
Interface meetings as per project requirement to discuss coordination meetings as per project
Meeting interface issue, exchange information, requirement to discuss interface issue,
drawings, documents etc. and inform DMRC exchange information, drawings,
for critical issues. documents etc. and inform DMRC for
Minutes of Meeting for these meetings to be critical issues.
maintained and communicated by Civil
Contractor.
(xx) Cut-outs in Slab Civil contractor to provide the cut-outs and System Wide Contractor to coordinate
(Floor / Ceiling), recesses in slab, walls etc. for passage of with DDC for timely incorporation of his
Walls etc. services as per SEM, WRD, CSD etc. requirement in SEM, WRD, CSD etc.
drawings provided by DDC. Civil contractor to drawings. System Wide Contractor to
coordinate with System Wide Contractor for jointly verify the compliance of all
joint inspection of cut-outs prior to casting. requirements prior to casting as per the
approved drawings.
(xxi) Lifting / Pulling Civil contractor to provide the lifting hooks to System Wide Contractor to provide the
Hooks the System Wide Contractors as per the equipment / plant weight, hook location
location and hook design communicated by and dimensional drawing of the hooks.
the System Wide Contractors.
(xxii) Foundations for i) Civil contractor to provide foundations as System Wide Contractor to provide
Equipment per requirements of System Wide details of Foundations required by them
Contractor. Any structural detailing required in various station areas for various
for foundations has to be carried out by equipment.
Civil Contractor based on design from
System Wide Contractor.
ii) Similarly, for underground stations, filling of

concrete in pump base etc is part of
foundation and to be done by Civil
contractor as per the requirement raised by
ECS TVS contractor.
iii) All foundations should be properly levelled

and edge protection (Nosing) to be
provided as per drawings.
(xxiii) Water Tanks i) Civil contractor to provide Water tanks of System Wide Contractor to coordinate
required capacity with partitions, and interface with Civil Contractor for
waterproofing, interconnection etc. as per adequacy of E&M, ECS, TVS & BMS
details provided in latest approved requirements.
drawings, as per Employer’s requirements
with all necessary sleeves, cut-out, flanges,
access manholes, manhole covers,
monkey ladder, drainage arrangement etc.
Page 6



Draft No. DFA/3337

as per requirements given by System Wide
Contractor in approved architectural
drawings.
ii) Tiling to be provided in all the tanks and

drain with sump also to be provided in all
the tanks. The Tank opening covers are to
be provided with lock and key
arrangements. Unused sleeves to be
closed by civil contractor. Overflow of water
tanks to be properly drained out to
respective sump by civil contractor as per
approved drawings.
(xxiv) Tunnel Cross i) Civil contractor to provide the Cross i) System Wide Contractor(s) to
Passage with or Passage as per the approved drawings. coordinate with Civil contractor for
without Sumps requirement of cross passages and
provide the details of Emergency
ii) Connection of pipes from Pump Deliver
Phones , Sump pits, cutouts for
Header and piping network for discharge of
pumps, access manhole, sleeves /
sump water along with all associated
cutout for pipes in cross passage
accessories like Butterfly valve, NRV, PG
wherever required for incorporation
etc. to be done by Civil Contractor.
in cross passage drawings by DDC
prior to construction of cross
passage.
ii) Supply & Installation of Sump Pumps

with LV Panel & Cabling etc. to be
done by System Wide Contractor.
(xxv) Reflected i) Civil Contractor to provide the RCP and i) DDC to provide the coordinated RCP
Ceiling Plan False Ceiling Installation Schedule to the along with all services arrangement
(RCP) System Wide Contractor whenever and location.
required by a system contractor. ii) System Wide Contractor(s) incl.
Furthermore, Civil Contractor to interface Telecomm. to further coordinate with
and coordinate with System Wide DDC & Civil Contractor for
Contractor for provisions and installation finalisation of E&M, ECS, TVS &
arrangement of Services. Civil Contractor BMS Services and installation
to obtain clearance from System Wide arrangement along with False Ceiling
Contractor before starting False Ceiling Installation schedule.
Works in any area. System Wide
Contractor to provide the same without
unnecessary delay. iii) System Wide Contractor to ensure
that no fixtures/installations/cabling is
done over the ceiling after issuing
ii) Civil Contractor shall provide openings and clearance for False Ceiling Works.
any specific supporting arrangement if Only those works which can only be
required by System Wide Contractor in done subsequently/after installation
false ceiling to install PIDS, Speaker, micro of false ceiling shall be allowed in
phone, CCTV, Analog/Digital clock, Leaky coordination with civil contractor.
cables, light fixtures, detectors or any other
minor equipment etc.
iv) System Wide Contractor to provide
location and opening size for any
iii) Easily Openable and re-fixable access opening required to be left by the
Page 7



Draft No. DFA/3337

doors / Trap doors for system wide civil contractor to facilitate installation
installations/piping valves, duct dampers of fixtures such as lights, detectors
etc to be provided by Civil contractor in the etc.
false ceiling as per the requirement given
by System Wide Contractors in approved
drawings.
iv) False ceiling supports should be installed

after coordination with System Wide
Contractor as per approved RCP.
(xxvi) Flooring / Wall Civil contractor to provide the cutouts and System Contractor to coordinate with
cladding works recesses in flooring/cladding works as per DDC for timely incorporation of his
latest architectural drawings provided by DDC. requirement in architectural drawings.
Civil contractor to coordinate with System They also need to jointly verify the
Wide Contractor for joint inspection of the compliance of all requirements prior to
same prior to carrying out flooring/cladding in execution of works.
that area.
(xxvii) Dewatering Civil Contractor to provide temporary pumping After issuing of Taking Over Certificate
arrangements along with Discharge piping at issued to Civil, E&M Contractor will do
all locations to avoid water logging in the the same till ROD.
Station and Tunnel Areas. Pumping
arrangement to be provided till Taking Over
Certificate.
(xxviii) Closing of Cut- i) Civil Contractor to close / optimize all cut- i) System Wide Contractor to give
outs outs as cleared by System Wide clearance to civil for optimization /
Contractor, wherever the gap for closing is closing of cut-outs after installation of
more than 200 mm in stations. services.
ii) Civil contractor will carry out fire proof ii) In Stations Fire sealing of openings
sealing of all cut-outs opening of more than of 200 mm and below gap, shall be
200 mm size gap at Stations with concrete / done by the E&M contractor.
block work.
(xxix) Temporary Civil Contractor to provide proper Temporary System Wide Contractor to take over the
Doors Doors with Locking arrangement at the time of rooms for working only after provision of
giving access to work areas till the provision of Temporary Doors with proper locking
permanent doors. arrangement by Civil Contractor.
(xxx) Epoxy Flooring Civil contractor will provide Epoxy flooring in System Wide Contractor will coordinate
TER, SER, UPS (S&T) at both Elevated & with civil contractor for Epoxy flooring in
Underground Station) & in PS room at TER, SER, UPS (S&T) at both Elevated
Underground Station, ASS, CHILLER, LIFT & Underground Station) & in PS room at
PIT and ECS Rooms as per the procedure and Underground Station and in ASS,
specifications provided System Wide CHILLER, LIFT PIT and ECS Rooms.
Contractor in the contract / as per the
instructions of the Engineer and as per the
provision in BOQ of Civil / Finishing works
2. GENERAL INTERFACE REQUIREMENTS BETWEEN CIVIL AND SYSTEM WIDE CONTRACTOR(s)
2.1 GENERAL i) Civil to provide openings as per latest i) Any changes if proposed are to be
INTERFACE approved drawings. requested by system wide contractor
Page 8



Draft No. DFA/3337

REQUIREMENTS ii) Civil will get pour card signed by concerned in writing well in advance, through
System Wide Contractor prior to casting to the Engineer of his contract to
ensure that work has been done as per architecture wing of DMRC for
approved drawings. incorporation in architectural
iii) Any modification in cut-outs etc for drawings, prior to execution of civil
improvement / better functioning of the works.
system shall be done by civil along with
undertaking from Electrical & S&T systems ii) System Contractor to sign the pour
contractors duly approved by respective card in coordination with civil
DMRC Engineers. contractor.
iv) Civil to assist System Wide Contractors in
planning equipment delivery route for major
iii) Any changes (such as change in
materials and plant of the system
service opening, lifting / pulling
contractors showing temporary and
hooks, foundation, ducts etc.)
permanent provisions in slabs and walls to
desired by the System Wide
permit future replacement of plant and to
Contractor post execution of any civil
allow initial transport from ground level to
work shall be on the account of the
final room location in consultation with
agency/ System Wide Contractor
system contractors.
responsible for the change, if not as
v) Civil to provide ingress / egress route per approved drawings.
including loading deck (in case of elevated
stations), closing / opening arrangements in
consultation with System Wide Contractor. iv) System Wide Contractor to plan and
propose their own Equipment
vi) Civil contractor to provide the temporary
Delivery Route in consultation with
opening of required size and access routes
civil contractor.
for delivery of equipment as proposed in
equipment delivery route.
No wall etc. to be altered/ closed in the v) All System Wide Contractors to
delivery route before clearance from provide the equipment & plants
respective System Wide Contractors. weight, dimension etc. to Civil
contractor to provide temporary
vii) Civil contractor to provide earthing terminal
opening and access route and the
for their structures, false ceiling structures
same to be agreed and reflected in
etc. (at underground stations) for which
Equipment Delivery Route Drawings
E&M contractors will provide no’s of
earthing points at north sides of platform.
viii) Treated / Raw WATER (QUANTITY & vi) System Wide Contractor to deliver
TYPE OF WATER AS PER the plants and equipment.
REQUIREMENT OF SYSTEM
CONTRACTOR 8 Lacs litres approx. per vii) E&M contractors will connect
station) shall be provided by civil for earthing points to earth civil
carrying out testing activities if a permanent structures, false ceiling structures
water supply arrangement is not available. etc. (at underground stations)
ix) Louvers (with bird mesh) in elevated
stations to be provided by civil contractor.
viii) Louvers size and specifications
x) The civil contractor shall conduct regular to be provided by E&M contractor in
meetings with other system contractors and elevated stations.
vice versa as necessary to clarify particular
aspect of the requirement of the works.
ix) All system contractors shall ensure
xi) Civil contractor as well as other system
the presence of their qualified /
contractors shall, in carrying out their
interface coordination responsibilities, raise experienced coordinating engineer
their observations well in time and provide during civil construction works to
Page 9



Contract- DE-04 – Particular Specification- Annexure-24 (Iterface Document)
10
Draft No. DFA/3337

sufficient information for the employer to enable proper interface with civil
decide on any disagreement between contractor so as to ensure timely
contractors. If any contractor, despite intervention (if necessary) and swift
having made reasonable efforts, cannot interfacing of works.
resolve any such disagreement, then the
decision of the employer shall be final.
ADDITIONAL INTERFACE BETWEEN CIVIL / DDC AND INDIVIDUAL SYSTEM WIDE CONTRACTOR(s)
3.
(ELECTRICAL)
3.1 Civil with Tunnel i) Civil to provide in designated rooms for i) TVS Contractor to supply the details
Ventilation system contractors drainage, shafts, of all loads, plant layouts, equipment
System (TVS) precast RCC slabs for covering the foundation for room sizes. Knockout
panels, cutout recesses, shaft/gallery
access hatch, galleries cutouts,
sizes and tunnel niche dimensions,
lifting/pulling hooks, walls for nozzles, Changes required to details
niches in C&C tunnel roof, trackside incorporated in approved drawings to
knockout panels. be provided well in advance of
ii) All ECS / TVS shafts, Masonry plenums, casting.
Masonry ducts etc including OTE and
UPE (if applicable) to be properly sealed ii) Chequer plate infill around nozzles
and to be provided with evenly finished will be provided by the TVS
internal surface free from any extra contractor.
sticking / hanging ply, wooden pieces or
any other material, any protrusions,
debris and unwanted material etc. The iii) The details of lifting hooks to be
internal surface including floors to be provided by Electrical System
provided with anti-dust paint as per Contractors to civil contractor prior to
finishing schedule. the casting.
iii) Louvers pertaining to architectural
finishing works to be provided by Civil iv) Louvers pertaining to VAC ventilation
contractor as per the architectural purposes and other technical
drawings. requirements such as in TVS / EVS /
For any open to sky shaft, MS gratings to SVS and other locations, are to be
be provided by civil contractor as per provided by the respective Electrical
approved drawings. System Contractors.
iv) Access doors suitably rated for Fire shall
be provided by civil in TVS shafts as per v) Any pipe pedestals if required by
requirements given by TVS contractor. TVS/VAC contractor shall be
Handrail shall be provided around ETVD installed by them.
cut outs in ECS / TVS plenum.
v) Skirting of 200 mm on all TVS vertical cut
outs and up stand of 200 mm on
horizontal cut outs shall be provided by
civil as per requirements given by TVS in
approved drawings.
vi) Lifting hooks shall be provided in nozzle
and fan rooms at location provided by
TVS contractor in approved drawings.
vii) Block work in nozzle room shall be done
after installation of nozzle.
3.2 Civil with ECS i) Civil to provide in designated rooms for i) ECS contractor to supply details of
system contractors drainage, equipment all loads, plant layouts, equipment
Page 10



11
Draft No. DFA/3337

foundations, pipe / pedestals, shafts cut- foundations, room drainage
outs, lifting / pulling hooks, canopy / slabs requirements, room sizes, pipe
to cover access hatch as per drawing. support pedestals, lowering hatches,
ii) Civil to design and build architectural cut-outs, recesses, shaft/gallery
finishes in public areas with provision for sizes.
ECS & E&M fixtures including cut-outs in
architectural finishes for passage of ii) Louvers pertaining to ECS such as in
services and installation of fixtures. shafts and other locations, are to be
iii) Civil to carry out a joint check with ECS provided by the respective Electrical
contractor for all drain points provided for System Contractors.
ECS / TVS to be free of any obstruction
and hand over before commencement of
iii) Any pipe pedestals if required by
testing of ECS Equipment. Drain channel
TVS/VAC contractor shall be
shall be covered with perforated drain
installed by them.
traps.
Concealed Drain pipe (vertical and
horizontal) will be laid by civil contractor
wherever required as per design.
iv) Louvers pertaining to architectural
finishing works to be provided by Civil
contractor as per architectural drawings.
For any open to sky shaft, MS gratings to
be provided by civil contractor as per
approved drawings.
v) All ECS Shafts, Masonry plenums, all the
rooms provided with air conditioning with
FCUs or other means, are to be provided
with drainage arrangements.
vi) All ECS / TVS shafts, Masonry plenums,
Masonry ducts etc including OTE and
UPE to be properly sealed and to be
provided with evenly finished internal
surface free from any extra sticking /
hanging ply, wooden pieces or any other
material, any protrusions, debris and
unwanted material etc. The internal
surface including floors to be provided
with anti-dust paint as per finishing
schedule.
vii) Access doors suitably rated for Fire shall
be provided by civil in ECS shafts as per
requirements given by ECS contractor.
viii) All FCUs coming above false ceiling are
to be provided with good quality hinged
openable access doors as per the sizes
given by ECS contractor.
ix) All the cut outs in the slabs for Piping,
cables / cable trays and ducts – whether
inside or coming under open sky- are to
be provided with adequate protection to
prevent any ingress of seepage / rain
Page 11



12
Draft No. DFA/3337

water etc.
x) Civil shall provide piping connection in
cooling tower area from soft water tank to
the cooling tower make up pipe.
xi) Pedestrian / walkway over pipe for
crossings the pipes shall be provided by
civil in cooling tower area to avoid
damage of pipe as per requirements by
ECS.
3.3 Civil with E&M i) Civil to provide in designated rooms for i) E&M contractor / E&M DDC to
system contractors drainage, equipment supply details of all loads, plant
foundations shafts/galleries, cutouts & layouts, equipment foundations room
recesses in stations & tunnel cross drainage requirements, room sizes,
passages, lifting/pulling hooks, earth mat cutouts, recesses, cables gallery /
(U/G station), earthing risers through shaft sizes, poles / structures for
base slab to earthing terminals (U/G lighting, support structures for cable
station). trays / lightning arresters, LV earth
ii) Civil to design and build architectural mat (U/G station) and earthing
finishes in public area with provision for terminals (U/G station) for assisting
E&M fixtures including cutout and civil contractor in planning his
provision in architectural finishes for activities.
passage of services and installation of
fixtures. The same shall be done in ii) E&M contractor to provide chequer
accordance with approved architectural plate / fire rated infill where opening
drawings. Civil contractor will also provide in floors exceed the dimensions of
structure member for installation of LV equipment in ASS.
Lightning Arrestors (LA), platform cable
tray etc. as per details furnished by E&M
contractor and DDC. iii) E&M contractor will provide required
breaker feeder, cabling and
iii) Civil to provide drainage channels at
terminations up to Civil starter Panel
track and undercroft level as per
of Submersible and Borewell pumps.
approved drainage plan.
iv) Civil to mark walkway level continuous in
Tunnel and track to give rail level marking iv) All hydraulic & plumbing pumps
on Tunnel sidewalks, to facilitate system (except bore well pumps) as well as
contractor. their starter Panels shall be provided
by E&M.
v) All borewell pumps to be provided by civil
contractor.
For all pumps including all drainage v) External Bus duct / Cable Tray
pumps; all pipings, fittings, accessories, support to be provided by E&M
etc. shall be provided by civil contractor contractor.
However, Civil to provide details of
submersible & borewell pumps rating & vi) The E&M contractor needs to
quantity of all pumps to E&M contractor provide all foundation details /
for providing required breaker feeder & drawings, hook details, cutout details
cabling up to Civil starter Panel etc. to DMRC well in advance so that
Civil contractor to provide and maintain the same are incorporated in the
temporary drainage pumps for all approved GFC prior to execution of
requirements related to station and tunnel civil works.
until commissioning of permanent pumps.
All Plumbing / piping along with vii) The E&M contractor needs to co-
Page 12



13
Draft No. DFA/3337

associated accessories for water supply ordinate with civil contractor so that
requirements to be done by civil both the E&M and civil works are
contractor. executed in sync and no re-work is
vi) Civil to provide HDPE Pipes for cables as required.
required by E&M contractor for external
lighting poles at road crossing, foot-path
area etc.
In case of FOB (where roof is not
provided), civil contractor to provide
mounting arrangement as per E&M
requirement.
vii) Equipment foundations shall be provided
by Civil contractor as per approved
drawings.
viii) Concealed Drain pipe (vertical and
horizontal) will be laid by civil contractor
wherever required as per design.
ix) The Civil contractor needs to co-ordinate
with E&M contractor so that both the
E&M and civil works are executed in sync
and no re-work is required
x) All finishing work of cut-outs, wall
chipping and AC drainage provided by
E&M contractor, to be done by the civil
contractor, in elevated stations.
xi) For laying of earth-strip in floor of ASS,
Concourse and platform, the interface to
be done by E&M, Traction and Civil
contractor.
xii) Civil to provide suitable location for
outdoor units of AC installation and easy
maintenance access in elevated station.
xiii) Water connection with drainage
arrangement to be provided by civil
contractor at outdoor units location for
cleaning of outdoor units as per approved
drawings.
xiv) Civil contractor to interface with E&M
contractor before laying of stones /
granite. Any cutting of floor / wall granite
required for laying raceway by E&M
contractor as per approved drawing to be
done by civil contractor.
Earthing Risers (for underground stations only) Proper earthing risers as per approved
E&M Contractor to coordinate with DDC for design with desired value shall be
providing proper drawings and design of earth provided by Civil Contractor. Earthing
mat to Civil Contractor. risers have to be provided up to the
location of test links provided by E&M
contractor. Furthermore, the risers shall
be covered by suitable and mutually
agreeable means to avoid theft.
Page 13



14
Draft No. DFA/3337

Earthing Terminals at Underground Stations
Civil to provide earthing terminal on all metallic
non-current carrying services related to civil in
the tunnel including terminals on OTE &
station box reinforcements as per inputs and
intervals provided by power supply contractor
to civil contractor.
3.4 Civil with Power i) Civil contractor to construct rooms, i) Power supply contractor to supply
Supply (ASS & knockout panels, room finishes, equipment details of all loads, plant layouts,
ROCS) foundations, shafts / galleries, cut-outs, equipment foundations, room sizes
recesses, cable ducts within slabs, (ASS, UPS, Sectioning rooms),
lifting/pulling hooks, earth mat, earthing cutouts, recesses, cable gallery/shaft
risers through base slab to earthing sizes, cable ducts within slabs,
terminations as per the approved drawings. lifting/pulling hooks, HV earth mat
ii) Civil to mark centre line of track on the and earthing terminations.
soffit of the tunnel and station box area. ii) Power supply contractor to make
iii) Civil / Tunnel building contractor to provide good any unused OCS bracket drill
the wriggle survey of the station & Tunnel holes in the tunnel roof.
sections of the alignment for the designing iii) Power supply contractor to provide
of the OCS. The wriggle survey data will be chequer plate / fire rated infill where
provided according to the requirements of openings in floors or walls exceed
the traction contractor. All the parameters the dimension of the HT equipment
to be provided by the civil / tunnel building or due to any other reason.
contractor in the wriggle survey should be
fixed in consultation with the traction
contractor.
Auxiliary Substations i) Power supply contractor will provide
Station building contractor will provide ASS ASS layout drawings showing
room complete in all respects, including equipment layout, access doors etc.
flooring, access doors, and interior finish, but ii) Power supply contractor will provide
excluding foundations for transformer and necessary details of foundations for
panels. Station building contractor will provide transformers, panels other
the necessary cut-outs for cables entry and equipment etc. Alternatively, the
exit. Contractor of this Tender can provide
suitably designed anchor fasteners
to fix transformers, 33kV panels,
Battery chargers etc to the basic
floor / pedestal.
i) Provision of openings in slabs etc. for cable i) Power supply contractor will provide
entry and cable exit drawings showing the locations and
sizes of openings to be provided in
slabs etc. to allow passage of cables.
ii) HDPE pipes for cables as per approved
drawing / as per requirement for track
crossing of cables inside station area / ii) DDC will prepare cable route
tunnel will be provided by Civil contractor. drawing and Station Building
The construction should take into Contractor will provide openings as
consideration cable bending radius per drawing.
(specified in the drawing), cable fastening
arrangements and suitable provision to
iii) Power supply contractor will interface
Page 14



15
Draft No. DFA/3337

cover the cables in public places. with Station Building Contractor to
ensure correct and adequate cable
routings, openings etc.
iv) Power supply contractor will supply,

install and connect cables.
i) Provision of cable path–shafts, cable i) Power supply contractor / DDC will
supports for cables from Ground level to provide necessary drawings & details
ASS. for cable routing.
ii) Station building contractor will provide a ii) Cable path / route from RSS to
cable gallery or shaft for entry of cables station to be done by Power supply
coming from RSS buried in ground /pipes contractor.
etc. for taking them up-to ASS (at
designated stations). Sealing and water
proofing, if any required shall be provided
by civil. This excludes the cable path from
RSS to station.
iii) Cable path for 33 kV cables on Via-duct iii) Traction contractor will provide HT
from Via-duct to ASS room cable path and brackets or tray
inside ASS room and from Via-duct
to ASS.
iv) Civil Contractor will provide HT Cable path
and brackets over Via-duct.
3.5 Civil with i) Civil contractor to design and build Escalator contractor to supply shaft& pit
Escalators escalator shaft with top, mid and bottom dimensional data, end and intermediate
supports, finishes meeting the escalator support details, earthing requirement,
requirements at top/bottom and sides of equipment loads, cutout & recess
escalator, lifting hooks, pit, drainage and details, lifting hook locations & details,
provision for cable and sprinkler pipe services routes, delivery route and
routing, ECP recess and SCR layout method of erection, ECP recess
ii) Civil Contractor to provide properly dimensions, SCR equipment layout, well
levelled, clean, clear and debris free work in advance so that same can be
areas, shaft, shaft access (including cable incorporated in architectural GFCs of
entry holes / cut-out), hooks / holes, civil works.
loading / unloading areas and clear
access from road to shaft for erection of
Escalator as requested by Escalator
Contractor.
iii) Civil contractor to provide properly
levelled, clean, clear and debris free site
storage space.
iv) Civil contractor to provide embedded
hooks In case of drilled hooks, load test
also to be conducted and test report to be
provided.
v) Civil contractor to match stone finished
floor level with the level of escalator floor
plate (at top and bottom landings). If
required, civil contractor will create
suitable slope as per approved
Page 15



16
Draft No. DFA/3337

architectural drawings.
vi) Civil contractor to provide Slope of
finished floor away from Escalator to
prevent entry of mopping water as per
approved drawings.
vii) Civil Contractor to provide gravitation
drainage system of Escalator Pit as per
approved drawings. In addition, for
underground stations Drainage system of
Escalator Pit must be connected with
sump pump, whereas sump pump depth
must be more than Escalator pit to avoid
backflow of water in Escalator pit.
Drainage sump pit of escalator should be
away from the escalator landing to avoid
any inconvenience to users.
viii) Civil contractor to provide canopy and
rain shelter for Ground to Concourse
Escalator as per approved drawings.
ix) Civil contractor to provide SS railing near
top and bottom landings (both LHS &
RHS) of Escalator for preventing falling
hazard as per approved drawings as per
the provision in scope of work.
x) Civil contractor to fill the gap between
Escalator and adjacent wall / stairs as per
xi) Civil contractor to ensure access to
escalator top and bottom pits through
floor plate for maintenance requirements
and there shall be no obstruction in full
opening of floor plate.
xii) Civil contractor to ensure suitable
protection and covering of future
escalator shafts as per the provision in
scope of work.
xiii) Civil contractor to ensure that Station
Entry Escalators shall be provided with
suitable locking arrangements through
gate / rolling shutters / or any other
arrangement to prevent theft and
sabotage. The locking arrangement shall
not obstruct with escalator maintenance
requirement in any way as per the
provision in scope of work.
xiv) Escalator floor plate landing sill stone
flaming for making it rough surface to be
done by civil contractor as per the
xv) PCC work in lift and pit cleaning to be
done by civil contractor before handing
Page 16



17
Draft No. DFA/3337

over to Escalator contractor.
3.6 Civil with Lifts i) Civil contractor to design and build lift Lift contractor to supply shaft
shaft with cutouts, recesses, provision for dimensional data and details of cut-outs,
lifting beams, drainage, rain shelter and recesses, lifting beams, drainage,
internal shaft plaster & anti-dust paint provision for surface mounted fixtures,
finish as per approved drawings detailed load calculation, design and
(Finishing of the shaft as per approved drawings of load beams / hooks etc. well
drawing and BOQ). in advance so that the same can be
ii) Civil Contractor to provide properly incorporated in the architectural GFCs
levelled, clean, clear and debris free work prior to casting of the lift shaft.
areas, shaft access (including cable entry
holes / cut-out), hooks / holes, loading /
unloading areas and clear access from
road to shaft for erection of LIFT as per
requirement of Lift Contractor.
iii) Civil Contractor to provide gravitation
drainage system of Lift Pit as per
requirement of Lift Contractor. In addition,
for Underground station Drainage system
of Lift Pit must be connected with sump
pump and its depth must be more than
Lift pit to avoid backflow of water into Lift
pit. Drainage sump pit of elevator should
be away from the elevator landing to
avoid any inconvenience to users.
iv) Civil Contractor to do water proofing of
Lift Shaft (wherever required) as per
requirement of Engineer
v) Civil contractor to provide Slope and
proper drainage arrangement of
accumulated water on roof of lift shaft.
vi) Civil contractor to provide ventilation cut-
out for adequate fresh air ventilation as
per requirement of Lift Contractor as per
approved drawings.
vii) Civil contractor to provide canopy
(including drainage system at roof of Lift
Shaft) and rain shower protection for Lifts
Shaft exposed to open sky.
viii) Civil contractor to construct lift shaft as
per dimensions in drawing with proper
plumbness. In case of any subsequent
correction / alteration, civil contractor to
provide certificate that Lift Shaft is
suitable for installation and safe operation
of lift.
ix) Civil contractor to match stone finished
floor level with the level of Lift Landing Sill
(at all landings). If required, civil
contractor will create suitable slope in
stone finishing work as per approved
Page 17



18
Draft No. DFA/3337

architectural drawings.
x) Civil contractor to provide adequate slope
(away from Lift Landing) as per approved
drawings.
xi) Civil contractor to provide plaster on rear
side (visible from inside of Lift Shaft) of
landing brick / block work as per the
xii) Civil contractor to provide embedded
hooks. In case of drilled hooks, load test
also to be conducted and test report to be
provided.
xiii) Civil contractor to interface with DMRC
and Lift Contractor for the placement of
water tank to avoid any seepage in Lift
Shaft.
xiv) Civil contractor to coordinate with Lift
Contractor for construction of Lift
Landings brick and finishing work at each
landing.
xv) Civil contractor to provide ramp along
with SS Handrails on both sides for
access to ground floor elevators as per
xvi) Future elevator shafts to be protected
suitably by suitable block / brick work by
civil contractor.
xvii) Civil contractor to fill PCC at entrance sill
and sill stone at all landings.
xviii) Landing sill stone flaming for making it
rough surface to be done by civil
contractor as per the provision in scope of
work.
3.7 Civil / PEB with i) Design, fabrication, supply and erection of Solar contractor to provide detailed
Solar Power structural steel for roof inspection platforms drawings / arrangements details etc. to
Plant Developer and catwalks on the roof shall be done by DMRC well in advance so that the same
civil contractor as per the drawings and may be incorporated in the architectural
details approved by DMRC. GFC of the civil works.
ii) Roof structure and roof sheet shall be
planned as per solar module installation
arrangements.
iii) Providing life-line (safety rope on the roof)
for maintenance / cleaning purpose as per
the approved drawings shall be in the
scope of civil contractor.
iv) Civil contractor shall provide ladder to
access roof and water connection on the
roof for cleaning of solar modules.
3.8 Civil with i) Since Over Head Equipment are installed i) Electrical System contractor will
Elevated OHE & on the outer parapets of viaduct, access to provide drawings, and connect
Page 18



19
Draft No. DFA/3337

ASS contractor OHE from stations through the parapet is earthing points.
required.
ii) Railing on both sides of viaduct (UP and ii) System Contractor to sign the pour
Down) is required for the safety of the staff card in coordination with civil
attending OHE at designated locations like contractor for each location.
Anchor mast, Anticreep mast, Switching
Posts etc. Civil Contractor to interface with
OHE contractor for locations with monkey
ladder as per requirement of Traction
contractor at designated locations within
SOD.
iii) In case of Box girders, the man-holes may
be provided with heavy duty covers and
proper locking arrangement so that viaduct
cannot be accessed by miscreants (through
these holes)
iv) ASS should be avoided under the
expansion joints of viaduct.
v) Trees at both side of viaduct may be
removed in such a manner that no tree
branch comes within 10 m from the viaduct.
Long trees such as Eucalyptus may not be
allowed up to 50m distance from the via-
duct as per advice and confirmation of
DMRC.
vi) The earthing terminal of the railing should
be provided. Sectioning of railing to be
done as per earthing requirement, and
drawings.
vii) Drop Arms provided under the RCC Roof of
the Elevated stations to be provided with
earthing terminal. Proper earthing
arrangement in the RCC Roof is required
for the safety of the occupants. This aspect
may be taken care in Phase- IV. Earthing
scheme and drawing for such installation is
to be developed in consultation with
Electrical department.
viii) The width of the parapet should
accommodate the mast base plates
properly, as at several locations in Ph III
base plates were protruding beyond the
parapet. Adequate width of parapet to be
ensured by the civil contractor as per
approved drawings approved by DMRC.
ix) OHE Holding down bolt threads at parapets
should be greased and properly covered by
civil contractor so that damage to threads
can be avoided during
shifting/transportation.
x) For Underground Station design should be
such that access to the ASS rooms are
Page 19



20
Draft No. DFA/3337

directly from the platform and no access to
track is required for the entry to entry
ASS/Switching stations.
xi) For all bridge-type structures, minimum
electrical clearances from rail level/parapet
level/platform level and from central line of
the track should be as per ED/TR/Plg Note
no DMRC/Elect/TR/T28-B1/387 issued on
dated 31.08.2017 duly approved by
Competent Authority. (Appendix-A)
xii) A loading deck of minimum size 3.0 m x 5.0
m for loading and unloading of equipment
outside the ASS room to be considered
which may change as per the requirements
at site and system contractors’
requirements. Niche of about 2.5 m x 2.0 m
x 0.5 m should be provided nearer to S & T
room for the installation of ACDB.
Page 20



21
Draft No. DFA/3337
S. Item Description Role of Civil /Track / DDC Contractor(s) Role of System Wide
No. Contractor(s)
4. ADDITIONAL INTERFACE BETWEEN CIVIL / TRACK/ DDC AND SYSTEM WIDE CONTRACTOR(s)
(SIGNALLING, TELECOMM., PSD, UPS & AFC) (UNDERGROUND, ELEVATED & DEPOT)
4.1 Common Requirements
(i) a) Water clogging is to be avoided near a) DDC/Architect to make relevant a) Inputs to be given by S&T
signalling equipment like Signal, Axle provisions in the drawing as per inputs Contractor(s)
counter, Point machine, Marker board, given by S&T System contractor(s). b) Execution of the work to
Norming Points and in S&T rooms.
be coordinated with Civil
contractor.
b) There should not be any water flowing b) Civil Contractor to execute the work as
in S&T rooms. Any drainage pipe per drawing
passing through S&T Room should be
avoided. There should not be any
provision of water tank above the S&T
rooms.
(ii) There should not be any kind of a) DDC/Architect to make relevant Signalling/Telecom/PSD
infringement with Signalling / Telecom/ provisions in the drawing as per inputs contractor to coordinate with
PSD installations in Tunnel /Viaduct and given by S&T System contractor(s). DDC/Architect contractor.
station box area with other systems
(iii) a) Provision of architectural finishes in a) Material for Acoustic treatment shall be Inputs to be given by
station and S&T rooms, acoustic jointly decided by DDC/Architect, Signalling, Telecom, PSD,
treatment and building materials of the Telecom and Civil contractors. AFC /UPS(S&T)/ S&T PS
entire station Contractor(s).
b) At Elevated/ underground station & b) DDC/Architect to make relevant

depot provision of space for Telecom, provisions in the drawing as per inputs
Signalling, AFC, PG/PSD cable tray/ given by S&T System contractor(s).
Raceway connectivity between
platform level, concourse level, under- c) Civil Contractor to execute the work as
croft level, road level & different per drawing.
buildings in depot. Access provision at
each level for future maintenance
should be kept. d) However, since Signalling, Telecom,
PSD, AFC /UPS(S&T)/ S&T PS system
c) S&T shaft of appropriate size to be Contractor(s) are not in place at time of
provided for each level at station area. finalisation of drawings, minor changes,
and Slab (working platform) if required, in the drawings (pre-
appropriate size in S&T Shaft is execution) / work (post execution) may
required at each level have to be undertaken, based on inputs
from the respective contractors, when
they are on board.
(iv) a) Minimum distance of 2 meters DDC/Architect to make relevant provisions Inputs to be given by
(horizontal) to be maintained between in the drawing as per inputs given by S&T Signalling, Telecom, PSD
OHE and Signalling, Telecom, PSD System contractor(s). contractor(s)
equipment at Platform level.
b) Height of lowest part of Display Board/

Clock should be at least 2.5 meters
above finished floor level.
Page 21



22
Draft No. DFA/3337

No. Contractor(s)
(v) At elevated station following cut-outs are a) DDC/Architect to make relevant Inputs to be given by
to be provided in vicinity of TER/SER in provisions in the drawing as per inputs Signalling, Telecom and PSD
Platform beams and track supporting given by S&T System contractor(s). Contractor(s)
structure of both platforms for cable entry
b) Civil Contractor to execute the work as
from cable - trough / hangers provided on
per drawing.
viaduct at track level to TER/SER. These
cut-outs should be at least 300 mm
above the track bed level to avoid any
seepage.
a) For signalling:
- Interlocking station
4 no’s cut-outs (500x200) in DN/UP
PF beam & 2 no. cut-outs (500x200)
in UP/DN PF beam
- Non-Interlocking station
2 no. cut-outs (500x200) in each UP
& DN PF beam for
b) For Telecom:
2 Nos of cut outs (500x200mm).in both
UP & DN side
c) For PSD:
2 Nos of cut outs (500x200mm) in both
UP & DN Side
(vi) At underground station: a) DDC/Architect to make relevant Inputs to be given by
- with side platform- 2 nos. of PSBs of provisions in the drawing as per inputs Signalling, Telecom and PSD
area 4 SQM or ESP/PSP/CCTV/PSA given by S&T System contractor(s). Contractor(s)
niche should be provided at each
platform for side platform station, and
per drawing.
- with island platform - 1 number of
PSB of area 4 SQM. In case of
ESP/PSP/CCTV/ PSA niche,
appropriate size should be taken to
accommodate signalling requirements.
(vii) For Underground Stations with side a) DDC/Architect to make relevant Inputs to be given by
platforms connectivity between both provisions in the drawing as per inputs Signalling, Telecom. and PSD
under crofts for Signalling Cable routing given by S&T System contractor(s). Contractor(s)
should be provided with cross over pipes
and connectivity with other station areas
per drawing.
as per signalling/ Telecom/ PSD
requirements.
(viii) a) In Depot, Data/Power trenches with a) DDC/Architect to make relevant Inputs to be given by
covers and pull pit arrangement to be provisions in the drawing as per inputs Signalling and Telecom.
provided from TER / SER to different given by S&T System contractor(s). Contractor(s)
utility buildings like DCO, Canteen,
substation, Time office, P-Way,
Inspection bay, Auto wash plant, b) Civil Contractor to execute the work as
Stabling Shed, Pump room, Workshop per drawing.
building, Pit wheel lathe and RSS/TSS
Page 22



23
Draft No. DFA/3337

No. Contractor(s)
building, security rooms, Staff rooms,
watch tower, depot entry /exit etc.
Hume pipes shall be used for track
crossings and providing connectivity
from trench up to utility buildings, Staff
Quarter etc.
b) Trench for OFC to be provided with

maximum possible route diversity from
ramp up to TER/ SER. Cable
support/ladder on pillars for OFC route
from viaduct to ground level up to
telecom trench.
(ix) a) Provision of Temporary power and a) Civil to provide power distribution boards a) Task lighting will be
illumination in Tunnel/station area to be at each end of concourse and platform responsibility of Signalling/
provided for installation of level and at 150 m interval along tunnel Telecom/ UPS(S&T) / PS/
signalling/Telecom/GSM/AFC/PSD/ length for use of all contractors, power GSM/ AFC contractor(s).
UPS(S&T)/PS system equipment(s). capacity to suit the combined
b) Compliance to Safety,
requirements of each contractor.
Health and Environment
b) The energy charge rate per unit of
(SHE) requirements shall
consumption to be mutually agreed b) Civil Contractor to coordinate with
be ensured by
between concerned contractors. Signalling/ Telecom/ UPS (S&T)/ PS /
Signalling/Telecom/ UPS
GSM contractor(s).
(S&T)/ PS/ AFC) contractor
4.2 Tunnel Requirements
(i) Provision of space on outer edge of tunnel DDC/Architect to make relevant provisions Inputs to be given by
wall of Bored Tunnel /Cut & Cover tunnel in the drawing as per inputs given by Signalling and Telecom.
for installation of stand-offs for laying of Signalling & Telecom System contractor(s) Contractor(s)
LCX cables for GSM/TETRA /Signalling
System.
(ii) Provision of space on tunnel, outer DDC/Architect to make relevant provisions Inputs to be given by
edge/Inner edge of tunnel wall of Bored in the drawing as per inputs given by Signalling and Telecom.
Tunnel and Cut & Cover area of tunnel Signalling & Telecom System contractor(s) Contractor(s))
for installation of Signalling/Telecom /
GSM equipment(s) (signal, axle counter,
point machine, WNRA, CCTV, marker
boards/GSM repeaters etc) as per
Signalling/Telecom /GSM requirements.
(iii) a) Cross over pipes are required for a) DDC/Architect to make relevant a) Inputs to be given by
laying of Signalling /TETRA /GSM/ provisions in the drawing as per inputs Signalling & Telecom
Fibre/ Emergency Telephone (Data & given by S&T System contractor(s). Contractor(s)
Power) cables from under-croft to the b) Execution of the work to
outer edge of tunnel wall in station be coordinated with civil
b) Civil/Track Contractor to execute as per
Box /Cut and Cover/ Tunnel Area for contractor
drawing.
each tunnel as per Signalling &
Telecom requirements.
b) Separate pulpit to be provided in Cut
and Cover area for Signalling and
Telecom.
c) Cross over pipes are required
wherever crossing of
Page 23



24
Draft No. DFA/3337

No. Contractor(s)
Telecom/Signalling/GSM cables is
needed.
(iv) Provision of space for emergency DDC/Architect to make relevant provisions Inputs to be given by Telecom
telephones at cross passages in the drawing as per inputs given by Contractor.
Telecom. System contractor(s).
(v) Provision of Signage and Operating a) DDC/Architect to make relevant Inputs to be given by Telecom
instructions for Emergency/ Help provisions in the drawing as per inputs Contractor
Telephone in Tunnel and at Station area. given by Telecom. System contractor(s).
b) Civil/Signage Contractor to execute as

per drawing
(vi) Provision of 2 X 100mm of Core cutting in a) DDC/Architect to make relevant a) Inputs to be given by
Mid shaft wall (UP & DN side) for provisions in the drawing as per inputs Telecom Contractor.
Telecom cables Entry shall be required. given by Telecom. System contractor(s).
b) Execution of the work to be
b) Civil contractor to provide the cut out coordinated with civil
and recesses in slab, walls, Mid shaft contractor
wall (both UP & DN side) etc. for
passage of services as per SEM, WRD,
CSD etc. as per drawing provided by
DDC.
c) Civil contractor to coordinate with

system wide contractor for joint
inspection of cut outs prior to casting.
4.3 Via- Duct Requirement
(i) Provision of Cable trench with covers/ a) DDC/Architect to make relevant a) Inputs to be given by
hangers for Signalling & Telecom on via provisions in the drawing as per inputs Signalling and Telecom
duct for laying Optical Fibre cable (UP & given by Signalling & Telecomm. Contractor(s).
DN side of track) and System contractor(s).
b) Execution of the work to be
Provision of Hanger arrangement for b) Civil Contractor to provide Cable trench coordinated with civil
laying of Signalling copper cables with covers/ hangers as per drawing. contractor
(DN side of track)
(ii) Provision of space on viaduct and DDC/Architect to make relevant provisions Inputs to be given by Telecom
parapet for installation of Telecom and in the drawing as per inputs given by S&T and Signalling Contractor(s).
Signalling equipment (signal, axle System contractor(s).
counter, point machine, WNRA, CCTV
Norming point, marker boards / Telecom
CCTV etc) as per Signalling & Telecom
requirements.
4.4 S&T Rooms

(TER / SER / SMR - at all locations,
UPS(S&T) room - at Elevated stations & Depot,
Power Supply (PS), GSM rooms - at Under-ground stations)
(i) Area of S&T rooms a) DDC/Architect to make relevant Inputs to be given by
provisions in the drawing as per inputs Signalling, Telecom, UPS
given by S&T System contractor(s). (S&T) & PSD Contractor(s).
Page 24



25
Draft No. DFA/3337

No. Contractor(s)
per drawing.
(ii) Provision of Fire rated Door(s) with clear DDC / Civil to provide required fire rated Inputs to be given by
opening size (FD1) of min. 1750 mm (W) doors with glass vision panel in S&T Signalling, Telecom, UPS
x 2400 mm (H) with glass vision panel in rooms. Height of centre of glass vision (S&T), PSD Contractor(s).
S&T rooms. panel from bottom will be 1500 mm.
(iii) Height Clearance DDC/Civil to ensure availability of clear Inputs to be given by
height of: Signalling and Telecom
i) 3 meters min. from FFL (False Floor Contractor(s).
Level) S&T rooms and
ii) 3.5 meters in GSM room
for installation of Signalling / Telecom/
PSD/ UPS (S&T)/ S&T PS and GSM
equipment.
(iv) Expansion Joints a) DDC/Civil to ensue expansion Inputs to be given by
joint/platform joint and Escalator area is Signalling and Telecom
avoided above TER / SER / UPS Contractor(s).
(S&T)/PS rooms.
b) In case expansion joint is unavoidable,
proper treatment of Expansion Joint to
be done to prevent water ingress.
(v) False Ceiling/ Window/ false floor a) False ceiling, windows/ ventilators are a) Inputs to be given by
not required to be provided by Civil Signalling and Telecom
contractors in S&T rooms. Contractor(s).
b) Proper ventilation is required in SMR b) Under floor tray & False

room. floor in TER and SER to
be provided by nominated
c) DDC/Civil to provide floor level of Telecom / Signalling
GSM/SMR room to be kept a step Contractor respectively.
higher above the level of corridor to
avoid any water ingress from outside.
(vi) Cut-Out location a) Underground Stations Inputs to be given by
UPS (S&T) room / S&T PS / SMR room DDC to ensure that S&T PS Room Signalling / UPS(S&T) / S&T
should be located between TER and PS and Telecom
SER. Contractor(s).
Civil to provide two cut outs (300 x 200

mm), in the common wall between SER
& S&T PS and TER & S&T PS room
below the false floor / in front of trench
as per Signalling & Telecom
requirements.
b) Elevated Stations/Depot
DDC to ensure that UPS (S&T) room
should be in between TER and SER.
Civil to provide two cut outs (300 x 200

mm) in the common wall between SER
& UPS (S&T) and TER & UPS (S&T)
room below false floor / in front of trench
Page 25



26
Draft No. DFA/3337

No. Contractor(s)
as per Signalling and Telecom
requirements.
c) There should not be any cut-out in floor

of UPS (S&T) / S&T PS / SER room
(vii) Trenches - UPS(S&T) / S&T PS room(s) a) Civil to Construct trenches in: Inputs to be given by
- UPS (S&T) room at Elevated station Signalling/ UPS(S&T) / S&T
and PS and Telecom
- S&T PS room at Underground station. Contractor(s).
b) Provision of Galvanised Checker plates

with handle over trenches, false flooring
if necessary, Epoxy painting of floor,
cut-outs for raw power and data cables
to SER, TER & ASS.
c) Seal the gaps after cable installation

work with fire resistant material
(viii) Handover of S&T rooms Civil to ensure availability of following items a) Inputs to be given by
as a minimum during handover of S&T Signalling/ UPS(S&T) /
rooms: - S&T PS and Telecom
- Wall cut-outs, concrete floor with anti Contractor(s).
dust/Epoxy paint,
- Wall finish with paint,
- Trenches in UPS (S&T) / S&T PS room, b) Execution of the work to be
- Doors with lock arrangement with three coordinated with civil
keys, contractor
- Temporary lighting etc.
4.5 Operational Rooms Requirement
(i) SCR / DCR / PCR / PPIO / Crew control a) Civil to provide counter / slab / furniture Inputs to be given by
room in SCR/DCR/PCR/PPIO crew control Signalling, Telecom, PSD,
room to keep Telecom / Signalling / AFC Contractor(s).
PSD / AFC systems equipment, MMIs
etc.
b) Holes are to be provided on

SCR/DCR/PCR counter table as per
requirement for installation of Signalling/
Telecom / AFC/ PSD systems
equipment MMIs, etc.
c) In case false ceiling is provided in

SCR/DCR, Openable Trap doors /
Openable type False Ceiling are to be
provided near cable tray risers.
4.6 Telecom Specific Requirement
(i) a) Suitable arrangement for separate a) DDC/Architect to make relevant Inputs to be given by Telecom
pipes i.e., Hume pipe/HDPE pipe for provisions in the drawing as per inputs Contractor(s).
data & power cables up to Entry/Exit given by Telecomm. contractor(s).
gate of parking. If entry & exit is
through separate gate, then, b) Civil Contractor to execute the work as
connectivity for power/data cable is per drawing
Page 26



27
Draft No. DFA/3337

No. Contractor(s)
required, for both.
b) Underground station:
Hume/HDPE pipe Connectivity from
MTNL/BSNL Termination to nearest
room (Pump/DG room/ ASS room/S&T
shaft)
c) Elevated station:
Hume pipe /HDPE pipe/ Cable Tray
connectivity with pulpit arrangement in
DG Room, Pump room etc. at road
level. Pull Pits are to be provided at
every bend and after every 15mts.
Separate suitable arrangement i.e.

Hume pipe/HDPE pipe will be
provided by Civil for data cables.
If above connectivity is not provided by

Civil, following connectivity provided
by E&M in DG Room & Pump room
shall be shared:
 Hume pipe/ HDPE pipe to be
shared b/w E&M and Telecom for
Power & Data Cable.
(ii) The route for LCX cable of TETRA shall a) DDC/Architect to make relevant Inputs to be given by Telecom
have following conditions. provisions in the drawing as per inputs Contractor(s).
a) False ceiling shall be non-metallic given by Telecomm. contractor(s).
and at least 200mm below LCX route
b) there shall be no obstructions b) Civil Contractor to execute the work as

between the ceiling and leaky coaxial per drawing
cable.
c) Wherever, LCX is close to wall, there

should not be any obstructions for
hanging the brackets.
(iii) a) Provision of space for installation and a) DDC/Architect to make relevant Inputs to be given by
mounting of PID/ Speaker/ CCTV/ provisions in the drawing as per inputs Telecom, Contractor(s)
Clock on portal in Station(s) & given by (Telecom) System
Depot(s). contractor(s).
b) Signage should not block visibility of
PIDs, Clocks, CCTV cameras
c) In Station/Depot area with false b) Civil Contractor to execute the work as
ceilings, cut outs / openable type per drawing.
Ceiling are to provide for installation
of speakers, clocks, PIDs and CCTV
cameras
d) At underground stations, holes are
to be provided in wall cladding for
installing Telecom equipment and
Page 27



28
Draft No. DFA/3337

No. Contractor(s)
Cut outs in false ceiling are to be
provided for mounting of speakers,
PIDs, Clocks, CCTV cameras etc.
(iv) For Station / Depot with Radio tower, a) DDC/Architect to make relevant Inputs to be given by
minimum 5x5 sq. meter space at road provisions in the drawing as per inputs Telecom, Contractor(s).
level in vicinity of TER is required for given by Telecom (Radio) System
Radio tower. The total cable length from contractor.
TER to top of radio tower (including radio b) Civil Contractor to execute the work as
tower height) should not be more than per drawing / requirement
100 meters.
Minimum distance from OHE should be

15 meters. Also, 5x50 sq mtr. open space
is required for assembly of tower and its
erection.
Hume pipes to be provided from nearest

S&T shaft up to Tower location with Pull
pits as per requirement. At every bend of
Hume pipe, pull pit is required.
‘Or’
If space for Radio Tower is not available

as per site conditions, then Roof Top
tower can be planed over entry/exit
structure. Civil contractor to provide
foundations as per requirements of
Telecom Contractor. Any structural
detailing required for foundations has to
be carried out by Civil Contractor based
on design from Telecom Contractor.
Proper access to Radio Tower shall be
provided by Civil Contractor.
4.7 PG/PSD Specific Requirement
(i) Provision of continuous RCC/steel a) DDC/Architect to make relevant a) Inputs to be given by PG/
structure beam throughout the platform at provisions in the drawing as per inputs PSD Contractor(s)
a height of 3250 mm from FFL for given by PSD System contractor.
installation of full height PSD and
b) Civil Contractor to execute the work as b) Execution of the work to be
perpendicular to track at a height of 3250
per drawing coordinated with civil
mm from FFL for installation of PED at
both platform end. contractor
Design dead load of PSD will be less

than 300kg/m, crowd load will be
minimum +3000 N/m2, shock load will be
minimum 2800 N and wind pressure will
be minimum ± 1200 N/m2.
(ii) Level of base plate of PG/PSD to be a) DDC/Architect to make relevant a) Inputs to be given by PG/
940 (+/- 5mm) from rail level. provisions in the drawing as per inputs PSD Contractor(s)
given by (PG/PSD) System contractor.
Page 28



29
Draft No. DFA/3337

No. Contractor(s)
per drawing b) Execution of the work to be
coordinated with civil
contractor
(iii) Installation of PG/PSD structure requires a) DDC/Architect to make relevant a) Inputs to be given by PG/
punching of holes on platforms for which provisions in the drawing as per inputs PSD Contractor(s)
600mm (unfinished) should be clear from given by (PG/PSD) System contractor.
platform edge towards the platform.
b) Civil Contractor to execute the work as b) Execution of the work to be
per drawing coordinated with Civil
contractor
(iv) Any gap remaining between PG/PSD a) Civil Contractor to execute the work as a) Inputs to be given by PG/
structure and civil structure near track per drawing PSD Contractor(s)
access stairs to be closed with block
b) Any gap remaining between PSD b) Execution of the work to be
work/suitable means by Civil
header box and down stand beam of coordinated with Civil
underground station structure to be contractor
covered with suitable arrangement by
civil to segregate the platform and
trackside environment
(v) After installation of PG/PSD the Civil Contractor to execute the work as per a) Inputs to be given by PG/
remaining gap between platform stone drawing PSD Contractor(s)
and PG/PSD base plate to be filled in
aesthetic manner matching the PSD
base. b) Execution of the work to be
coordinated with Civil
contractor
(vi) PG/PSD contractor will drill Execution of the work to be coordinated PG/PSD Contractor to
approximately 350 to 400 numbers of with PG/PSD contractor execute the work as per their
holes throughout the platform edge of requirement.
various sizes of diameter: 20 mm,
40 mm, 50 mm, 100 mm etc.
(vii) a) All PG Installation will be done keeping a) At Elevated station first cable hanger a) Inputs to be given by PG/
in view the SOD measurement. below platform coping provided by Civil PSD, Contractor
b) High tension electrical cables should contractor shall be used by PSD
run at a minimum separation of contractor
600 mm from PS/PSD cables and b) PG/PSD Contractor to
b) DDC/Architect to make relevant execute accordingly.
preferably in covered duct, when
provisions in the drawing as per
margin is less.
inputs given by (PG/PSD) System
c) Track central line
contractor.
c) Civil Contractor to execute the work as
per drawing
d) Track contractor shall provide track
central line as well as co-ordinate
installation of PG/PSD system.
4.8 AFC Specific requirement
1. a) Arrangement of main cable routes DDC/Architect to make relevant provisions Inputs to be given by AFC
including cable trays, troughs, in the drawing as per inputs given by AFC system contractor
hangers, trenches and ducts etc to all system contractor
AFC Equipment
b) Drainage and pits should not interfere
with Raceway/trench
Page 29



30
Draft No. DFA/3337

No. Contractor(s)
2. Tom / EFO ROOM
(A) a) Construction of counter in TOM a) DDC/Architect to make relevant a) Inputs to be given by AFC
Room with false ceiling and windows provisions in the drawing as per inputs system contractor
with glass panes. given by AFC System contractor.
b) Cut out in counter for cable/
equipment fixing b) Execution of the work to be
c) Cut out on front glass pane for b) Civil Contractor to execute the work as coordinated with Civil
exchange of ticket and money with per drawing contractor
passenger.
d) Cut for Speaker/mic to communicate
with passenger.
e) Trench covered with chequered
plates/alternative arrangement for
cable routing inside the TOM/EFO
Room.
f) Cut out on outside counter for
installation of pole of Ticket Reader.
g) For handicapped counter, space for
raceway.
h) Space on wall for placing wall
mounted Electrical cabinets and
Switch Rack in both TOM and EFO
Rooms.
i) Provide cutting and punching of
EFO/TOM wall for installation of
ticket reader pipe.
3 TVM/RCTM
(A) a) Covered arrangement / Niche a) DDC/Architect to make relevant a) Inputs to be given by AFC
arrangement for placing Ticket provisions in the drawing as per inputs system contractor
Vending Machines (approx. width given by AFC System contractor.
900mm) as deployed at line 8 Kalkaji
b) Civil Contractor to execute the work as b) Execution of the work to
Mandir.
per drawing be coordinated with Civil
b) Provision for laying raceways
providing connectivity to TVM. contractor
4 AFC OCC (Data Centre)
(A) Construction of AFC Operation Control a) DDC/Architect to make relevant a) Inputs to be given by AFC
Centre (Data Centre) provisions in the drawing as per inputs system contractor
given by AFC System contractor.
contractor
5 Barrier Related Works
(A) Installation of necessary Fixed glass a) DDC/Architect to make relevant a) Inputs to be given by AFC
barrier alongside gate array provisions in the drawing as per inputs system contractor
contractor
Page 30



31
Draft No. DFA/3337

No. Contractor(s)
6 Tactile path
(A) Provision and construction of tactile path a) DDC/Architect to make relevant a) Inputs to be given by AFC
for differently enabled people provisions in the drawing as per inputs system contractor
contractor
7 Cut-out marking for AFC Gate array
(A) a) Cut-out for gates and marking for a) DDC/Architect to make relevant a) Inputs to be given by AFC
future gates below the fixed barrier, provisions in the drawing as per inputs system contractor
on stone above junction boxes given by AFC System contractor.
alongside the Gate array. b) Civil Contractor to execute the work as b) Execution of the work to
b) Finishing of cut out works after gates per drawing be coordinated with Civil
are installed. contractor
4.9 Signalling with Track manufacture/ Supplier contractor
(i) Turn out assemblies and their mounting Track contractor shall: Signalling System contractor
and driving arrangement a) supply turnout assemblies including Shall:
(with Turnout supplier/vendor) second drive arrangement.
a) coordinate with track
b) Co-ordinate with Signalling contractor for manufacture/supplier and will
design of second drive arrangement. advise them about the points
machine to be used with
c) Turnout interface drawings including
dimensional design of holes
Point Machine are to be signed jointly
and their locations to facilitate
duly specifying location of holes with
the installation of machine
size and switch opening location from
with turnout-assembly.
SRJ.
b) Coordinate with track
manufacture/supply
contractor (s) for design of
second drive arrangement.
c) Turnout interface drawings
with point machine are to be
signed jointly specifying
location of holes with size and
switch opening location from
SRJ.
(ii) Installation of point machine over with Track contractor shall: Signalling System contractor
turnout PSC sleeper a) provide details of long sleeper to be Shall:
vendor/manufacturer. placed near ATC for installation of point a) coordinate with supplier of
machine. turnout sleepers and will
b) provide the supports, mounting provide the co-ordinate of
arrangement for Point machine over holes for facilitating the
extended sleepers and size and location installation of point
of holes as per requirement of S&T to machine.
install the point machine. b) Provide location of holes at
switch rail for installation
drive if required.
Page 31



32
Draft No. DFA/3337

No. Contractor(s)
c) Determine the position
(LHS or RHS), dimension,
supply and install the point
machines with all associate
mechanism and co-ordinate
with track contractor.
(iii) Scope of supplies a) Track contractor shall supply all track Signalling contractor shall
assemblies and track fasteners supply leading (1st) stretcher
turnouts, all stretcher bars (except bar / drive and coordinate
leading (1st) stretcher bar), second with track contractor(s) for
drive with all accessories, wherever design and installation.
required for second pull.
Signalling contractor Shall
b) The design of second drive supply locking arrangement
arrangement shall be co-ordinated and for second drive, if required.
interfaced with Signalling Contractor to
ensure full compatibility.
4.10 Signalling with Track Installation contractor

(i) Final track alignment and profile plansTrack Contractor shall provide the same Signalling contractor shall
giving the details of Turnout including incorporate the same in
curve, Gradient and Speed restrictions for Signalling and Train Control
Up and DN line separately. design.
(ii) Turn out assemblies and their mounting Track Contractor shall provide location of Signalling System contractor
and driving arrangement (Ballast less SRJ and turnout assemblies and shall shall:
and Ballasted track). provide mounting arrangement for point
a) Coordinate with track
machines including second drive
installation contractor (s)
arrangement.
on mounting of the turnout
assemblies including point
machines.
b) Supply and install the point
machines and 1st drive
(stretcher bar) suitable to
drive turnouts.
c) Coordinate with track
Installation contractor (s)
for design and installation
of second drive
arrangement.
d) Turnout interface drawings
with point machine are to
be signed jointly specifying
location of holes with size
and switch opening
location from SRJ.
(iii) Installation of point machine [Ballast less Track Contractor shall: Signalling System contractor
track and ballasted track] shall:
a) Provide location of SRJ (Stock Rail
Joint). a) Incorporate the same in
Signalling and Train
b) Provide supports, mounting
Page 32



33
Draft No. DFA/3337

No. Contractor(s)
arrangement for Point machine Control design.
(extended sleepers)
b) Provide all necessary
c) Provide pedestal / foundation for information such as
installation of point machine and second dimension of points and
drive based on information provided by machine to fasten with
Signalling contractor and coordinate extended sleepers and co-
for the same with the Signalling ordinate for the same.
contractor (in case of ballast less track).
c) Determine the position
(LHS or RHS), supply and
install the point machines
with all associate
mechanism and coordinate
with track contractor.
(iv) Scope of installation Track Contractor Shall install all track Signalling contractor shall:
assemblies and track fasteners turnouts, all
a) supply & install the point
stretcher bars (expect leading (1st)
machines, leading (1st)
stretcher bar), second drive with all
stretcher bar and co-
accessories, wherever required for second
ordinate with track
pull.
contractor(s) for design
and installation of second
drive arrangement.
b) supply locking
arrangement for second
drive, if required.
(v) Track X-ings of cables Track Contractor Shall provide cutouts in Signalling contractor shall:
the track plinth on ballast less track at a) provide all track
regular intervals in both elevated and crossings requirements
underground section. The gap between two to track installation
plinths to be used for cable crossings by contractor.
Signalling contractor.
b) provide pipes and
support and/or drilling of
holes in the plinth for
installation of signalling
gears if required.
(vi) Installation of trackside equipment, Balise Track Contractor shall coordinate with Signalling Contractor shall
in track plinth/bed in Underground Signaling contractor: coordinate with Track
section installation contractor(s) and
a) and provide pocket/cavity of adequate
a) provide location and size
size in track plinth/bed for installation of
of pocket / cavity for
balise (in under-ground sections). installation of balise (in
b) for drilling of holes in guard structure for UG sections).
installation of Balise stand. b) Drill the holes in guard
(In elevated section). structure for installation of
Balise stand. (In elevated
c) to ensure full compliance of schedule of section).
dimensions.
c) Furnish the final sizes of
track side equipment and
co-ordinate with Track
Page 33



34
Draft No. DFA/3337

No. Contractor(s)
installation contractor(s)
to ensure full compliance
of schedule of
dimensions.
(vii) Track connections Track Contractor shall: Signalling Contractor shall

a) Coordinate with Signalling Contractor supply and install axle
for axle counter fixtures/wheel sensors counter fixtures/wheel sensor
and provide proper space between and co-ordinate with track
bottom of the rail and track plinth/bed for installation contractor so as to
installation of axle counter wheel ensure that proper space is
sensor. available between bottom of
b) Coordinate with Signalling contractor in the rail and track plinth/bed
installation of axle counter fixture/wheel for installation of axle counter
sensor as per the requirement of
wheel sensor (will ensure
Signalling contractor.
installation of axle counter by
c) Coordinate with Signalling contractor 45mm below the top surface
and chipping of track plinth upto 20 mm
to accommodate the clamp of axle of the rail).
counter wheel sensor will be done so as
to ensure the provision of 65 mm space
between bottom of rail and track plinth.
(viii) Installation of points operating a) Track Contractor shall provide proper a) Signalling Contractor
mechanism. gauge, housing and packing of points shall check proper gauge,
and opening of switches at agreed housing and packing of
locations and shall carry out all other points and opening of
works as required to make the point switches as agreed
suitable for installation of point machine during supply contractor
by Signalling Contractor. stage and shall co-
ordinate for operation of
switches and all other
b) No Gap in housing and packing should
items necessary from
be there up to 3rd sleeper/ fastener/
signalling point of view.
chair plate w.r.t. Point Machine location
in facing direction/ towards turnout (1:9 b) Signalling contractor shall
in S. G). make necessary
adjustment to points
operating mechanism as
required by track
installation contractor(s)
at the time of track
parameters correction
and tamping of ballasted
turnouts.
(ix) Testing of points and crossings Track Contractor Shall Jointly test with Signalling Contractor shall
Signalling contractor during installation and Jointly test with track
while commissioning of point machines and installation contractor(s)
during integrated testing and during installation and while
commissioning and rectify all defects commissioning of point
pertaining to track, if any, identified during machines and during
testing and commissioning of points. integrated testing and
Page 34



35
Draft No. DFA/3337

No. Contractor(s)
commissioning.
(x) Marking of Fouling Mark at site and a) Track contractor shall provide the Signalling Contractor shall
installation of Fouling Mark marker location(s) of Fouling Mark and mark incorporate the same in
board(s) at appropriate location(s). the location(s) of Fouling Mark at site. Signalling and train control
b) The track contractor shall install the design.
Fouling Mark marker board(s) at
appropriate location(s).
Page 35



36
Draft No. DFA/3337
5) Interfacing Requirements of Traction with Design & Build Contractor of Tunnel / Box Section / Ramp
(referred to as RAMP)
Item Item Description RAMP DDC/EPC/TRACTION CONTRACTOR
No.
1 Installation of RTU The ASS, SWITCHING STATION Rooms RTU Equipments, including
Equipments in the UG will be constructed by the RAMP communication links to TER etc will be
sections Contractor as per the layout given by supplied and erected by
DDC/EPC/ Traction contractor in the EPC/TRACTION CONTRACTOR, as
approved drawings. per Specifications.
2 Earthing arrangements This will be done by the RAMP-1 DDC/EPC/ Traction contractor to
inside the tunnel portion / in Contractor as per drawing. provide details.
the Underground station
3 Earthing arrangements in The earthing bars embedded in concrete Connections to Earth plates, as per
the Ramp portion and earth plates will be provided by design and specifications provided by
RAMP, as per design and specifications DDC, will be made by EPC/TRACTION
provided by DDC / EPC / TRACTION CONTRACTOR.
CONTRACTOR in the approved
drawings.
4 Erection of Masts / RAMP will provide the necessary holding DDC will provide necessary designs,
Cantilevers / OHE down bolts, for masts, fasteners for showing locations and holding down
terminations for OHE cantilevers on walls and for termination bolts arrangements.
support, Lightning arresters of OHE on walls, for mounting Lightning EPC/TRACTION CONTRACTOR will
etc in the Ramp portion arresters as per design and supply and erect OHE Masts with Base
specifications. Plates or Cantilevers at the locations as
per design.
5 At transition of tunnel At transition of tunnel towards rail EPC/TRACTION CONTRACTOR will
towards rail corridor where corridor where viaduct height is low, interface with RAMP for provision of
viaduct height is low, side RAMP will provide side railing with side railing with concertina wires at
railing with concertina wires concertina wires to be provided transition of tunnel towards rail corridor
to be provided where viaduct height is low.
6) Interfacing Requirements - Traction with Viaduct Contractor (VDC)

Item Item Description Viaduct Contractor DDC /Traction Contractor
No. (VDC)
1. Providing OHE Poles, Will provide segment list and DDC/EPC/Traction contractor will prepare
anchors etc. on viaduct alignment drawing for preparation of list of segments / U-Girder mast location
LOP. requiring strengthening, to receive OHE
Will arrange to strengthen the masts, anchors etc. based on available
The bending moment shall
concerned segments and provide track plans. EPC/TRACTION Contractor will
be taken into account.
holding down bolts along with nuts (as verify at site. If there are any changes in
per drg provided by the DDC for the track layout plans, EPC/TRACTION
Viaduct). Viaduct contractor shall Contractor will interface with viaduct
ensure that the bolts provided shall be contractor to further add segments to the
greased and covered and undamaged list (wherever segments are not cast) or
for easy movement of nuts. modify OHE design etc. to suit available
strengthened segments / U-Girder.
2. Cable bracket arrangement Will provide brackets as per design DDC/EPC/Traction contractor will given
Page 36



37
Draft No. DFA/3337

Item Item Description Viaduct Contractor DDC /Traction Contractor
No. (VDC)
for carrying power and given by DDC/EPC/Traction drawing of brackets for power and control
control cables on viaduct. contractor. cables on viaduct.
3. NOT USED
4. Providing openings in Will provide openings as per DDC/EPC/TRACTION contractor will advise
Viaduct structures for requirements shown in the design. the size and locations where the cut-outs
passing cables etc. are required
5. Earthing connections Will supply and provide welding of DDC/EPC/TRACTION contractor will
Reinforcement bars and earth provide drawings showing arrangement of
terminals according to drawings Earth terminals required to be provided on
ensuring continuity of reinforcement piers, pedestals, segments, parapet, railing
bars of via duct segments piers and etc. and the extent of welding required to be
parapet segments. Provide earth done on Reinforcement bars.
terminals for connection.
EPC/TRACTION Contractor will provide the
necessary earthing connections between
BEC/OPC/ITL/any other steel structure
earthing plates etc. and the earth terminals.
This will include supply of cable to connect
BEC and other connecting plates.
6. Earthing connection for The viaduct contractor shall ensure DDC/EPC/TRACTION Contractor will
hand rail proper welding of Vertical and provide drawings showing arrangement of
horizontal bars of the railings and will earth terminals required to be provided for
provide the necessary earth earthing the hand rail.
connection.
7. Electrical and physical Respect the given clearances DDC/EPC/TRACTION contractor will co-
clearances as specified in throughout the viaduct. ordinate with Viaduct Contractor
the drawing
8. At viaduct suitable monkey The viaduct contractor shall provide EPC/TRACTION contractor will interface
ladder/platform may be the monkey ladder / platform access with Viaduct Contractor and give the
provided for easy as per requirement of locations for the provision of monkey ladder
accessibility of BM & DDC/EPC/Traction contractor at / platform for accessibility.
Isolator for manual designated locations within SOD.
operation.
9 All the junction of girders The viaduct contractor shall ensure the DDC/EPC/TRACTION contractor to check
should be sealed to avoid sealing of junction of girders.
entry of thief.
7) Interfacing Requirements – Traction with Station Building Contractor(s) (SBC)
Item Item Description Station Building contractor (SBC) DDC/EPC/TRACTION Contractor

No.
1. Support of OHE SBC will provide the necessary / suitable DDC will provide general arrangement
from Platform shed (as per required loading) steelwork and showing suspension members from station
roof trusses bolt-holes etc. to enable the suspension ceiling, from which OHE can be supported.
members to be supported from the DDC will also indicate typical bending
platform shed roof trusses. moment and direct load arising from OHE, at
Page 37



38
Draft No. DFA/3337

Item Item Description Station Building contractor (SBC) DDC/EPC/TRACTION Contractor
No.
suspension points.
EPC/TRACTION contractor will prepare
detailed drawings for support of OHE from
suspension members.
2. Providing OHE Will provide holding down bolts as per DDC will indicate the locations where
masts / anchors on approved drawings (used on viaduct to masts/anchors are required to be provided (in
external parapets take the base-plate). the pegging plans)
at stations.
EPC/TRACTION contractor will provide bolted
base OHE masts / anchors etc.
3. Providing electrical Will ensure that the clearance diagrams DDC/EPC/TRACTION contractor will provide
and mechanical are respected and there are no the necessary clearance diagrams showing
clearances for infringements. minimum clearances required from OHE.
OHE
4. Providing earthing Will provide necessary earth terminals, DDC/EPC/TRACTION contractor will provide
connections earth mesh etc. and risers and respect the Earthing connection drawings, showing
schematic earthing drawing, will ensure locations of earth terminals, separate MET for
provision of minimum of 50mm dia pipe- RTU, earth mesh etc required at stations.
5Nos. on each platform under the floor for
continuity of earthing platform
shelter/canopy, as per approved drawings
EPC/TRACTION contractor will provide
necessary interconnections between earth
terminals/riser terminals and earth conductors
(OPC, BEC) as shown in the Earthing
connection drawings.
8) Interfacing Requirements - Traction with Track Contractor(s)
Item Item Description Track Contractor DDC/EPC/TRACTION Contractor

No.
1. Information regarding Will provide information to
track alignment, DDC/EPC/Traction contractor
curves, levels etc.
2. Viaduct and bridges, Supply and install GI plates on every deck EPC / Traction contractor will supply and
earthing through tracks end. Ensure the electric plinth continuity on connect the connection cable to the BEC
plinth and plates every span by providing earth terminals at and plinth connecting plates at the end
welded to plinth each end of the plinth duly connected with of consecutive spans.
reinforcement steel. cable. The material details and
specifications of connecting cables shall be
interfaced with EPC/TRACTION contractor.
3. Providing pipes for Track contractor shall interface with DDC/ EPC / TRACTION will provide
track crossing, for Traction Contractor for finalizing location of drawings showing requirement of pipes
cables. pipe crossings. at specific locations. EPC/TRACTION
Will provide pipes buried in concrete as per contractor shall supply and provide the
design provided by DDC for Viaduct and pipes over viaduct and pipes over
seal them temporarily. parapet walls and interface with TRACK
for correct location of pipes and verify
Page 38



39
Draft No. DFA/3337

Item Item Description Track Contractor DDC/EPC/TRACTION Contractor
No.
before plinth casting.
4. Providing continuity Will check the details and confirm DDC will provide bonding details.
bonds in tracks. acceptability.
EPC / TRACTION contractor will provide
the continuity bonds
5. Electrical and Physical Respect the given clearance. Shall provide necessary drawings
clearance
6. Track Centre Line Track Contractor shall provide the track
centre line.
9) Interfaces – Traction with Depot Contractor
Item
Item Description Depot Contractor (Depot) DDC / EPC/TRACTION Contractor
No
1 Feeding Post Prepare a space as per the Install equipments in the Feeding Post
drawing.
2 Installation of OHE in Workshop Realize supporting structure Supply of Interface drawings including
(Inspection Bay), Stabling shed, preparation for OHE requirements of mounting plates on
Interior cleaning Plant and suspension / bracket columns and drop arms fixed to the trusses,
Emergency Equipment Building. assemblies on the columns supports for termination arrangements on
The overall weight to be taken in to and drop arms fixed on beams/ slabs etc., for various buildings.
account is 500 kg at each trusses as per specific Supply and install bracket assemblies with
suspension. detailed drawings. fastening devices on the columns and drop
arms.
3 ASS room preparation according to Prepare the ASS room as per Supply Interfacing drawings
drawing and the following criteria: the drawing and criteria.
ASS room layout principle
 Preparation of ASS Room as per
drawings and specification
 Possibility of concrete refilling
0.3m depth.
 Floor and walls prepared with
anti-dust paint.
 2 doors 2x3 m with anti-panic
system (bar across the door
facilitating its opening)
 Low voltage installations
(Lighting, Socket, fans,
ventilation, fire protection)
 Transformers access from the
nearest suitable road)
********
Page 39



40
78569/2021/O/o
Draft No. DFA/3337
CSTE/P-I Attachment:Section VI Employer’s Requirements PS (Part-3).pdf

41
78569/2021/O/o
Draft No. DFA/3337

42
78569/2021/O/o
Draft No. DFA/3337

VERSION 1.2

VERSION 1.2

VERSION 1.2

VERSION 1.2

VERSION 1.2

VERSION 1.2

VERSION 1.2

VERSION 1.2

VERSION 1.2

VERSION 1.2

VERSION 1.2

VERSION 1.2

VERSION 1.2

VERSION 1.2

VERSION 1.2

VERSION 1.2

VERSION 1.2

VERSION 1.2

VERSION 1.2

VERSION 1.2

VERSION 1.2

VERSION 1.2

VERSION 1.2

VERSION 1.2

VERSION 1.2

VERSION 1.2

VERSION 1.2

VERSION 1.2

VERSION 1.2

VERSION 1.2

VERSION 1.2

VERSION 1.2

VERSION 1.2

VERSION 1.2

VERSION 1.2

APPENDIX
INTERFACE BETWEEN SIGNALLING & TELECOMMUNICATION ((RADIO / GSM,
TELEPHONE SYSTEM, CCTV, FOTS, PA / PIDS / MASTER CLOCK, CTFRS), AFC, PG /
PSD, UPS (S&T)) SYSTEM CONTRACTOR(S) AND DESIGNATED ELECTRICAL (E&M,
TRACTION, ECS / TVS, BMS, RSS, LIFT, ESCALATOR ETC.) SYSTEM CONTRACTOR(S)
FOR UNDERGROUND STATIONS, ELEVATED STATIONS AND DEPOTS - PHASE IV.
1. Definitions and Introduction

1.1 This specification describes the interface requirements between Signalling &
Telecommunication Contractor(s) and Designated Electrical (E&M, Traction, ECS /
TVS, BMS, RSS, Lift, Escalator etc) Contractor(s) for Underground, Elevated Station
& Depots.
1.2 In this Specification, unless otherwise stated, the term “Contracts” refers to all the
relevant Contracts and the term “Contractors” refers to all the relevant Contractors.
The individual Contractors are referred to by the corresponding Contract number.
1.3 This document shall be read in conjunction with the relevant paragraphs of the
General Specification. The Contractors shall ensure all requirements of the General
Specification and Particular Specification pertaining to the contracts are fully resolved
and implemented.
1.4 In the event of a conflict between the General Specification and this specification, the
requirements of the Particular Specification shall prevail.
1.5 This specification outlines the Contractors’ interfacing requirements which are based
on the Technical Studies carried out during the early stages of the Project. However,
the requirements herein specified are by no means exhaustive and it remains the
Contractors’ responsibilities to further develop, update and execute jointly Interface
Management details during the design and the execution of Works, to ensure that all
interfacing issues between the Contracts are satisfactorily resolved.
1.6 Cable trays / Ladders shall be provided by E&M contractor at Stations/Depots, OCCs
& other locations. Telecom and AFC Contractors shall share these trays as per their
requirements.
1.7 “S&T Contractor” means Signalling, Telecom (Radio / GSM, Telephone System,
CCTV, FOTS, PA / PIDS / Master Clock, CTFRS), AFC, PG / PSD, UPS (S&T)
Contractors.
1.8 Designated Telecom Contractors shall take inputs from all other Contractors
(Telecom & AFC) and finalize cable tray / ladder size, routes etc. for their stations.
They shall also interface with E&M Contractor for the complete requirement(s) on
their stations.
2. Role & Responsibilities
Role & Responsibilities of requirements pertaining E&M, Traction, ECS / TVS, BMS,
RSS, Lift, Escalator etc. vis-à-vis Signalling, Telecom, PG/PSD, UPS (S&T) & AFC
Contractors are tabulated below as (A) to (J):

ED / TR / UG GM / E / UG-1 GM / E / UG-2 CGM / E / RC-1 GM / E / Planning CSTE / P-1 CSTE / P-2

SECTION DESCRIPTION Page No.

(INTERFACE MANAGEMENT DOCUMENT BETWEEN)
A E&M AND AFC, SIGNALLING, PG, UPS (S&T) & TELECOM 3
CONTRACTORS (S&T) AT “ELEVATED STATIONS”
B E&M AND AFC, SIGNALLING, PSD, TELECOM CONTRACTORS (S&T) AT 8
“UNDERGROUND STATIONS”
C ECS & TVS AND SIGNALLING & TELECOM CONTRACTORS AT 15
“UNDERGROUND STATIONS”
D FLEXIBLE OHE (TRACTION) AND SIGNALLING (SIG), PG/PSD 20
CONTRACTORS
E FLEXIBLE OHE (TRACTION) AND TELECOM (TEL) CONTRACTORS 25
F RSS AND SIGNALLING & TELECOM CONTRACTOR 27
G UNDERGROUND RIGID OHE (U/G TRACTION) AND SIGNALLING & 28
TELECOM (SIG) CONTRACTORS
H E&M AND SIGNALLING & TELECOM CONTRACTORS AT “DEPOT” 32
I LIFT CONTRACTOR AND CCTV CONTRACTOR FOR CCTV IN THE LIFTS 35
J ESCALATOR AND TELECOM (FIBRE OPTICS TRANSMISSION SYSTEM 37
(FOTS) CONTRACTORS FOR CENTRAL MONITORING OF LIFT AND
ESCALATORS AT OCC


SECTION-A
(A) INTERFACE MANAGEMENT DOCUMENT BETWEEN E&M AND AFC, SIGNALLING, PG, UPS (S&T)
& TELECOM CONTRACTORS (S&T) AT “ELEVATED STATIONS”
S.No. Item Role of E&M Contractor Role of S&T, UPS (S&T) and Purpose/
Description AFC Contractor Remarks
1. a) E&M contractor to provide a) S&T contractor to provide
Earthing
earthing system/ suitable location for
Arrangement
arrangement as required up provision of MET in
to Main Earth Terminals in DG respective rooms for
room, ASS and S&T rooms facilitating earth connection
(TER, UPS, SCR, SER,). to their equipment.
b) Extension of Main earth (<1 b) Extension of earthing inside
ohm for Signalling and EFO, TOM as also all S&T
Telecom)) from Main Earth equipment from the MET
Mat with min. 20 holes (10 per shall be responsibility
row) to be provided. respective contractor(s).
2. a) E&M contractor to install a) S&T contractor to furnish
Cable tray /
cable brackets / trays as their requirement of cable
brackets and
required by S&T (AFC, brackets / trays to DDC E&M
support
Signalling, PG/PSD, UPS (S&T) and E&M contractor.
& Telecom contractor in the
b) Measurement of cable trays
station building.
for Signalling and Telecom
Spacing between Platform to be done separately.
Coping & first hanger shall be
c) Measurement of Signalling /
decided jointly between PG
Telecom / AFC cable trays to
contractor & E&M contractor.
be done jointly by E&M and
b) E&M Contractor to provide
Signalling and Telecom / AFC
cable trays on the periphery
contractors.
of room under False Floor in
SCR as per CSD. No change S&T / AFC contractor to
beyond CSD will be interface for the
incorporated at site. measurement.
d) S&T contractor to provide
Any change in cable tray
details of cable trays to be
layout beyond CSD, will be
shared under False Floor in
the responsibility of
SCR during CSD finalization
respective contractor.
stage along with size and
c) Cable tray/ connectivity Also
route on the periphery of
required up to DG room,
room on the floor.
Pump room, radio tower
(Ground Base Tower/Roof e) Any branching to be done or
Base Tower) and Parking. change in cable tray layout
beyond CSD, will be

d) Telecom/Signalling/PG/PSD responsibility of S&T
cable tray connectivity for contractor.
Platform Supervisory Booth/
Panel (PSB/PSP)/CCTV
Niche/PSA from the nearest
S&T tray.
e) Cable tray junctions and T
points should not have sharp
bends and edges to avoid
cable damage.
f) Data and power tray should
have separation of at least
150mm between them at any
place subject to any site
constraints as mutually
agreed by DMRC Engineers
and if crossing is required
there should be provision of a
bridge to cross the cable tray.
g) Separation of at least 300 mm
between S&T tray and
Electrical cable tray required
at any place subject to any site
agreed by DMRC Engineers.
h) HT cables should run at a
minimum separation of 300
mm from S&T cables in station
area and below PF edge
(where margin is less,
preferably in covered ducts /
suitable arrangement).
3 a) E&M contractor to give AFC/ S&T contractor to give
Floor
requirement of cutting of requirement / route / locations
Raceways
floors for laying of floor for marking at site for laying of
raceways to Civil contractor, if floor raceways.
required.
b) Raceway for AFC/S&T to be
laid by E&M contractor.


4 E&M Contractor shall provide
Fire
fire extinguishers in UPS S&T,
Extinguisher
TER, SER, TOM, EFO rooms.
5 a) For UPS supply, E&M a) S&T contractor to do
UPS Supply Details of UPS
contractor to lay cable after complete UPS work before
for E&M power supply
isolation transformer. and including installation of
requirements to
isolation transformer.
b) MCCB of required capacity be furnished by
with Earth fault protection to b) UPS S&T Contractor shall E&M contractor.
be provided by E&M check the load after
contractor. termination and jointly sign
with E&M Contractor.
c) E&M shall draw maximum of
15 KW load at each elevated
station from UPS S&T System.
6 After submission of equipment S&T contractor to submit
Lighting of
layout by S&T contractor, E&M equipment layout for
Technical
contractor to finalise location of finalization of light fittings
Rooms
Light fitting(s) for installation. installation.
Lux level shall be as per DMRC
illumination manual.
7 E&M contractor to inform
Public S&T contractor to commission
expected date of inspection of
Address (PA) PA system before Fire
Fire Authorities for
System Authorities inspection.
commissioning of Public Address
(PA) System by S&T contractor.
8 a) S&T contractor to provide
S&T E&M contractor to coordinate for
heat load requirement of
Equipment provision of air conditioning such
S&T equipment in their
Load for Air- that:
rooms.
conditioning
a) AC drainage pipe inside SER /
b) S&T to coordinate
TER / UPS is connected
finalization of room layout
through the shortest route in
for installation of Air-
coordination with S&T
conditioning with E&M
contractor.
Contractor.
b) AC/FCU is not installed above
(FCU should not be installed
Signalling / PG / Telecom
above the racks and
equipment rack/box.
preferably in corners for
c) During handover of S&T utilization of space.)
rooms (SER / TER / UPS /
TOM), availability of following


items is to be ensured, as a
minimum requirement -
- AC power,
- Cable tray Risers,
- Air-conditioning, Lighting,
- AC power sockets,
- data / power tray connectivity.
9 a) BMS contractor to provide a) Telecom to provide
Communicati Both vendors
(a) details of networking information / data in TCP-IP
on Standard E&M (BMS) &
requirement. format for interface with
for BMS Telecom shall
BMS contractor.
Network b) E&M (BMS) contractor to jointly decide
coordinate for the same b) Signalling to provide the the
information / data in communication
Modbus/ BACnet protocol in protocol (bit-by-
Bit-by-bit / TCP-IP format (as bit) for the TCP-
required) for interface. IP interface.
9 a) E&M (BMS) contractor to
IP address for Allocation of IP address for E&M (BMS)
(b) configure the BMS Network
BMS Network stations to be provided. contractor to
using IP Address provided by
coordinate with
Telecomm.
DMRC O&M to
b) E&M (BMS) contractor to provide
coordinate the same complete IP
details
(including
details of
existing
systems) to
Telecom for IP
address
planning.
9 a) E&M (BMS) contractor to a) Telecom would create a a) Bandwi
OCC interface
(c) configure the BMS Network in VLAN/VPN on the IP dth shall be
OCC using IP Address backbone for use by E&M agreed by NP-
provided by Telecomm. (BMS) contractor for
SCADA and
building their IP network.Telecom
contractor
b) Redundant FO (fiber optic)
b) E&M (BMS) contractor to jointly as per
port (working +standby) for
coordinate the same network
Non-Power (NP) SCADA at
requirement.
station & OCC for


connectivity from station to
station and from station to
OCC respectively separate
for each line.
c) The bandwidth of at least 50
Mbps channel is to be
provided. (Speed will be
jointly tested and verified).
10 a) E&M Contractor shall provide UPS S&T Contractor shall mark
Availability of
two input raw power supply the location of isolator in UPS
Raw Power
(including DG Back-up) of 3 S&T Room in the station
Supply from
Phase 415 V through input drawings in close coordination
two sources
isolators to UPS S&T Systems. with the detailed design
consultant.
b) The installation, Testing and
Commissioning of input
isolators in UPS S&T room
shall be done by E&M
Contractor.
c) Isolator box for PG system for
incoming raw power supply of
415V, 3 phases, 63A rating to
be provided by E&M
contractor.
d) Cut out for entrance of raw
power cable & UPS output
supply cable to E&M to be
sealed by E&M Contractor.
11 If input power supply as UPS S&T Contractor shall
Power Supply
indicated above is not provided coordinate with E&M
for Testing of
then E&M Contractor shall Contractor for the same.
S&T UPS
provide temporary 3 Phase 4
System
wire 50 Hz DG/ raw power
supply at S&T UPS room for
Testing & commissioning of S&T
UPS system.


SECTION-B
(B) INTERFACE MANAGEMENT DOCUMENT BETWEEN E&M AND AFC, SIGNALLING, PSD,
TELECOM CONTRACTORS (S&T) AT “UNDERGROUND STATIONS”
S.No. Item Role of E&M Contractor Role of S&T, UPS (S&T) & AFC Purpose/Remarks
Description Contractor
1 General a) Cable trays connectivity from S&T contractor to
Interface TER/SER to various locations coordinate for the same.
Requirement of Station, Ancillary building
and Tunnel as per Combined
Services Drawing (CSD).
b) During handover of TER, SER,
GSM and S&T UPS/PS rooms,
availability of following items
is to be ensured, as a min.:
(i) AC power, Air
conditioning
(installation), Lighting
(Lux as per DMRC
illumination manual),
sockets, fire detection,
Data/ Power tray
connectivity with riser.
c) Brackets/ hangers are to be
provided on tunnel wall for
laying of optical fiber cable,
emergency telephone
cables, CCTV cables, GSM,
signalling cables.
d) Cable tray connectivity is to
be provided from
Signalling/PSD/ Telecom
brackets in tunnel to
Signalling/Telecom cable
trays in the nearest S&T
shaft. Cable tray inside the
shaft will be provided by
E&M contractor.
e) Data/ Power cable tray
connectivity is to be
provided in mid shaft at all
levels with connectivity from


Signalling/telecom brackets
in tunnel, if any as per
approved drawings.
f) During handover of GSM
rooms availability of AC
power/ Air conditioning
(installation) as per load
requirement to be ensured
by E&M Contractor.
g) AC drainage pipe inside SER /
TER should be connected
through the shortest route in
coordination with S&T
contractor.
h) For cut-outs less than 200
mm, Fire sealing is to be
done by E&M Contractor
after clearance from S&T
contractor.
2 Cable Tray a) Data and Power cable trays a) S&T/AFC contractor to
installation are to be provided from coordinate for the same.
requirement SER/TER/PS Room to
Concourse, Platform, below b) S&T contractor to provide
each PF edge, Road level details of cable trays to be
areas, all station entrance/ shared under False Floor
Exits, FOB/ SUBWAYs, in SCR during CSD
Technical rooms, SCR, UPS finalization stage along
(S&T) TOM, EFO, Security with size and route on the
room, Ancillary buildings, DG periphery of room on the
room, Pump room, Under floor.
croft in underground stations
etc.as per requirement. c) Any branching or change
in cable tray layout
b) Cable tray Risers/ Droppers
beyond CSD required to
up to FFL to be provided in
lay cable tray under False
TER, SER, SCR, TOM, EFO,
floor in SCR shall be
Security Room, ASS Roomor
responsibility of S&T
any other Room where Risers
contractor
/ droppers requiredand S&T
shafts with connectivity to
nearby Signalling/telecom


tray to be provided. PSD
cable tray also to be provided
by E&M contractor. E&M
Contractor to provide cable
trays on the periphery of
room under False Floor in
SCR as per CSD.
No change beyond CSD will
be incorporated at site.
Any change in cable tray
layout beyond CSD, will be
the responsibility of
respective contractor to lay
the cable tray under false
floor in SCR.
c) Data and power tray should
have separation of at least
150mm between them at
any place subject to any site
agreed by DMRC Engineers
and if crossing is required
there should be provision of
a bridge to cross the cable
tray.
d) Separation of at least 300
mm between S&T tray and
Electrical cable tray required
at any place subject to any
site constraints as mutually
e) HT cables should run at a
minimum separation of 300
mm from S&T cables in
station area and below PF
edge (where margin is less,
preferably in covered ducts /
suitable arrangement).
f) Cable tray/Hume or HDPE
PIPE connectivity also


required up to DG room and
Pump room and
Underground Parking.
g) Telecom/Signalling/ PSD
cable tray connectivity for
Platform Supervisory Booth/
Panel (PSB/ PSP)/CCTV Niche
from the nearest S&T tray.
h) For stations with radio-based
requirements, cable tray
connectivity for two
different locations (with
route diversity) from TER to
open sky at ground level to
be provided for installation
of GPS antennas.
3 Earthing a) At underground stations, S&T & GSM contractor to
Requirement extension of Main Earth to coordinate for the same
be done from Earth Mat
(provided by Civil) to TER.
MET with min. 20 holes (10
per row) to be provided in
TER, SER, SCR, EFO, TOM and
S&T UPS room.
b) Clean Earth extension to be
provided in TER, SER and S&T
UPS Room (<1 Ohm for both
Signalling and Telecom).
c) Main earth (<1 Ohm) to be
extended to the GSM room.
4 Power supply a) UPS in Underground stations Details of UPS Power supply
(a) Arrangement and extension of UPS supply requirements to be furnished
from UPS Room to S&T DB to by S&T contractor.
be provided by E&M.
b) Isolator box for PSD system
for incoming raw power
supply of 415V, 3-phase, 63A


rating to be provided by
E&M contractor
c) Further distribution of UPS
supply to various systems
shall be responsibility of S&T
or respective contractors.
Power supply schematic for
underground stations is
attached for reference.
d) Permanent power
requirement for GSM
Operator equipment.
E&M to lay power cable up-
to the termination point in
GSM room.
Provision of Power supply to
be done as per GSM
operator equipment load
requirements.
4 UPS health a) E&M Contractor shall a) Signalling Contractor shall
(b) and Input provide signals / potential lay the cable from E&M
Supply Status free contacts to monitor UPS to SER to receive UPS
Alarm following alarms to health status and incomer
Signalling Contractor for supply availability status
monitoring power supply alarm.
system on ATS:
b) Communication protocols
i) UPS 1 Normal shall be decided jointly by
ii) UPS 2 Normal both the Contractors.
iii) Incomer 1 available
iv) Incomer 2 available
v) Load on UPS
vi) Load on Battery
b) Communication protocols
shall be decided jointly by
both the Contractors.
4 Monitoring of a) UPS (E&M) shall provide a) CTFRS Contractor shall a) Major alarms
(c) UPS (E&M) of necessary details for Interface jointly Develop the of UPS (E&M)
Underground with CTFRS. interface document and for
Stations on Underground


Centralised b) Physical interface point shall submit for employer’s Stations shall
Telecom be at Ethernet Patch panel or representative for review. be monitored
Fault switch port of BMS. by Central
b) Laying of cable from
Monitoring Telecom Fault
c) At underground stations, interface point of BMS at
System Reporting
critical alarms/ status of UPS OCC/BCC to CTFRS system.
(CTFRS) System
(E&M) shall be extended till
c) CTFRS contractor shall (CTFRS).
OCC through BMS, then from
assess the level of data
BMS same to be provided for b) Interface Data
received from UPS E&M
CTFRS at Ethernet port. to be provided
(BMS) monitored
in jointly
S&T contractor to lay equipment to classify each
agreed
necessary wiring/cabling Datum as record status,
protocol,
from BMS interface to CTFRS. warning of alarm &
format, type
process the data
d) Provision of necessary etc.
accordingly.
protection against transient /
c) Both
surge / lightning etc. at d) Display Alarm / Status on
contractors
interface point. GUI based CTFRS.
shall jointly
e) To provide list of alarms to be e) Joint test of each alarm develop
monitored. and test report to be detailed
submitted for review for interface
f) The Alarms/Status shall be
employer’s document and
jointly tested by E&M and
representative. submit for
S&T with actual
status/simulation. review of
employer
representative
d) Joint Test Plan
and Report
shall be
submitted for
review of
employer
representative
5 Fire E&M Contractor shall provide
Extinguisher fire extinguishers in UPS
S&T/PS, TER, SER, TOM, EFO
room.
6 Floor E&M contractor to give AFC/ S&T contractor to give
Raceways requirement of cutting of floors requirement / route /
for laying of floor raceways to locations to be marking at site
Civil contractor, if required. for laying of floor raceways.


Raceway for AFC/S&T to be laid
by E&M contractor.
7 Public Address E&M contractor to inform S&T contractor to commission
(PA) System expected date of inspection of PA system before Fire
Fire Authorities for the Authorities inspection
commissioning of Public
Address (PA) System by S&T
contractor.
Schematic of Power Supply arrangement at Underground stations

(E&M Distribution Box) (S&T Distribution Box (In PS Room)
63A MCCB
for Sig
Signalling
UPS 1 S&T/MCCB-1 MCCB-1
Contractor
UPS 2 63A MCCB Telecom

S&T/MCCB-2 MCCB-2 for Tele
Contractor
63A MCCB AFC

for AFC Contractor
63A MCCB
for PSD PSD/PSG
Contractor
63A MCCB
for Spare Spares For
BUSBAR BUSBAR
Future Use
Isolator Box PSD/PSG

provided by E&M Contractor will
Input Raw (3 Phase,415 V) Provided by E&M for PSD/PSG connect the
Supply cable
(Under Scope of E&M) (Under Scope of S&T)


SECTION-C
(C) INTERFACE MANAGEMENT DOCUMENT BETWEEN ECS & TVS AND SIGNALLING & TELECOM
CONTRACTORS AT “UNDERGROUND STATIONS”
S.No. Item Role of ECS & TVS Contractor Role of S&T and AFC Purpose/
Description Contractor Remarks
1 Automatic Receipt of control signal from a) If Train stops for more than a) For Track way
congestion and OCC 1 minute in tunnel, and tunnel
emergency alarm/status of train shall ventilation
mode operation be provided by ATS to TVS system control
from OCC SCADA. and operation.
b) In addition to this, alarm of b) In Line 7, time
fire on train shall also be is not settable
extended by ATS to TVS type, it has to
SCADA system. be finalised
during design
phase.
2 Ensuring hold To co-ordinate with signalling a) Signalling ATS to be In Line 7, time is

on the train at contractor for getting required programmed to apply train not settable type,
rear platform to provisions of blocking of the hold for the train on rear it has to be
prevent entry of train at rear platform despite platform, in case of train finalised during
another train in set headways, in case of tunnel congestion/ emergency in design phase.
tunnel, in case congestion/ emergency. tunnel due to stoppage of
of train train for more than 1
congestion/ minute (settable type) for
emergency in any reason, including fire on
underground train.
tunnel, despite
b) Signalling contractor to
set headways.
interface with DMRC
E&M/ECS & TVS
contractor(s) for final
setting of the time duration
for stoppage of train in
tunnel.
This rear Platform Hold
function in case of train
congestion ahead, will not
work if skip station is
applied by the Operator.


3 (a) Communication a) ECS / TVS contractor to a) Telecom to provide Both vendors

standard configure the BMS Network information / data in TCP-IP ECS/TVS &
using IP Address provided by format for interface with Signalling shall
Telecomm. ECS / TVS contractor for jointly decide on
b) ECS / TVS contractor to configuring BMS Network. the
coordinate for the same. b) Signalling to provide communication
information / data in protocol (bit by
Modbus / BACnet protocol bit) for the TCP-IP
in Bit-by-bit / TCP-IP format interface.
(as required) for interface.
3 (b) IP address a) ECS / TVS contractor to Allocation of IP address for E&M (BMS)
configure the BMS Network stations to be provided. contractor to
using IP Address provided by coordinate with
Telecomm. DMRC O&M to
provide complete
b) ECS / TVS contractor to
IP details
coordinate for the same.
(including details
of existing
systems) to
Telecom for IP
address planning.
3 (c) OCC interface a) Detailed requirement of IP a) Telecom would create a a) Bandwidth

network to be provided to VLAN/VPN on the IP shall be agreed
S&T Contractor backbone for use by by NP-SCADA
ECS/TVS contractor for and Telecom
building their IP network. contractor
configure the BMS Network
jointly as per
at OCC using IP Address b) Provide Redundant FO (fiber
network
provided by Telecomm. optic) port (working
requirement.
+standby) for Non-Power
c) ECS / TVS contractor to
(NP) SCADA at station(s) &
coordinate for the same.
OCC for connectivity from
station to station and from
station to OCC respectively
separate for each line.
c) The required bandwidth of
at least 50 Mbps channel to
be provided. (Speed will be
jointly tested and verified)


4 Heat load for ECS / TVS contractor to S&T to provide the heat load
Air-conditioning coordinate for the provision of and room temperature
air conditioning. requirement of their
equipment in their rooms.
5 Equipment a) ECS/TVS contractor to co- S&T to coordinate the room

Layout for S&T ordinate provision of air layout for installation of FCUs.
rooms. conditioning such that: (FCU should not come above
the racks and preferably in
i) AC/FCU is not installed
corners for utilization of space.)
above Signalling/ Telecom
equipment rack/box.
Wherever it is not
feasible, prior
coordination shall be
done with S&T before
finalization.
ii) During handover of S&T
rooms (SER / TER / UPS /
TOM), availability of
following items is to be
ensured, as a minimum
requirement
- AC power,
-Air-conditioning,
Lighting,
- AC power sockets,
-Data/power tray
connectivity
coordinate for installation of
FCUs as per S&T
requirement


6 No-stop Zone ECS / TVS will provide the No- a) Signalling system shall
Stop Zone chainages and observe a distance of 50 M
details to S&T contractor. from either side of TBF
center, 50 M from nozzle and
20 M from damper as “No
Stopping Zone” for more
effective ventilation scheme.
b) S&T to incorporate the No-
stop zone chainage
information provided by ECS
/ TVS contractor in their
software/database.
c) Train not to stop in “No
Stopping Zone” except in
case of application of
emergency brake due to PAD
operation within 50 m from
station
d) In case of Line-7, train will
also stop due to application
of EB on account of Fire in
train within 50m of station
etc.
7 Fire Sealing S&T and ECS / TVS contractor to S&T after completing cable
coordinate for the same. laying will give clearance to ECS
& TVS department for
completing fire sealing in
cutout. No cable laying to be
carried out by S&T after fire
sealing work.
Any re-work required will be
done at the risk and cost of S&T
Contractor.


8 Operating The TVS contractor will provide a) The signaling contractor as a

modes and the inputs required by signaling lead contractor shall prepare
principal contractor in preparation of the a comprehensive OMPD.
Document document.
(OMPD) b) The document shall establish
the principles related to
system and interface design
under normal, degraded and
emergency mode
9 Additional ECS& TVS Contractor will Necessary information
information on interface with PSD contractor regarding pressure withstand
Pressure with to obtain the required capability and details of
stand capability Pressure with-stand capability leakage rates/area etc. when
of full height of PSDs and the leakage area PSD are open/closed shall be
PSD is needed. within PSD facade. provided by PSD Contractor


SECTION-D
(D) INTERFACE MANAGEMENT DOCUMENT BETWEEN FLEXIBLE OHE (TRACTION) AND
SIGNALLING (SIG), PG/PSD CONTRACTORS
S.No Item Description Role of EPC / Traction Contractor Role of Signalling (SIG)
Contractor
1. Signals for insulated a) EPC / Traction Contractor will provide a) Will avoid Signal ahead of
overlaps / SI, Booster locations of insulated overlaps / SI etc. Booster Transformer.
Transformer locations to SIG Contractor.
b) Signalling plan shall be
(If BT required)
b) BT overlap shall be provided at least shared by Signalling
250 m before a signal. Contractor with Traction
contractor for jointly
c) Sectioning plan shall be shared by EPC
deciding the location.
/ Traction Contractor with Signalling
contractor for jointly deciding the c) For any dispute, DMRC
location. Engineer will decide the
location.
d) For any dispute, DMRC Engineer will
decide the location.
2. Design of Signal locations Sectioning plan shall be shared by EPC / a) Will design the signal
for Neutral Section Traction Contractor with Signalling location in such a way that
contractor for jointly deciding the a train starting from rest
location. position is able to achieve
necessary speed to
For any dispute, DMRC Engineer will
negotiate the neutral
decide the location.
section, with power off,
under its own momentum.
shared by Signalling
Contractor with Traction
contractor for jointly
deciding the location.
c) For any dispute, DMRC
Engineer will decide the
location.
3 No power Zone Traction will provide information of no On receipt of no power zone,
power section to signaling signaling shall prevent entry
of train in no power section.
Signaling system shall be
designed suitably.
4 Track circuiting details a) EPC / TRACTION contractor will design Will furnish details of track
(only if applicable/ Bonding and earthing plan to suit the circuits along the track to EPC
provided)) track circuiting details furnished by SIG. / Traction Contractor.


Contractor
b) EPC / TRACTION CONTRACTOR will
provide earthing and bonding
accordingly.
5. Connection of Return a) EPC / TRACTION contractor will a) Will supply and install
Conductor to rail, through prepare typical connection drawings impedance bonds and
impedance Bonds or showing connection between RC and make connection of the
direct to rail. Rail through Impedance Bond cable to Impedance Bond if
(wherever provided). provided.
b) EPC / TRACTION CONTRACTOR will
b) Signalling Contractor will
supply and install cables and connect
facilitate Traction
them to RC side accordingly.
Contractor in preparing
c) In case direct connection to rail is Earthing & Bonding (Return
required, EPC / TRACTION Circuit) drawing.
CONTRACTOR shall provide the
connection to rail with exothermic
welding.
6 Signalling cable details EPC / Traction will 'model' the signalling Will furnish to EPC / Traction,
cables suitably for EMC study. specifications of screened
signalling cables and their
locations.
7 Normal and short circuit EPC / Traction will provide required details
currents levels in the OHE to the SIG Contractor.
8 Location of Track Circuits SIG Contractor will give
(if provided / applicable) details to EPC / TRACTION
contract.
9 Bonding and Earthing EPC / Traction will Design Bonding and SIG Contractor will provide
Plan Earthing Plan to suit track-circuiting Track Circuiting (TC) details to
details furnished by SIG Contractor. EPC / TRACTION contractor.
(if provided/applicable)
10 Rail Continuity Bonds (if EPC / TRACTION contractor will provide
provided) Rail continuity bonds, according to
finalised bonding plan and in co-
ordination with SIG Contractor.
11 Impedance Bonds & EPC / TRACTION Contractor will provide SIG Contractor will supply and
TCPMM (if provided) TCPMM for earth continuity, if required. install Impedance bonds at
finalized locations (if
provided).
12 Cross Bonds EPC / TRACTION Contractor will provide
(if provided) cross bonds, according to finalised


Contractor
bonding plan and in co-ordination with
SIG Contractor.
13 Insulated Rail Joints SIG Contractor will provide
details regarding locations of
insulated rail joints on the
main line and in the
Depot/yard. (if provided)
14 Signal Locations SIG Contractor will provide
chainages of signal posts, to
EPC / TRACTION Contractor.
15 OHE mast / structure a) EPC/TRACTION Contractor will provide a) SIG Contractor will
locations Layout Plans of OHE showing mast coordinate with
locations, wire staggers, anchoring EPC/Traction.
wires etc. to SIG.
b) Sectioning Plan / Layout Plan (LOP) shared by Signalling
shall be shared by EPC / Traction Contractor with Traction
Contractor with Signalling contractor contractor for jointly
for jointly deciding the location. deciding the location.
c) For any dispute, DMRC Engineer will c) For any dispute, DMRC
decide the location. Engineer will decide the
location.
16 Electrical Clearances EPC/TRACTION CONTRACTOR will provide SIG Contractor shall
Layout Plans of OHE to SIG contractor. coordinate with EPC /
TRACTION CONTRACTOR to
ensure minimum safe
clearances between any
signalling field installation
and the live OHE component.
17 Power Supply Protection EPC/TRACTION contractor will advise to SIG contractor will ensure
System and trip settings SIG contractor the protection relay Train Control and Signalling
settings. systems are designed
suitably.
18 EMI/EMC Study EPC/TRACTION contractor will provide
inputs to SIG contractor.
19 Charged/Discharged Traction Contractor shall provide the a) Signalling contractor will
status of OHE for UTO Charged/Discharged status of each interface regarding
enabled lines. elementary sections of OHE in form of 1/0 requirement of UTO for
status respectively on IEC 60870-5-104 provision of Charged /
protocol on redundant ports at gateway Discharged status of each
provided by Traction contractor.


Contractor
elementary section of OHE
by Traction contractor.
b) Signalling contractor will
take the data on IEC 60870-
5-104 protocol from the
gateway ports provided by
Traction Contractor.
(mutually agreed)
20 Signal location and SI at a) EPC/TRACTION contractor to interface a) SIG Contractor to interface
Depot Entry/Exit line, SI at with SIG before finalizing location of with EPC/TRACTION
FP, BT overlap should Depot Entry/Exit line, SI at FP, BT contractor before finalizing
coincide with each other. overlap. the location of Depot
Entry/Exit line, SI at FP, BT
b) Will shift the location of sectioning, if
overlap.
possible, to coincide with the location
of signal. b) Will shift the location, if
possible, to coincide with
the sectioning location of
OHE.
21 UPS Feeder Provision for EPC/TRACTION contractor to interface SIG contractor to make
SCADA in S&T UPS in OCC. with SIG for redundant Feeders in S&T provision of redundant
UPS and shall inform the load feeders in S&T UPS for SCADA
requirement of SCADA. as per the load requirement
submitted by EPC / TRACTION
contractor.
22 Earthing of Outdoor a) TRACTION contractor shall provide a) The signaling & PG/PSD
Signalling equipment Buried Earth conductor, along the line contractors shall interface
and below each PF edge for earthing of regarding use of Buried
outdoor signaling & PG/PSD Earth conductor, along the
equipment. line, and below each PF
edge for earthing of
b) Traction contractor shall provide the
outdoor signalling &
sizing of BEC wire.
PG/PSD equipment.
23 Operating modes and TRACTION contractor shall provide the a) The signaling contractor, as
principle Document inputs required by the signaling a lead contractor, shall
(OMPD) contractor for preparation of the prepare a comprehensive
document. OMPD.
b) The document shall
establish the principles
pertaining to system and
interface design under

Contractor
normal, degraded and
emergency mode
24 Realtime streaming of all a) EPC / TRACTION contractor will Signalling contractor shall be
Pantographs Camera interface with Signalling for live view responsible for:
transmission of the camera as well as
i) Transmitting real time
incident footage recording.
video footage of
b) Pantograph camera will be provided Pantograph monitoring
by RS. cameras to OCC and
ii) arrangement of
downloading of CCTV
footage (on demand basis
& event pre-1 min and
post 5 min of fault) at OCC
from train borne NVR /
Switch, provided by RS
Contractor.
25 Realtime streaming of a) EPC / TRACTION contractor will Signalling contractor shall be
Camera installed on front interface with Signalling for the live responsible for:
and rear cabs focussed view transmission of the camera.
i) Transmitting real time
towards OHE for monitor
b) OHE camera will be provided by RS. video footage of OHE
health of OHE
monitoring cameras at
OCC and
ii) arrangement of
downloading of CCTV
footage (on demand basis
& event pre-1 min and
post 5 min of fault) at OCC
from train borne NVR /
Switch, provided by RS
Contractor
Note: - Item No. 3 (No Power Zone) & Item No.19 (Charged/Discharged status of OHE) shall be
applicable for Underground (UG) section also for interface between PSCADA (Traction) &
Signalling Contractors.


SECTION-E
(E) ROLE & RESPONSIBILITIES OF FLEXIBLE OHE (TRACTION) AND TELECOM (TEL)
CONTRACTORS
S.No Item Description Role of EPC / Traction Role of Telecom (TEL) Contractor
Contractor
1. Telecom Cables and EPC / Traction Contractor will Will furnish to EPC / Traction Contractor
exchange locations perform the EMC simulation details of locations of telecom cables and
study Telephone exchanges, of Rail corridor in
sufficient details for enabling 'modelling'
of cables and for performing simulation
study on Electro-magnetic compatibility.
2. Control & Monitoring a) Will supply and install a) Will supply and install optic fibre cables
(C&M) data exchange suitable redundant OFC and provide minimum 4 (2 Pairs i.e. 1
cables, LIUs, Patch cords for Pair UP line and 1 pair DN line)
connection from RTU to dedicated fibres for SCADA.
optical ports at For these, ports will be provided at
- each station telecom ODF of each station TER, Depots TER
equipment room (from and OCC/BCC TER required for C&M
ASS, Traction Switching data exchange and for interlinking the
Stations) OCC.
- the station nearest to b) Will also provide space for mounting
RSS (for connection LIUs at Station and Depot TERs.
from the RSS) c) Will also provide space for mounting
b) Will interface with Telecom the wall mounted cubicle box for OCC
contractor for provision of LIUs.
space for mounting LIU in
TER
3. Telephone Provide a telephone with proper stand at:
connections to the Rail - Each ASS Room
corridor internal - RSS / TSS Control Rooms, ECC desks at
telecom network OCC/BCC OHE depot
4. Laying of C&M cables Supply and install C&M cables Provide space (approx. 10 cm2) in the S&T
in the S&T cable path (trays) cable path
between each traction
switching station and the
nearest Station Control
Room/TER
5. SCADA requirements EPC / TRACTION CONTRACTOR TEL contractor to provide requisite Fibre
will advise section wise SCADA ports for SCADA.
requirements to TEL contractor
for Fibre port allocations


S.No Item Description Role of EPC / Traction Role of Telecom (TEL) Contractor
Contractor
6. Electromagnetic EPC / TRACTION CONTRACTOR TEL will coordinate jointly with EPC /
Compatibility will give details of the EMC TRACTION CONTRACTOR to ensure
study carried out by DDC. compatibility.
7. Telephone, FOTS & Shall supply & lay 2 nos. a) Shall supply and lay Telephone, FOTS
CCTV cables from RSS HDPE/Hume pipes of suitable and CCTV Cables in HDPE pipe laid by
to nearby station size as informed by Telecom Electrical contractor.
contractor. b) Telecom contractor to supervise laying
of HDPE pipe by Electrical contractor.


SECTION-F
(F) ROLE & RESPONSIBILITIES OF RSS AND SIGNALLING & TELECOM CONTRACTORS
S.No. Item Description Role of Telecom contractor Role of RSS contractor
1. Facilities to be Telecom Contractor shall a) RSS Contractor shall interface with
provided at RSS provide following facilities in Telecom contractor for necessary
each RSS: provisions pertaining to Trenches,
cable path etc. required for laying of
(i) Direct Telephone
FOTS / CCTV / Telephone/ intranet /
connection from each RSSs
Radio BDA cables as also finalization
to OCC (Intercom).
of CCTV location etc.
(ii) Cable provision for P&T
b) Internal route for connectivity and
connection
arrangement for placement of CCTV
(iii) Cable provision for SAP &
Monitor and Telephone handsets
Intranet connectivity.
shall be provided.
(iv) CCTV for security of switch-
c) Space for 42 U rack in RSS /TSS
yard & technical rooms
building (floor mount
shall consist of:
(1000*1000*1850mm) size inside
- CCTV Cameras – 08 nos. room)
- CCTV workstation with d) Provision of minimum load, as
2 Monitors –01 nos. required by Telecom contractor, from
with Quad live view for UPS in RSS for CCTV and BDA and its
Monitoring of RSS cameras connection from trench/pulpit for
(v) RSS cameras shall also be telecom service.
monitored in OCC at TPC
work station.
(vi) LAN connectivity from OCC
for SCADA.


SECTION-G
(G) ROLE & RESPONSIBILITIES OF UNDERGROUND RIGID OHE (U/G TRACTION) AND
SIGNALLING & TELECOM (SIG) CONTRACTORS
S.No Item Role of U/G Traction Contractor Role of S&T / PSD Contractor
Description
1 Earthing of PSD a) U/G TRACTION contractor will lay a) S&T/PSD contractor will provide suitable
the earthing conductor (TEW) all earthing terminal for PSD and connect
along the underground corridor the same by requisite earthing jumpers
and below each PF edge. (to be supplied by S&T / PSD contractor)
of suitable size to the earthing conductor
b) Fault level to be provided to S&T
laid / provided by UG traction contractor.
as per simulation study.
2 Earthing ofThe U/G traction contractor shall The signalling contractor shall interface for
Outdoor provide Traction of Earth Wire use of TEW, along the line, for earthing of
Signalling (TEW), along the line, for earthing of outdoor signalling equipment.
equipment outdoor signalling equipment.
3 Telephone Cable path for of min. 2 numbers of S&T Contractor will make provision of
Requirements HDPE/Hume pipe of suitable size (as telecommunication facilities inside/
in agreed by DMRC Engineers) either outside DMRC premises by providing a
TSS/RSS/AMS/A by trench or trenchless is to be telephone with proper stand at:
SS/ SWR provided by UG traction contractor - Each ASS Room
(Outside DMRC along with their own cable route, for - RSS / TSS Control Rooms
Premises) providing Telecom facilities in TSS/ - ECC desks at OCC/BCC.
RSS.
4 Equipments and The UG traction contractor will The contractors shall co-ordinate for
Human safety incorporate safe minimum distance ensuring min. safe distance between any
in ROCS design. signaling field installation and live Rigid
OHE contact point for purpose of human
safety apart from EMI/EMC considerations.
5 Installation/fixi a) U/G TRACTION contractor will a) Signalling contractor shall finalize the
ng of Engine act accordingly and provide location of Normal Stopping Point as
stop board at engine stop board at designated per signal locations/buffer stops
tunnel/box/Ra location.
b) Normal Stopping Point shall be shared
mp
b) Engine stop board shall be by Signalling Contractor with U/G
shared by U/G Traction Traction contractor for jointly deciding
Contractor with Signalling the location.
contractor for jointly deciding
c) In case of any dispute, DMRC Engineer
the location.
will decide the location
c) In case of any dispute, DMRC
Engineer will decide the location
6 Traction returns The U/G Traction contractor(s) shall Signalling contractor will consider the short
current level. advise respective Contractor(s) of circuit current level for the signalling


Description
normal and short circuit (worst) equipment and incorporate in the design
current levels. for safety concern
7 Location of The Contractors shall agree on the The SIGNALLING Contractor shall advise
track circuit / final location of cross bonds/ the Traction contractor(s) regarding
Cross bond / impedance bonds and other rail locations of the track circuits/Cross
Impedance connections related to traction bond/Impedance bond.
bond / other rail return current.
connections
related to track
circuit.
(If required/
applicable)
8 Supply, a) The Traction contractor(s) shall Signalling Contractor shall supply, install
installation, supply, install and terminate and terminate all impedance bonds,
connection & additional traction bonding bonding cables and continuity bonds,
termination of cables, if required, at including all bonding in the turnouts,
all impedance appropriate intervals, which required for proper functioning of track
bonds, shall be co-ordinated with circuits.
continuity respective signalling contractor
bond/cables to ensure balanced &
including all unobstructed flow of traction
bonding for return current.
track circuits. b) All connections to the rail shall
(If required/ be suitably welded (thermo
applicable) welding or pin brazing
technology) to give resistance &
corrosion free smooth contact.
The rail welding material shall
confirm to IRS: S103-2004 or the
latest.
9 Insulated Rail Traction contractor(s) shall design SIGNALLING Contractor shall provide
Joint the traction return system duly Traction contractor(s) with location of
(If required/ considering location of insulated insulated rail joints required in Depot and
applicable) joints. on Mainline. (for track circuits)
10 Neutral section Traction contractor(s) shall provide Respective signaling Contractor(s) shall
signaling Contractor with length & design Signal Locations such that no train or
location of all traction neutral a part of a train stops within the neutral
sections. section(s) during normal operations.
11 Emergency U/G traction Contractor shall U/G Traction contractor will have a
Tripping System provide Emergency Tripping output interface with Signalling contractor to
with a link to the Signalling system at prevent any train coming on directly or


Description
central level using suitable protocol through a cross over leading to the affected
and will interface with S&T OCS section where Emergency Tripping
contractor for the same. system has been activated in ATP mode.
12 Protection The Traction contractor(s) shall a) The signaling Contractor shall ensure
characteristics provide the signaling Contractor that the Train Control and Signaling
with overhead line feeder circuit System provides allowance for suitable
rating, the protection tripping settings viz. sequential start up, when
setting, the overhead line conductor planning for simultaneous start-up of
current carrying capacity, Transient several trains.
& surge protection and the
b)The Contractors shall ensure that there is
protection relay setting.
no degradation with respect to
performance requirement as specified in
the respective Specifications.
13 Realtime a) U/G TRACTION contractor will Signalling contractor shall be responsible
streaming of interface with Signalling for live for:
Pantograph view transmission of the camera
a) Transmitting real time video footage of
Camera as well as incident footage
Pantograph monitoring cameras at
recording.
OCC and
b) Pantograph camera will be
b) arrangement of downloading of CCTV
provided by RS.
footage (on demand basis & event pre-
1 min and post 5 min of fault) at OCC
from train borne NVR / Switch,
provided by RS Contractor.
14 Realtime a) U/G TRACTION contractor will Signalling contractor shall be responsible
streaming of interface with Signalling for live for:
Camera to be view transmission of the a) Transmitting real time video footage of
installed on camera. OHE monitoring cameras at OCC and
front and rear
b) OHE camera will be provided by b) arrangement of downloading of CCTV
cabs focussed
RS. footage (on demand basis & event pre-
towards Rigid
1 min and post 5 min of fault) at OCC
OHE for monitor
from train borne NVR / Switch,
health of OHE.
provided by RS Contractor.
15 Electromagnetic a) Both Contractors shall jointly perform a study and develop the Electromagnetic
compatibility Compatibility Management Plans using such data as emission characteristics,
susceptibility levels, filter characteristics, physical layout and construction of
their equipment, taking into consideration variation in component
characteristics with frequencies.


Description
b) The study shall demonstrate compatibility or highlight areas of potential
problems with a view to implement remedial measures in time to achieve
compatibility.
c) Traction and SIGNALLING Contractors shall co-ordinate for any information
concerning EMI / EMC in the overhead line & other structures.
d) The Contractors shall jointly develop a test plan detailing how the
electromagnetic compatibility of the OHE traction System and the Signalling&
Train control System will be verified, taking into consideration the study
conducted.
16 Operating a) The signaling contractor as a lead contractor shall prepare a comprehensive
modes and OMPD.
principle
b) The U/G traction contractor will provide inputs required by the signaling
Document
contractor in preparation of the document.
(OMPD)
c) The document shall establish principles related to system and interface design
under normal, degraded and emergency mode


SECTION-H
(H) ROLE & RESPONSIBILITIES OF E&M AND SIGNALLING & TELECOM CONTRACTORS AT “DEPOT”
S.No. Item Role of E&M Contractor Role of S&T and AFC Contractor
Description
1 Earthing a) E&M contractor to provide earthing a) S&T contractor to provide
Arrangement system / arrangement as required up to suitable location for provision
Main Earth Terminals in DG room, ASS of MET in respective rooms for
and S&T rooms (TER, UPS, SER, DCC facilitating earth connection to
Room). their equipment.
b) Extension of Main earth (<1 ohm for b) Extension of earthing inside
signalling and Telecom)) from Main Earth EFO, TOM as also all S&T
Mat with min. 20 holes (10 per row) to be equipment from the MET shall
provided. be responsibility respective
contractor(s).
2 S&T and a) E&M contractor to install cable brackets / a) S&T contractor(s) to furnish
SCADA cable trays as required by S&T contractor in the their requirement of cable
tray / brackets Depot building & Sheds (IBL, Workshop, brackets / trays to DDC E&M
and support SBL etc.) and E&M contractor.
b) Cable tray/ connectivity is also required b) Measurement of cable trays
up to DG room, Pump room, radio tower for Signalling and Telecom to
(Ground Base Tower/Roof Base Tower) be done separately.
and Parking.
c) Measurement of Signalling /
c) E&M Contractor to provide cable trays on Telecom / AFC cable tray(s) to
the periphery of room under False Floor be done jointly by E&M and
in DCC as per CSD. signalling and telecom / AFC
contractors.
No change beyond CSD will be
incorporated at site. Any change in cable d) S&T / AFC contractor to
tray layout beyond CSD, will be the interface for the
responsibility of respective contractor to measurement.
lay the cable tray under false floor in DCC.
e) S&T Contractor to provide
d) Cable tray junctions and T points should
details of cable trays to be
not have sharp bends and edges to avoid
shared under False floor in DCC
cable damage.
during CSD finalization stage
e) Measurement of cable tray for Signalling along with size and route on
and Telecom to be done separately. the periphery of room on the
Measurement of signalling / telecom / floor.
AFC cable tray to be done jointly by E&M
f) Any branching required or
and signalling and telecom / AFC
change in cable tray layout


Description
contractors. E&M contractor to interface beyond CSD, requiring laying of
for the measurement. additional cable tray(s) under
false floor in DCC will be
f) Data and power tray should have
responsibility of S&T
separation of at least 150mm between
contractor.
them at any place subject to any site
constraints as mutually agreed by DMRC
Engineers and if crossing is required there
should be provision of a bridge to cross
the cable tray.
g) Separation of at least 300 mm between
S&T tray and Electrical cable tray is
required to be maintained at all locations
subject to any site constraints as mutually
3 Floor a) E&M contractor to provide requirement AFC/ S&T contractor to give
Raceways of cutting of floors for laying of floor requirement / route / locations for
raceways to Civil contractor, if required. laying of floor raceways and also
to be marking at site.
b) Raceway for AFC / S&T to be laid by E&M
contractor.
4 UPS Supply a) For UPS, E&M contractor to lay cable S&T contractor to take-up
for E&M after isolation transformer. complete UPS work including
installation of isolation
b) MCCB of required capacity with Earth
transformer
fault protection to be provided by E&M
contractor.
5 Lighting of Light fitting installation to be finalized and S&T contractor to submit
Technical done by E&M contractor after submission of equipment layout for finalization
Rooms equipment layout by S&T contractor. of light fittings installation.
Lux level shall be as per DMRC illumination
manual.
6 Public E&M contractor to inform expected date of S&T contractor to commission PA
Address (PA) inspection of Fire Authorities for system prior to inspection by Fire
System commissioning of Public Address (PA) Authorities.
System by S&T contractor.
7 S&T a) S&T contractor to provide the
E&M contractor to coordinate for provision
Equipment heat load requirement of S&T
of air conditioning such that:
Load for Air- equipment in their rooms.
conditioning a) AC drainage pipe inside SER / TER / UPS
b) S&T to coordinate for room
should be connected through the
layout with E&M Contractor


Description
shortest route in coordination with S&T for installation of Air-
contractor. conditioning
b) AC should not be installed above
Signalling/ telecom equipment rack/box.
c) During handover of S&T room (SER / S&T
UPS / TER), availability of following items
is to be ensured, as a minimum
requirement:
- AC power,
- Air-conditioning, Lighting,
- AC power sockets,
- Data / power tray connectivity.


SECTION-I
(I) ROLE & RESPONSIBILITIES OF LIFT CONTRACTOR AND CCTV CONTRACTOR FOR CCTV IN THE
LIFTS
CCTV Contractor’s LIFT Contractor responsibilities Joint Responsibility of CCTV
Responsibilities Contractor and LIFT Contractor
Design Stage
1) Extension of CCTV 1) Lift Contractor shall provide a IP 1) CCTV and Lift Contractor shall
Camera image of lifts POE CCTV camera in all Lift Cars as interface with each other for
to the DMRTS CCTV per ONVIF standards & installation and commissioning
network. specifications approved by DMRC of CCTV Camera in every Lift.
2) All CCTV Cameras 2) The CCTV Camera shall have 2) A jointly agreed plan shall be
provided in lifts shall provision of accepting a Alarm submitted for review of
be connected to the Input (potential free contact) Employer’s representative.
CCTV Network and available in the Telephone Help
3) Lift and CCTV Contractor shall
these cameras shall be Point of the Lift.
mutually and jointly arrange a
available on all MMIs
3) The CCTV camera shall be installed mock-up for installation and
of CCTV network
in the Lift at a suitable location testing of Lift Camera during
including SCR on DMRC
Design Phase.
Network. 4) Lift Contractor shall be responsible
for all wiring and associated works
3) On operation of the
of CCTV Camera inside Lift Car incl.
Lift Help Point, the Lift
wiring from the Lift Help Point,
CCTV camera image
Help Point to the CCTV camera, Lift
shall PoP-up on the
travelling cable, Lift Shaft,
CCTV MMI coupled
Maintenance access panel (MAP)
with a corresponding
up-to cable tray Cut-Out (of Lift
audio alarm.
Shaft) for interfacing with the CCTV
4) Operation of the Lift system.
Help Point shall also
result in generation of
an event (1 min. before
& 5 min. after the
incident) in the CCTV
system.
5) The CCTV Lift camera
shall be provided with
all functionalities as
available in the CCTV
PS including
recording/playback
etc.


CCTV Contractor’s LIFT Contractor responsibilities Joint Responsibility of CCTV

Responsibilities Contractor and LIFT Contractor
Installation and Commissioning
1) CCTV contractor shall 1) Lift Contractor shall be responsible 1) Both CCTV & Lift Contractors
be responsible for for supply, Installation, Testing and have to jointly ensure
provision/laying of commissioning of one Camera communication between Lift
CCTV cables from inside each Lift car. camera and Station CCTV System
Telecom Equipment and required functionalities i.e.
2) Lift Contractor shall supply 02 nos.
Room (TER) to Lift Live viewing, Recording /
of CAT-6 Cables, as per specs
shaft (cable entry cut- Playback etc.
approved by DMRC, and lay /
out).
extend all wiring and associated
2) CCTV Camera cable works of CCTV camera inside the
shall be left rolled up lift car, Lift Travelling Cable, Lift
on the tray near Cable Shaft, MAP upto Cable Entry Cut-
Entry Cut-Out (of Lift Out) of Lift Shaft) for interfacing
Shaft) by the CCTV with CCTV system
Contractor.
3) Lift Contractor shall terminate both
3) CCTV Contractor shall the Cat-6 cables upto Cable Entry
be responsible for Cut-Out (of Lift Shaft) on
Testing Integration of termination box consisting of two
Lift camera with RJ-45 Female Sockets (one main &
Station & operation one standby) for connection /
Control Centre of CCTV interface to the CCTV system.
Network.
4) Surge Protection
Device (SPDs) at both
ends (Lift car & Cable
Entry Cut-Out of Lift
Shaft), if required, shall
be provided by CCTV
Contractor.


SECTION-J
(J) INTERFACE MATRIX BETWEEN ESCALATOR AND TELECOM (FIBRE OPTICS TRANSMISSION
SYSTEM (FOTS) CONTRACTORS FOR CENTRAL MONITORING OF LIFT AND ESCALATORS AT
OCC
FOTS Contractor Escalator Contractor Joint Responsibility of Telecom
Responsibility Responsibility Contractor and Escalator Contractor
Design
Centralized monitoring (at OCC) of Lifts and Escalators provided at stations.
1) Telecom Contractor shall 1) Escalator Contractor shall 1) Telecom and Escalator
interface with Escalator interface with Telecom Contractors shall be jointly
Contractor for designing / Contractor for designing / responsible for interfacing with
providing communication providing communication each other for successful
channels (open-source channels (TCP/IP Protocol) from transmission of signals from
TCP/IP communication Escalator Monitoring Panel in Escalator Monitoring Panel
protocol) from Telecom Station Control Room (SCR) to installed in station Control
Equipment Room (TER) of Telecom Equipment Room (TER) Rooms (SCR) for monitoring Lift
every station to TER at at stations and from TER at OCC and Escalators to Lift & Escalator
OCC, required for to Lift & Escalator (L&E) (L&E) monitoring system
centralized monitoring monitoring system in OCC for provided in OCC on Optical FIber
(at OCC) of Lifts and centralized monitoring of Lifts Network using Open-Source
Escalators provided at and Escalators TCP/IP Communication Protocol.
stations.
Installation and Commissioning
1) Telecom Contractor shall 1) Escalator Contractor shall extend 1) Telecom and Escalator contractor
receive signals (Open- signals (Open-source TCP/IP shall jointly test end-to-end
Source TCP/IP communication Protocol) of Lifts communication (Open-Source
communication Protocol) and Escalators from Escalator TCP/IP communication Protocol)
of all Lifts and Escalators monitoring Panel located in SCR, from FOTS patch panel port in
from the Escalator using suitable cables, to RJ45 Station TER to FOTS patch panel
Monitoring panel located patch panel (Interface point) on port at OCC TER.
in SCR on RJ45 Patch FOTS Rack located in station TER.
Panel (Interface point) in 2) Telecom and Escalator contractor
2) Escalator Contractor shall
FOTS rack in station TER. shall jointly test end-to-end
provide suitable CAT-6 cable
communication and ensure that
2) Telecom Contractor shall from Escalator Monitoring Panel
Lift & Escalator signals from RMS
reliably transmit in SCR to station TER on RJ45
of Escalator Monitoring Panel in
communication data patch Panel (Interface point) in
SCR are transmitted to Lift &
received from escalator FOTS Rack.
Escalator (L&E) monitoring
Monitoring Panel at
3) Escalator Contractor shall receive system in OCC for centralized
station TER to OCC TER.
these signals from Escalator monitoring of Lifts & Escalators.
3) Telecom Contractor shall Monitoring Panel at stations on
interface with Escalator RJ45 patch panel (Interface
contractor for successful point) in FOTS Rack at OCC TER.


FOTS Contractor Escalator Contractor Joint Responsibility of Telecom

Responsibility Responsibility Contractor and Escalator Contractor
handover of data (open- 4) Escalator contractor shall lay
source TCP/IP suitable cable from common
communication protocol) RJ45 patch panel (Interface
received at Station TER to point) on FOTS Rack at OCC TER
OCC TER on RJ45 patch to Lift & Escalator (L&E)
panel (Interface point). monitoring system in OCC for
centralized monitoring of Lifts &
Escalators.










Contract- DE-04 – Particular Specification- Annexure-25 (Energy Meter)
Annexure-‘A’
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ABT (AVAILABILITY BASED TARIFF) METERS FOR PROVISION IN 66 /
132 / 220 kV DMRC’s FEEDER CIRCUITS AT GRID SUBSTATIONS
1.0. SCOPE:
The specification covers the design, engineering, manufacture, assembly, testing supply and delivery
of Electronic HT tri vector meters suitable for ABT (Availability Based Tariff), Four Quadrant, Bi-
Directional power flow, solidly earthed system with balanced and un-balanced loads for a power
factor range from zero to unity (lagging and leading), with accuracy class 0.2s. The meter should be
as a self-contained device for measurement of active, apparent and reactive energy and certain
other parameters as described in subsequent paragraphs of this specification, and it shall be suitable for
being connected directly to voltage transformers (VT)/capacitivevoltage transformers (CVT) having a
rated secondary line-to-line voltage of 110v and to current transformers (CTS) having a rated
secondary current of 1A/5A 3 element 4 wire / 3 element 3 wire as per requirement. The reference
frequency shall be 50 Hz. The energy meter shall besuitable for rack/ panel/ metal box mounting.
2.0 STANDARDS:
2.1 Unless otherwise specified elsewhere in this specification, the meter shall conform in all respects
including performance and testing thereof to the followingIndian/ International Standards to be
read with up-to-date and latest amendments/ revisions there of
S.No. Standard No. Title
1 IS:14697 with latest AC static transformer operated watt-hour and VAR- Hour
amendments meters, class 0.2s and 0.5 S
2 IS:15959 with latest The standard for Electricity metering – Data exchange for
amendments. meter reading, tariff and load control
3 CBIP publication No Manual on Standardization of Ac static electrical energy
304, July 2008. meters
4 IEC 62052-11 Electricity metering equipment (AC) – General requirements,
tests and test conditions
5 IEC 62053-22 Static meters for active energy (class 0.2 S and 0.5 s)
6 IEC 62056 The standard for Electricity metering – Data exchange fror
meter reading, tariff and load control.
3.0 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
3.1 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS:

The meters to be supplied against this specification shall be suitable for satisfactory continuous
operation under the following climatic conditions.
Sl. Parameter Range/Value
No.
i. Max. ambient air temperature (Deg. C) 55
ii. Min. ambient air temperature (Deg. C) -10
iii. Average daily ambient air temperature (Deg. C) 35
iv. Max. Relative Humidity (%) 95
v. Max. altitude above mean sea level (m) 1000
vi. Average Annual rainfall (mm) 200
vii. Max. wind pressure (kgf/sq.m) 150
viii. Isoceraunic level (days per year) 50
ix. Seismic zone Zone-IV
x. No. of thunderstorms days/year 85 (max)
xi. Number of rainy days/year 120 (max)
xii. Average number of months/tropical monsoon condition per 3
year

xiii. Noise level 50 dB

The meter should be capable of giving required performance in hot and humid tropical climate,
and climate conducive to rust and fungus growth and Heavy lightning. The climatic conditions are
also prone to wide variations in the ambient conditions. Smoke and Dust is also present in the
atmosphere having extremely heavy pollution level as per relevant standard.
4.0 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS:

Class of Accuracy: 0.2S
Type of Meter: 3 Element 4 Wire / 3 Element 3 Wire.
Supply Voltage and Range (PT Secondary):
3 Phase, Phase-to-Phase 110V with variation -30% to 30%
Reference Frequency and Range: 50 Hz (+/- 5%).
Power factor Range: Zero lagging through Unity to Zero leading.
Basic Current (Ib): 1A/5 A
Maximum Current (I max): 120% of Ib.
Starting Current (Is): 0.1% of Ib at UPF.
5.0. TECHNICAL/FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS:

5.1 METER CASE
The meter shall be made out of high quality materials to ensure higher reliability and long life with a
polycarbonate meter casing. It should be compact and of reliable design to make it immune to
vibrations and shocks in normal service and transportation and should be capable of withstanding
several stresses likely to occur in actual service. The latest state of the art technology of surface
mounting of components etc., may be used for the purpose. The soldering if any shall be perfect
without dry solders. The components shall be of high quality and comply with international
industrial standard practices. The construction of the meter shall be such as to permit sealing of the
meter cover, terminal cover etc. independently to ensure that the internal parts are not accessible
for tampering etc. without breaking the seals. The meter windowshall be transparent and made out
of UV Stabilized material so that the window does not turn yellow after some years.
The meter case and meter terminal block and cover shall meet the IS 14697 in all requirements like
shock, dust proof, creepage distances and insulation etc., The meter shall be totally sealed and tamper
proof. The meter shall conform to the degree of protection IP 51 of IEC60687 for protection against
ingress of dust, moisture and vermin.
The connection diagram of the meter shall be clearly shown on inside portion of the terminal cover and
shall be of permanent nature. The meter terminals shall also be marked and this marking should
appear in the above diagram.
TYPE OF INSTALLATION: Indoor
5.2. ENERGY MEASUREMENT
The meter shall compute & record, Fundamental as well as Total Energies.
The Active Energy (Wh) and Reactive energy (Varh) measurement shall be carried out on 3-phase
4-wire / 3-phase 3-wire principle, with an accuracy as per class 0.2 S of IS 14697, the Energy shall be
computed directly in CT and VT secondary quantities, and indicated in Watt-hours/ Varh.
(a) The 15-minute Wh shall have a +ve sign when there is a net Wh export from substation busbars, and
a –ve sign when there is a net Wh import. The integrating (cumulative) registers for Wh and Varh
shall move forward when there is Wh/Varh export from substation busbars, and backward when
thereis an import.

(b) There shall be exclusive separate reactive energy registers in addition to all other billing
parameters, one for the period when average RMS voltage is above 103% and the other for the
period the voltage is below 97%.
5.4.1 IMMUNITY TO EXTERNAL FACTORS
The meters shall be immune to external influences like magnetic induction, vibration, electrostatic
discharge, switching transients, surge voltages, oblique suspension and harmonics and shall confirm
to the standards mentioned in this specification.
5.4.2 The meter accuracy shall not be affected by AC / DC magnetic field up to 0.2Tesla on all the sides
of meter i.e. front, sides, top and bottom of the meter as per CBIP publication No. 304
with latest amendments. Under influence of any magnetic field (AC / DC / Permanent) above 0.2
Tesla, if the accuracy of the meter gets affected, then the same shall be recorded as magnetic
tamper event with date & time stamping. The energy recorded during such tamper shall be
registered in a separate register in addition to main register.
5.5 SEALING POINTS
Sealing provision shall be made available to the following:
(i) Meter body or cover

(ii) Meter terminal cover
(iii) MD reset button
(iv) Communication ports
5.6 PROVISION OF SELF POWERED AS WELL AS AUX SUPPLY:
a) The meter shall be self-Powered and it should also be capable of working with any of the
following Aux Supply.
i.e., 60-240V AC or DC ± 20%,
The metering system shall normally operate with the power drawn through the auxiliary AC or
DC supply. The metering system design should enable the auxiliary supply to be switched
automatically between the AC and DC voltage, depending upon their availability.
i) Power Consumption in case of Aux supply:

Voltage circuit < 0.2VA/phase
Current circuit < 0.1VA/phase @1A Ibasic,
<0.5VA/phase @ 5A Ibasic
Auxiliary APS < 10VA
ii) Power consumption in case of Self power supply:

Voltage circuit < 6VA/phase
Current circuit < 0.1VA/phase @ 1A Ibasic,
< 0.5VA/phase @ 5A Ibasic
b) The auxiliary power supply shall be drawn from V.T circuit from all the three phases, preferably
equally, so as to ensure meter supply even if any/two of the three phases of the potential supply is lost
at a time.
5.7 NAME PLATE AND MARKING OF METER

It shall be as per IS 14697.
5.8. INSTANTANEOUS PARAMETERS
The meters shall display the following parameters on demand (by pressing the push button) and

automatically. In automatic display each parameter shall be displayed for at least 10 sec. Both
forward and backward scroll provision shall be available in display.
Parameters:
1. Unique identification number of the meter
2. Date
3. Time
4. Current - IR
5. Current - IY
6. Current – IB
7. Voltage - VRN for 3 Ф / 4W
8. Voltage – VYN for 3 Ф / 4W
9. Voltage – VBN for 3 Ф / 4W
10. Signed Power Factor – R phase
11. Signed Power Factor – Y phase
12. Signed Power Factor – B phase
13. System Power Factor – PF
14. Frequency
15. Signed Active Power – kW (Forward, Backward)
16. Signed Reactive Power – kVAr (+ Lag, - Lead)
17. Apparent Power – kVA
18. Cumulative Energy export – kWh
19. Cumulative Energy Import – kWh
20. Cumulative Energy – kVAh – export
21. Cumulative Energy – kVAh – import
22. KVArh – Quadrant 1
26. Maximum demand – (kVA)export
27. Maximum demand – (kVA)import
28. Cumulative MD (MVA)export
29. Cumulative MD (MVA)import
30. Date and Time of Last MD reset
31. Cumulative MD reset count
32. Raising demand (KVA) and elapsed time
33. Average frequency of the previous 15-minute block
34. Net Wh transmittal in the previous 15-minute block, with +/-sign
35. Average percentage voltage
36. Voltage-high VArh register reading
37. Voltage-low VArh register reading.
38. Cumulative Power Down Time in DD:HH:MM
39. Total Voltage Harmonic Distortion VTHD upto 31st harmonic
40. Total Current Harmonic Distortion ITHD upto 31st harmonic
41. Cumulative tamper count
42. Cumulative programming count
43. Demand Integration Period
44. Programmed external CT and PT ratios set in the meter
45. Computation of Apparent Energy: Meter shall be capable of being configured for
computing Apparent Energy based on lag only or lag+lead power factor, depending upon
the requirement.
46. Computation of Energies as per present / future ABT & SAMAST requirement: The meters
shall be capable of being configured for computing the Energies import & export during
each successive 5/15 minute integration period block, depending upon the present /
future ABT & SAMAST requirements and store it in its nonvolatile memory.
47. Computation of Average Frequency as per present / future ABT & SAMAST requirement:
The meters shall be capable of being configured for computing the Average Frequency
during each successive 5/15 minute integration period block, depending upon the present
/ future ABT & SAMAST requirements and store it in its nonvolatile memory.
5.9 LOAD SURVEY PARAMETERS

The following parameters for load survey purpose and shall be logged with a block period of 5/15/30
minutes. The data storage required for the load survey parameters shall be 45 days in nonvolatile
memory with life time of the meter.
1. Average Frequency (Coded 00-99 for 49.00-5 1.00 Hz)

2. Average Power factor (Export)
3. Average Power factor (Import)
4. Net Active energy
5. Active Energy (KW/kwh) Import
6. Active Energy (KW/kwh) Export
7. Apparent Energy (KVA/kVAh) import
8. Apparent Energy (KVA/kVAh) export
9. KVAr/ KVArh Lag Export
10. KVAr/ KVArh Lead Export
11. KVAr/ KVArh Lag Import
12. KVAr/ KVArh Lead Import
13. Percentage Voltage unbalance
14. Total harmonic distortion of voltage in percentage of fundamental upto 31st harmonic
15. Total harmonic distortion of current in percentage of fundamental upto 31st harmonic
16. Phase wise voltages and currents also shall be made available.
17. Date and time shall also be included
5.10 BILLING PARAMETERS
The parameters listed below for billing purpose and are logged at each day midnight (00.00Hrs) and
stored in non-volatile memory for 45 days.
01. Cumulative Active Energy (kWh) – Import up to two decimal

02. Cumulative Active Energy (kwh) – Export up to two decimal
03. Cumulative Apparent Energy (kVAh) – Import
04. Cumulative Apparent Energy (kVAh) – Export
05. Cumulative Reactive Energy (kVArh) (Lag/Lead) - While KW is Import
06. Cumulative Reactive Energy (kVArh) (Lag/Lead) - While KW is Export
07. kVArh during low voltage <97%
08. KVArh during high voltage >103% *
09. T.O.D Parameters:
 KWh and kVAh- Export
 KWh and kVAh – Import
 MD in KVA
 Power Factor for programmed periods.
10. Power Down Time or Power Off Data (DD:HH:MM)
Note: Scale MF shall be One (1) invariably
HISTORICAL DATA RECORDING:

Meter shall be capable of recording in its Non-Volatile (NVM) all types of historical data related to
Billing requirements, Demand, TOD, Events etc. for a period of at least 45 days and it should be
possible to retrieve these data through communication port on common meter reading
instrument (CMRI) or RMR.
The life of battery for the NVM should not be less than 10 years.
5.11 PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETERS
1. Real time clock

2. Demand integration Period

3. Block Capture Time

4. Billing Date
5. MD reset date
6. Time Zones (1 to 8)
7. External CT/PT ratios.
8. Events/tampers
Provisions shall be made to program the above parameters at sight using CMRI, Laptop or using
Base computer software from remote station with proper security system. Logging of
programmable parameter changed event (date & time) along with display of the same under On
Demand Display Parameters & snapping of billing data at that time shall be stored and can be
retrievable withCMRI and RMR and Laptop.
5.12 TIME SYNCHRONIZATION:
Meter shall have a built-in calendar and clock, having an accuracy of Accuracy of <2 min/year or
better.
The meter shall have provision of time synchronization over SNTP (Simple network time
protocol). Meter shall be capable to work as SNTP client, and the meter shall be capable of being
configured as well as being polled by the server at fixed interval (which may range from from 1
minute to 2880 minutes).
When the meter detects the pulse from the server for time synchronization, then, meter should
sync itself with the time of Server, with resolution up to 1 milli second.
If the meter is not able to Sync its time with the Server’s time with above specified time
resolution, then, such an event related to drift in sync time should be visible on the display of the
meter. Thus, the meter shall also be capable of manual time synchronization. If manual time
synchronization is undertaken, then, the same shall be logged in the meter in its NVM.
5.13 DISPLAY:
The meter shall have a display of liquid crystal display (LCD) for measured values with one digit
indicating legend. The characters shall be clearly visible. Provision shall be made to read
consumption in either whole units or decimal multiples or submultiples of one unit. The display
shall be continuously with backlight digital typeand with non-destructive read out.
In case of multiple values presented by a single display it must be possible to displaythe contents of all
relevant memories. When displaying the memory, identifications of each tariff/parameter shall be
available.
The register shall be able to record and display starting from zero, for a minimum of 1500 hrs, the
energy corresponding to rated maximum current at reference voltage and unity power – factor.
Register should not rollover in between this duration.
The display should meet the requirement of relevant standards.
5.14. MAXIMUM DEMAND(MD) RECORDING AND COMMUNICATION OF INSTANTANEOUS DEMAND :

Under the current integration period, the meter should be capable of conveying instantaneous
demand on the communication ports. The meter should also be capable of displaying the
instantaneous demand on the display of the meter.
The maximum demand is to be monitored during each demand interval set with 5 / 15 minutes
integration period and the maximum of these in a month shall be stored.
The meter should be also be capable of conveying the above maximum demand (as well as various
other recorded data) on the communication ports.
MD RESET:

The meter shall have the following provisions regarding MD reset.

a) Manually by operation of a button, which is to be covered and sealing provision available
for such, cover.
b) Resetting shall also be possible through a hand-held common meter-reading instrument
(CMRI) or through a Widows based Laptop capable of communicating with the meter.
c) Provision for automatic resetting at the end of certain period may bemade available and
it should be possible to invoke this through CMRI, or through a Widows based Laptop
capable of communicating with the meter.
Whenever MD is reset the maximum demand value so registered shall be stored along with date
and time.
5.15. TIME OF DAY TARIFF (TOD)/TIME OF USE(TOU):

The meter shall contain provisions for differential pricing of energy and/or maximum demand.
The meter shall be capable of being configured in to minimum of 8 registers for different time zones
to meet the TOD requirements as per concerned tariff requirements.
It should be possible to change the time period for the TOD recording through a CMRI,
Laptop/remote communication using a proper security system. Meter shall be capable to log
such changes with date and time stamping. The main control for this change shall be available in
the base computer system.
5.16 COMMUNICATION CAPABILITY:

The meter should be provided with following communication ports as below:
1. Optical Port - One No – Configurable on DLMS Protocol.

2. One RS232 (RJ45) port - One No – Configurable on DLMS Protocol.
3. RS485 (RJ45) port - One No – Configurable on either DLMS or Modbus Protocol, depending
upon the site requirement.
4. One Ethernet Port (RJ45) - One No – This port should be capable of being configured to
work simultaneously on both the protocols i.e. DLMS as well as Modbus Protocol.
5. One USB (micro B connector) peripheral port at front of meter for reading or configuring
meter through Laptop or Tab device without any additional sealing provision with DLMS.
Meter should support industry standard protocols e.g. MODBUS (serial and TCP), DLMS (ICS) for
data communication with base computer software, substation automation & monitoring systems.
All the above communication ports shall be capable of simultaneous & independent
communication, and performance of each port shall remain the same whether operating alone or
in conjunction with others ports.
5.17 TAMPER EVENT RECORDS
The following shall be captured when event occurrence and restoration and for each of event
captured “Cumulative tamper count” value shall be incremented.
Events Description
1 R-Phase – PT link Missing (Missing Potential) – Occurrence
2 R-Phase – PT link Missing (Missing Potential) – Restoration
3 Y-Phase – PT link Missing (Missing Potential) – Occurrence
4 Y-Phase – PT link Missing (Missing Potential) – Restoration
5 B-Phase – PT link Missing (Missing Potential) – Occurrence
6 B-Phase – PT link Missing (Missing Potential) – Restoration
7 Phase – R CT reverse – Occurrence
8 Phase – R CT reverse – Restoration
9 Phase – Y CT reverse – Occurrence
10 Phase – Y CT reverse – Restoration
11 Phase – B CT reverse – Occurrence
12 Phase – B CT reverse – Restoration

13 Phase – R CT Open - Occurrence

14 Phase – R CT Open - Restoration
15 Phase – Y CT Open - Occurrence
16 Phase – Y CT Open - Restoration
17 Phase – B CT Open - Occurrence
18 Phase – B CT Open - Restoration
19 Influence of AC / DC or permanent magnet - Occurrence
20 Influence of AC / DC or permanent magnet - Restoration
21 Power failure – Occurrence
22 Power failure – Restoration
23 Neutral Disturbance (Occurrence & Restoration)
24 Meter cover open detection (Occurrence & Restoration)
Tamper Information: Minimum 100 events (occurrences and restoration) with date and time of
event shall be recorded. The Information shall be logged on first in first out basis and total number of
tamper events during the period. All these information should be available in simple and easily
understandable format i.e. slot wise (i).Voltage tampers (ii). Current tampers (iii) Other tampers.
5.18. SELF DIAGNOSTICS FEATURES

The meters shall have indications for unsatisfactory/non-functioning of the
following.
1. Time and calendar
2. Real Time clock (RTC)
3. RTC battery
4. Non-Volatile Memory
5. All display segments
5.19 PULSE OUTPUTS
Each meter shall have two calibration LEDs (visual) for checking the accuracy of active energy and
reactive/apparent energy measurement. Further, it shall be possible to switch over the second
LED to reactive/apparent energy via suitable means provided on the metering system. This LED
shall be visible from the front side. Each meter shall have two alarm LEDs and two-pulse output
LEDs. It shall be possible to configure the alarm LEDs with different events by suitable means.
6.0. TESTS:
6.1 TYPE TESTS:
The meter shall be fully type tested as per IS 14697 and the manufacturer shall provide the valid
type test report (not more than 05 years old).
6.2 ACCEPTANCE AND ROUTINE TESTS:

6.2.1 ACCEPTANCE TESTS:
The acceptance tests as stipulated in IS 14697 shall be carried out by the supplier in the presence of
purchaser’s representative. No of samples and criteria for conformity from each lot offered for
inspection is also asper IS 14697.
ACCEPTANCE TESTS FOR CONFIRMATION OF ABT FEATURE:
1. 15 minutes block average frequency registration.
2. 15 minutes block net active power registration.
3. Net kVArh High registration in all four quadrants when voltage is above 103% ofVREF.
4. Net kVArh registration in all four quadrants when voltage is at VREF.
5. Net kVArh Low registration in all four quadrants when voltage is 97% of VREF.
6. Net kVArh Low registration in all four quadrants when voltage is below
97% of VREF.
7. Test for confirmation of midnight energy banking in power ON & power OFFconditions.

6. 2.2. ROUTINE TESTS:
The routine tests as stipulated in IS 14697 shall be carried out by the supplierfor 100% meters supplied
and test certificates, technical leaflet shall be enclosed along with each and every meter.
7.0 INSPECTION:
The inspection may be carried out by the purchaser at any stage of manufacture. The
manufacturer shall grant free access to the purchaser’s representative at a reasonable time when
the work is in progress. Inspection and acceptance of any equipment under this specification by the
purchaser, shall not relieve the supplier of his obligation of furnishing the equipment in
accordance with the specification and shall not prevent subsequent rejection if the equipment is
found to be defective.
The supplier shall keep the purchaser informed in advance, about the manufacturing program so
that arrangement can be made for inspection.
The purchaser reserves the right to insist for witnessing the routine testing ofthe bought out items. The
supplier shall give 15 days advance intimation to enable the purchaser to depute his representative
for witnessing the acceptance and routine tests.
8.0 TRAINING OF PERSONNEL

The Supplier shall provide necessary training of personnel of purchaser at their works/Principal
Works relating to design, manufacture, assembly, testing and operation & maintenance of static
meters for 4 personnel free of cost. However travel and incidental charges of the personnel (including
boarding & lodging) shall be borne by the Purchaser.
9.0 WARRANTY
The meters should work satisfactorily for a period of 10 years from the date of commissioning.
During the Warranty period, if the meter is found defective, it shall be repaired / replaced by the
supplier within 15 days of intimation, without any cost to the purchase i.e. DMRC.
During above such period, the supplier shall provide a replacement meter at site in lieu of the defective
meter, without any cost to the purchaser i.e. DMRC.
If the supplier does not honor the above, then, appropriate action as per contract conditions shall
be taken.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
Before initiating the manufacturing & supply of the meter, the contractor shall submit the detailed
Guaranteed Technical Particulars i.e. GTP (including the make & model & all relevant details) along with
submitting the compliance to this specification, all relevant Standards & Regulatory requirements (duly
signed and stamped) for review & approval. The contractor shall also provide all the details
/clarifications as asked for, by the Authority competent to approve the specifications for installation of
this meter.
The various requirements/parameters mentioned in this specification are indicative and if anything is
left to be mentioned but required for meeting the Scope of Supply & the requirements mentioned in
this specification and the requirements of the prescribed Standards / Regulations and the authority to
approve the specification, then the same is deemed to have been included in this specification without
any additional financial implications to the Employer /DMRC.
-----------------------------

Annexure-‘B’
Technical Specification for Multi Function Meters for Provision in HT Circuits of

25 kV / 33 kV / 66 kV/ 132 kV / 220 kV Feeders at RSS / TSS / AMS /
INTERLINKING AT 25 kV & 33 kV and for Provision in LT Circuits in Transformer
Incomer in ASS and also as Check Meter for Solar Developer .
1. Scope The specification covers the design, engineering, manufacture,

assembly, testing supply and delivery of Electronic Multi Function
Meter (MFM) suitable for measurement of energy and power,
demand requirement in an AC balanced/unbalanced system over
a power factor range of 0.5 lag to 0.5 lead through unity. MFM
should be a Four Quadrant, Bi-Directional power flow meter with
accuracy class 0.5s or better. The meter should be a self-
contained device for measurement of active, apparent and
reactive energy, power quality and certain other parameters as
described in subsequent paragraphs of this specification and it shall
be suitable for being connected directly to voltage transformers
(VT)/capacitive voltage transformers (CVT) having a rated
secondary line-to-line voltage of 110v and to current transformers
(CTS) having a rated secondary current of 1A/5A, 3 element 4 wire
/ 3 element 3 wire as per requirement. The reference frequency shall
be 50 Hz. The MFM shall be suitable for rack/ panel/ metal box
mounting.
These meters should have communication port to interface for

remote meter reading. The Multifunction meter should include
devices with advanced power monitoring capabilities, which can be
used for standalone device monitoring and power quality analysis as

part of BMS and SCADA systems. It should also offer data logging,
control IOs and modular communication with multiple protocols for
third party system integration.
2. Electrical Suitable for LT & HT, 3P4W & 3P3W system.
Measuring voltage range : 35 V to 500 V (L-L) max, 20 V to 300 V (L-

N) max
Current Range: 10mA - 6 A (Programmable at site)
Starting current: 1mA or better.
Frequency : 50Hz
Burden : Current circuit: < 0.2 VA/phase at 1A and at 5A
Voltage circuit: < 0.2 VA/phase
Sample rate : Not less than 156 samples/cycle/channel
Accuracy class: 0.5 S or better.
PF : 0.5 Lag to 0.5Lead through unity.
Maximum withstand voltage: 2 times of nominal value for 1 sec .
Maximum withstand Current continuously: 120% of I basic.
3. Standards Unless otherwise specified elsewhere in this specification, the

meter shall conform in all respects including performance and
testing thereof to the following Indian/ International Standards
to be read with up-to-date and latest amendments/
revisions there of-
IS:14697, IEC 62052-11, IEC 62053-22

4. Climatic The meters to be supplied against this specification shall be suitable

Conditions for satisfactory continuous operation under the following climatic
conditions.
Sl. Parameter Range/

Value
No.
iii. Average daily ambient air temperature 35

(Deg. C)
vii. Max. wind pressure (kgf/sq.m) 150
ix. Seismic zone Zone-IV
x. No. of thunderstorms days/year 85 (max)
xi. Number of rainy days/years 120 (max)
xii. Average number of months/tropical 3

monsoon condition peryear
The meter should be capable of giving required performance in hot

and humid tropical climate, and climate conducive to rust and

fungus growth and Heavy lightning. The climatic conditions are also
prone to wide variations in the ambient conditions. Smoke and Dust
is also present in the atmosphere having extremely heavy pollution
level as per relevant standard.
The meter shall conform to the degree of protection IP 54 for front

side and IP 20 for backside for protection against ingress of dust,
moisture and vermin.
5. Data Logging Integration period should be programmable for Demand & Energies
Integration for 5, 15, 30, 60 minutes at Site (depending upon the requirement).
Period
6. TOD Registers Minimum 8 TOD register should be supported by meter.
7. Power Quality UP to 50th harmonic, for measurement of Total Harmonic

Parameters Distortion (THD) of Voltage and Current.
Up to 31st individual harmonic component measurement of Voltage

and Current.
TDD for Voltage and Current.
Sequence components (Positive & Negative Sequence).
Voltage sag, Voltage swell.
K-factor, Crest Factor.
8. Electrical Meter should display following minimum parameters

parameters
1. Voltages – phase wise and phase to phase.
2. Current - phase wise
3. Frequency
4. PF

5. Demand / Power: (Instantaneous) KW, KVA, KVAR,
6. Maximum Demand / Power: (Cumulative):
KW, KVA, KVAR,
7. Energies (Including Import, Export, Net)
KWH, KVAH, KVARH – Four Quadrant measurement.
8. Time Of Day (TOD) metering,
9. Phase Angle,
10. Power (On/Off hours),
11. Load (On/Off hours),
12. Feeder interruptions count
13. THD etc.
14. Energy History
15. Logging of, upto 10 Channels (for Energies, Demand etc.)

with Integration period of 5 / 15 / 30 / 60.
(Programmable at Site as per requirement)
16. Logging of Daily Total Energy Snapshot for 45 days.
17. Maximum Demand (MD) Recording and Communication of

Instantaneous demand:
Under the current integration period, the meter should be capable of

conveying instantaneous demand on the communication ports. The
meter should also be capable of displaying the instantaneous demand
on the display of the meter.
The maximum demand is to be monitored during each demand

interval set with 5 / 15 / 30 / 60 minutes integration period and the
maximum of these in a month shall be stored.

The meter should be also be capable of conveying the above maximum

demand (as well as various other recorded data) on the
communication ports. Whenever MD is reset the maximum demand
value so registered shall be stored along with date and time.
The meter shall be capable of being configured in to minimum of 8

registers for different time zones to meet the TOD requirements as
per concerned tariff requirements.
It should be possible to change the time period for the TOD

through programming at site.
9. Communication 1. RS485 (RJ45) port - One No. – Configurable on Modbus Protocol.

capabilities
2. One Ethernet Port (RJ45) - One No – This port should be capable
of being configured to work on any of the following protocols
like Modbus , IEC 61850, ProfiNET, BACnet (depending upon the
site requirement) and support data communication with
Substation Automation & Monitoring Systems (SAS) & SCADA
systems .
All the above communication ports shall be capable of

simultaneous & independent communication, and performance of
each port shall remain the same whether operating alone or in
conjunction with others ports.
10. Display The meter should have TFT / LCD graphical display.
11. Aux Power The meter shall be capable of working with any of the following Aux
Supply range Supply i.e., 50-300V AC or DC ± 20%,.
The metering system shall normally operate with the power drawn
through the auxiliary AC or DC supply. The metering system design
should enable the auxiliary supply to be switched automatically
between the AC and DC voltage, depending upon their availability.

12. Inputs & 1 relay output, 1 fixed pulse output, 2 configurable pulse inputs /
outputs outputs.
• Configurable as pulse input / output:
Pulse output type: volt-free, 100mA pulse
input type: Optical isolator, Voltage: 24-240 V AC / DC
• Relay output: Type: volt-free, 2A
• Analogue output (self-powered) 4 configurable AO 0-20mA, 4-

20mA
• Indicator 2 LEDs: 1 for metrology, 1 for alarms / events.
13. Password MFM shall be fully programmable & password protected.

Protection
14. Self-Diagnostic The meters shall have indications for unsatisfactory/non-

Features functioning of thefollowing parameters:
1.Time and calendar
2.Real Time clock (RTC)
3.All display segments
15. Programmable 1. Real time clock

Parameters
2. Demand integration Period
3. Block Capture Time
4. MD reset date
6. Events/Alarms.

The above shall be programmable at site.
16. Time Meter shall have a built-in calendar and clock, having an accuracy of
Synchronization <2 min/year or better.
The meter shall have provision of time synchronization over SNTP

(Simple network time protocol). Meter shall be capable to work as
SNTP client, and the meter shall be capable of being configured as
well as being polled by the server at fixed interval (which may range
from 1 minute to 2880 minutes).
When the meter detects the pulse from the server for time
synchronization, then, meter should sync itself with the time of
Server, with resolution up to 1 milli second.
17. Historical Data MFM shall be capable of recording in its Non-Volatile (NVM) all types
Recording of historical data related to Energies, Demand, TOD, Alarms, Events etc.
for a period of at least 45 days and it should be possible to retrieve
these datathrough communication port.
The life of battery for the NVM should not be less than 10 years.
18. Type Tests The MFM should be type tested as per BIS & IEC relevant standards
and the manufacturer shall provide the valid type test report (not
more than 05 years old).
19. Acceptance & The acceptance tests as stipulated in IS 14697 shall be carried out
Routine Tests by the supplier in the presence of purchaser’s representative. No of
samples and criteria for conformity from each lot offered for
inspection is also as per IS 14697.
The routine tests as stipulated in IS 14697 shall be carried out by

the supplier for 100% meters supplied and test certificates,

technical leaflet shall be enclosed along with each and every meter.
20. Inspection The inspection may be carried out by the purchaser at any stage of
manufacture. The manufacturer shall grant free access to the
purchaser’s representative at a reasonable time when the work is in
progress. Inspection and acceptance of any equipment under this
specification by the purchaser, shall not relieve the supplier of his
obligation of furnishing the equipment in accordance with the
specification and shall not prevent subsequent rejection if the
equipment is found to be defective.
The supplier shall keep the purchaser informed in advance, about

the manufacturing program so that arrangement can be made for
inspection.
The purchaser reserves the right to insist for witnessing the routine
testing of the bought out items. The supplier shall give 15 days
advance intimation to enable the purchaser to depute his
representative for witnessing the acceptance and routine tests.
21. Training The Supplier shall provide necessary training of personnel of

purchaser at their works/Principal Works relating to design,
manufacture, assembly, testing and operation & maintenance of
static meters for 4 personnel free of cost. However travel and
incidental charges of the personnel (including boarding & lodging)
shall be borne by the Purchaser.
22. Warranty The meters should be work satisfactorily for a period of 10 years
from the date of commissioning. During the Warranty period, if the
meter is found defective, it shall be repaired / replaced by the
supplier within 15 days of intimation, without any cost to the
purchase i.e. DMRC.

During above such period, the supplier shall provide a replacement

meter at site in lieu of the defective meter, without any cost to the
purchaser i.e. DMRC.
If the supplier does not honor the above, then, appropriate action
as per contract conditions shall be taken.
23. Important Note Before initiating the manufacturing & supply of the meter, the
contractor shall submit the detailed Guaranteed Technical
Particulars i.e. GTP (including the make & model & all relevant
details) along with submitting the compliance to this specification,
all relevant Standards & Regulatory requirements (duly signed and
stamped) for review & approval. The contractor shall also provide
all the details /clarifications as asked for, by the Authority
competent to approve the specifications for installation of this
meter.
The various requirements/parameters mentioned in this

specification are indicative and if anything is left to mentioned but
required for meeting the Scope of Supply & the requirements
mentioned in this specification and the requirements of the
prescribed Standards / Regulations and the authority to approve
the specification, then the same is deemed to have been included in
this specification without any additional financial implications to
the Employer /DMRC.
-------------------

Annexure-‘C’
Technical Specification for Multi-Function Meters for Provision in Various LT

Feeders in Elevated & Underground Stations
1 Scope
The specification covers the design, engineering, manufacture,
assembly, testing supply and delivery of Electronic Multi Function
Meter (MFM) suitable for measurement of energy and power,
demand requirement in an AC balanced/unbalanced system over a
power factor range of 0.5 lag to 0.5 lead through unity. MFM should
be a Four Quadrant, Bi-Directional power flow meter with accuracy
class 1.0 or better. The meter should be a self-contained device for
measurement of active, apparent and reactive energy, power
quality and certain other parameters as described in subsequent
paragraphs of this specification and it shall be suitable for being
connected directly to voltage transformers (VT)/capacitive voltage
transformers (CVT) having a rated secondary line-to-line voltage of
110vand to current transformers (CTS) having a rated secondary
current of 1A/5A, 3 element 4 wire / 3 element 3 wire as per
requirement. The reference frequency shall be 50 Hz. The MFM shall
be suitable for rack/ panel/ metal box mounting.
These meters should have communication port to interface for

remote meter reading. The Multifunction meter should include
devices with advanced power monitoring capabilities, which can be
used for standalone device monitoring and power quality analysis as
part of BMS and SCADA systems. It should also offer data logging,
control IOs and modular communication with multiple protocols for
third party system integration.
2 Standards
Unless otherwise specified elsewhere in this specification, the meter
shall conform in all respects including performance and testing thereof
to the followingIndian/ International Standards to be read with
up-to-date and latest amendments/ revisions there of :
1. IS 13779 (AC Static watthour meters, class 1.0 and 2.0-

specification) / IS 14697 (AC static transformer operated watt-
hour and VAR-Hour meters, class 0.2s & 0.5 S)
2. IEC 62052-11 (Electricity metering equipment (AC) – General

requirements, tests and test conditions)
3. IEC 62053-22 (Static meters for active energy (class 0.2s &

0.5s))
3 Climatic conditions
The meters to be supplied against this specification shall be suitable
for satisfactory continuous operation under the following climatic
conditions :
Sl. Parameter Range/Value

No.
iii. Average daily ambient air temperature (Deg. C) 35
vii. Max. wind pressure (kgf./sq.m) 150
ix. Seismic Zone Zone-IV
x. Average No. of thunderstorms days/years 85 (max)
xi. Average number of rainy days/years 120 (max)
xii. Average number of months/tropical 3
monsoon condition peryear
The meter should be capable of giving required performance in hot
and humid tropical climate, and climate conducive to rust and fungus
growth and Heavy lightning. The climatic conditions are also prone to
wide variations in the ambient conditions. Smoke and Dust is also
present in the atmosphere having extremely heavy pollution level as
per relevant standard.
4 Electrical Suitable for LT & HT, 3P4W & 3P3W system.
Specifications Measuring voltage range: 100 to 415 V (L-L) max, 60 V to 240 V (L-N)
max
Current Range: 1 – 2 A and 5 – 10 A (Programmable at site)
Starting current: 0.1 % of I basic.
Frequency: 50Hz
Burden :
Current circuit: 0.05 VA/phase @ 1A &
0.25 VA/phase @ 5A
Voltage circuit: 0.5 VA/phase
Accuracy class: 1.0 or better.
PF : 0.5 Lag to 0.5Lead
Maximum withstand voltage: 2 times of nominal voltage for 1 sec.
Maximum withstand Current continuously:
120% of I basic.

5 Degree of
The meter shall conform to the degree of protection IP 54 (front side) &
Protection
IP 20 (back side) for protection against ingress of dust, moisture and
vermin.
6 Measured Meter should display following minimum parameters
Electrical 1. Voltages – phase wise and phase-to-phase.
Parameters (Instantaneous & Average).
2. Current - phase wise.
3. Frequency
4. PF (Instantaneous & Average).
5. Active, Reactive & Apparent Power (Phase wise & Total)
6. Active, Reactive & Apparent Energy (Phase wise & Total)
7. Phase Angle
8. Power On / Off hours.
9. Load On / Off hours.
10. THD Voltage.
11. THD Current.
The meter should be also be capable of conveying the above parameters
on the communication ports.
7 Communication RS485 (RJ45) port - One No. – Configurable on Modbus Protocol.
Capabilities
8 Display The meter should have TFT / LCD display. The display should meet the
requirements of relevant standards.
9 Aux Power Supply The meter shall be capable of working with any of the following Aux
Range Supply i.e., 80 V-300V AC or DC ± 20%,.
The metering system shall normally operate with the power drawn
through the auxiliary AC or DC supply. The metering system design
should enable the auxiliary supply to be switched automatically
between the AC and DC voltage, depending upon their availability.
10 Password MFM shall be fully programmable & password protected.

Protection
11 Self- D iagnostics The meters shall have indications for unsatisfactory/non-functioning of
Features the following parameters:
1. Time and calendar
2. Real Time clock (RTC)
3. All display segments
12 Programmable The following parameters shall be programmable at site:

Parameters 1. Real time clock

13 Real Time Clock MFM shall have a built-in calendar and clock, having an accuracy of
<2 min/year or better.
14 Pulse Outputs Each MFM shall have 2 calibration LEDs (visual) for checking the
accuracy of active energy & reactive/apparent energy measurement.
These LED shall be visible from the front side of MFM .
15 Type Tests The meter shall be fully type tested as per IS 13779/ IS 14697,
whichever applicable as per class of MFM. The manufacturer shall
provide the valid type test reports (not more than 5 years old).
16 Acceptance & The acceptance tests as stipulated in IS 13779/IS 14697 shall be ,

Routine Tests whichever is applicable shall be carried out by the supplier in the
presence of purchaser’s representative. No of samples and criteria
for conformity from each lot offered for inspection is also as per IS
IS 13779/ IS 14697.
The routine tests as stipulated in IS/13779/ IS 14697 shall be carried

out by the supplier for 100% meters supplied and test certificates,
technical leaflet shall be enclosed along with each and every meter
17 Inspection The inspection may be carried out by the purchaser at any stage of
manufacture. The manufacturer shall grant free access to the
purchaser’s representative at a reasonable time when the work is in
progress. Inspection and acceptance of any equipment under this
specification by the purchaser, shall not relieve the supplier of his
obligation of furnishing the equipment in accordance with the
specification and shall not prevent subsequent rejection if the
equipment is found to be defective.
The supplier shall keep the purchaser informed in advance, about the
manufacturing program so that arrangement can be made for
inspection.
The purchaser reserves the right to insist for witnessing the routine
testing of the bought out items. The supplier shall give 15 days
advance intimation to enable the purchaser to depute his
representative for witnessing the acceptance and routine tests.
18 Training Of The Supplier shall provide necessary training of personnel of
Personnel purchaser at their works/Principal Works relating to design,
manufacture, assembly, testing and operation & maintenance of
static meters for 4 personnel free of cost. However travel and
incidental charges of the personnel (including boarding & lodging)

shall be borne by the Purchaser. Charges of the personnel (including

boarding & lodging) shall be borne by the Purchaser.
19 Warranty
The meters should be work satisfactorily for a period of 10 years from
the date of commissioning. During the Warranty period, if the meter
is found defective, it shall be repaired / replaced by the supplier
within 15 days of intimation, without any cost to the purchase i.e.
DMRC.
During above such period, the supplier shall provide a replacement

meter at site in lieu of the defective meter, without any cost to the
purchaser i.e. DMRC.
If the supplier does not honor the above, then, appropriate action as
per contract conditions shall be taken.
20 Important Note Before initiating the manufacturing & supply of the meter, the
contractor shall submit the detailed Guaranteed Technical Particulars
i.e. GTP (including the make & model & all relevant details) along with
submitting the compliance to this specification, all relevant
Standards & Regulatory requirements (duly signed and stamped) for
review & approval. The contractor shall also provide all the details
/clarifications as asked for, by the Authority competent to approve
the specifications for installation of this meter.
The various requirements/parameters mentioned in this

specification are indicative and if anything is left to mentioned but
required for meeting the Scope of Supply & the requirements
mentioned in this specification and the requirements of the
prescribed Standards / Regulations and the authority to approve the
specification, then the same is deemed to have been included in this
specification without any additional financial implications to the
Employer /DMRC.
---------------------------

Draft No. DFA/3337Attachment:Section VI Employer’s Requirements-General Specifications (GS).pdf
DELHI METRO RAIL CORPORATION LIMITED
BIDDING DOCUMENTS
FOR
ELECTRICAL CONTRACTS
OF
PHASE - 4 OF DELHI METRO RAIL CORPORATION
JUNE, 2021
PART 2: EMPLOYERS REQUIREMENTS
SECTION-VI: GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS (GS)
DELHI METRO RAIL CORPORATION LTD.
(A Joint venture company of Govt. of India & Govt. of NCT of Delhi)
Metro Bhawan, Fire Brigade Lane, Barakhamba Road, New Delhi - 110001
Website: www.delhimetrorail.com
Draft No. DFA/3337
Attachment:Section VI Employer’s Requirements-General Specifications (GS).pdf
Phase-IV Electrical Contracts - General Specification
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. GENERAL ....................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1 Application of the General Specification (GS) ..................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 Abbreviations .......................................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.3 Definitions ................................................................................................................................................ 1-3
1.4 Glossary of Terms ................................................................................................................................... 1-5
1.5 Submission for Review ........................................................................................................................... 1-5
1.6 Standards, Codes of Practice ................................................................................................................. 1-6
1.7 Employer’s Drawings ............................................................................................................................. 1-6
1.8 Specifications in Metric and Imperial Units ......................................................................................... 1-6
1.9 System Safety ........................................................................................................................................... 1-6
1.10 Not used ................................................................................................................................................... 1-7
1.11 Suitability for Purpose ............................................................................................................................ 1-7
1.12 Climatic Condition / Operating Environment ..................................................................................... 1-7
1.13 Survey and Site Investigations ............................................................................................................. 1-10
2. PLANNING, PROGRAMME AND PROGRESS MONITORING ..................... 2-1

2.1 Planning ................................................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.2 Programming General Requirements ................................................................................................... 2-1
2.3 Progress Monitoring ............................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.4 Works Programme.................................................................................................................................. 2-1
2.5 Not used ................................................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.6 Not used ................................................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.7 Not used ................................................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.8 Not used ................................................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.9 Not used ................................................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.10 Not used ................................................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.11 Not used ................................................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.12 Not used ................................................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.13 Not used ................................................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.14 Not used ................................................................................................................................................... 2-2
Page GS I Table of Contents

Draft No. DFA/3337
2.15 Not used ................................................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.16 Not used ................................................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.17 Monthly Progress Report ....................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.18 Programme Analysis Report .................................................................................................................. 2-3
2.19 Key Date and Access Date Report ........................................................................................................ 2-3
2.20 Not used ................................................................................................................................................... 2-3
2.21 Progress Meetings ................................................................................................................................... 2-3
2.22 Quarterly Review Meetings ................................................................................................................... 2-4
3. MANAGEMENT PLANS AND SUBMISSIONS .............................................. 3-1

3.1 General ..................................................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2 General Organisation ............................................................................................................................. 3-1
3.3 Project Management Plan ...................................................................................................................... 3-2
3.4 Systems Assurance Plans ........................................................................................................................ 3-5
3.5 Procurement and Manufacturing Plan ................................................................................................. 3-6
3.6 Construction and Installation Management Plan ................................................................................ 3-8
3.7 Deleted ...................................................................................................................................................... 3-9
4. DOCUMENTS SUBMISSION AND REVIEW.................................................. 4-1

4.1 Documents, Submissions and Correspondence .................................................................................... 4-1
4.2 Submissions to the Employer’s Representative ................................................................................... 4-1
4.3 Records and Reports............................................................................................................................... 4-2
4.4 Records..................................................................................................................................................... 4-4
5. QUALITY MANAGEMENT.............................................................................. 5-1

5.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................. 5-1
5.2 General Requirements .................................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.3 Management Quality Plan .............................................................................................................................. 5-2
5.4 Not used ............................................................................................................................................................ 5-3
5.5 Site Quality Plan .............................................................................................................................................. 5-3
5.6 Inspection and Test Plans, Records and Reports ......................................................................................... 5-3
5.7 Review, Verification & Audit ......................................................................................................................... 5-4
5.8 Quality Control Register ................................................................................................................................ 5-5
5.9 Summaries of Inspection and/or Test ............................................................................................................ 5-5
5.10 Notification of Non-conformities.................................................................................................................... 5-5

Page GS II Table of Contents
Draft No. DFA/3337
5.11 Monthly Quality Report...........................................................................................................5-6
6. SOFTWARE MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL .................................................. 6-1

6.1 Prescriptive Framework ......................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.2 Software Framework .............................................................................................................................. 6-1
7. MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT .................................................................... 7-1

7.1 Materials and Equipment Provided by the Employer ........................................................................ 7-1
7.2 Materials .................................................................................................................................................. 7-1
7.3 Equipment ............................................................................................................................................... 7-2
7.4 Electronic Control Racks & Cabinets ................................................................................................... 7-2
8. PACKAGING, STORAGE, SHIPPING AND DELIVERY ................................ 8-1

8.1 Storage of Equipment ............................................................................................................................. 8-1
8.2 Crating ..................................................................................................................................................... 8-1
8.3 General Precautions................................................................................................................................ 8-1
8.4 Packaging Procedures ............................................................................................................................ 8-2
8.5 Shipping ................................................................................................................................................... 8-2
8.6 Delivery .................................................................................................................................................... 8-2
9. TESTING AND COMMISSIONING ................................................................. 9-1

9.1 General ..................................................................................................................................................... 9-1
9.2 Manufacturing Test Plan ....................................................................................................................... 9-1
9.3 Commissioning Plan ............................................................................................................................... 9-2
9.4 On-Site Testing and Commissioning Plan ............................................................................................ 9-3
9.5 Activity of the Employer and the Employer’s Representative ........................................................... 9-7
9.6 Records and Reports............................................................................................................................... 9-8
9.7 Test Equipment and Facilities ............................................................................................................... 9-9
9.8 Witnessing by the Employer and the Employer’s Representative ................................................... 9-10
9.9 Failures................................................................................................................................................... 9-11
9.10 Repeat Tests ........................................................................................................................................... 9-11
9.11 Fault Categories .................................................................................................................................... 9-11
9.12 Fault Log ................................................................................................................................................ 9-11
9.13 Hardware Failure Reports ................................................................................................................... 9-11
9.14 Software Failure Reports ..................................................................................................................... 9-12
Page GS III Table of Contents

Draft No. DFA/3337
10. TRAINING ..................................................................................................... 10-1
10.1 Training Requirements ........................................................................................................................ 10-1
10.2 Training Method ................................................................................................................................... 10-2
10.3 Employer’s Instructor Training .......................................................................................................... 10-3
10.4 Training Plant & Equipment ............................................................................................................... 10-3
10.5 Testing and Assessment ........................................................................................................................ 10-4
10.6 Training Records .................................................................................................................................. 10-4
10.7 Transfer of Technology ...................................................................................................................... ..10-4
11. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION ............................ 11-1

11.1 General ................................................................................................................................................... 11-1
11.2 Arrangement and Format of Manuals ................................................................................................ 11-2
11.3 Drawings ................................................................................................................................................ 11-2
11.4 Submissions ........................................................................................................................................... 11-3
11.5 Operation and Maintenance Manuals ................................................................................................ 11-3
12. SUPERVISION AND PLANNING OF MAINTENANCE ................................ 12-1

12.1 Scope....................................................................................................................................................... 12-1
12.2 Maintenance Planning & Management Staff ..................................................................................... 12-1
12.3 Supervisory Staff ................................................................................................................................... 12-2
13. SUPPLY OF SPARE PARTS, SPECIAL TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT . 13-
1
13.1 Details of supply .................................................................................................................................... 13-1
13.2 Manufacture and delivery of Spare Parts .......................................................................................... 13-3
13.3 Contract Spares ..................................................................................................................................... 13-4
13.4 Commissioning Spares ......................................................................................................................... 13-4
13.5 Defects Liability Spares ........................................................................................................................ 13-4
13.6 Special Tools and Test Equipment ...................................................................................................... 13-5
13.7 Coding and Tagging of Spare Parts and Special Tools and Test Equipment ................................. 13-5
14. THE WORKS AND CARE OF THE WORKS................................................ 14-1

14.1 Methods of Construction ...................................................................................................................... 14-1
14.2 Temporary Works ................................................................................................................................ 14-1
14.3 Normal Working Hours ....................................................................................................................... 14-1
14.4 Drawings and Schedules ....................................................................................................................... 14-1

Page GS IV Table of Contents
Draft No. DFA/3337
14.5 Notification and Inspection of Works ................................................................................................. 14-1
14.6 Construction Restraints ........................................................................................................................ 14-1
14.7 Protection from Water ......................................................................................................................... 14-2
14.8 Protection from Weather ..................................................................................................................... 14-2
14.9 Protection of Work ............................................................................................................................... 14-2
15. SITE ESTABLISHMENT AND ATTENDANCE ............................................ 15-1

15.1 Use of the Site ........................................................................................................................................ 15-1
15.2 Survey of the Site .................................................................................................................................. 15-1
15.3 Fences and Signs on the Site ................................................................................................................ 15-1
15.4 The Contractor’s Site Accommodation .............................................................................................. 15-2
15.5 Site Utilities and Access ........................................................................................................................ 15-2
15.6 Site Facilities for the Employer’s Representative .............................................................................. 15-2
15.7 Clearance of the Site ............................................................................................................................. 15-3
15.8 Attendance ............................................................................................................................................. 15-3
15.9 Contractor’s Equipment ...................................................................................................................... 15-4
15.10 Security .............................................................................................................................................. 15-4
16. LIAISON WITH OTHERS .............................................................................. 16-1

16.1 Liaison with Others .............................................................................................................................. 16-1
16.2 Work by Other Contractors ................................................................................................................ 16-1
16.3 Interface Management.......................................................................................................................... 16-1
17. THE SITE ...................................................................................................... 17-1

17.1 Access to Site ......................................................................................................................................... 17-1
17.2 Site Restrictions ..................................................................................................................................... 17-1
17.3 Site Services ........................................................................................................................................... 17-2
17.4 Site Cleanliness ...................................................................................................................................... 17-2
17.5 Prevention of Mosquito Breeding ........................................................................................................ 17-2
17.6 Deleted .................................................................................................................................................... 17-3
17.7 Deleted .................................................................................................................................................... 17-3
17.8 Deleted .................................................................................................................................................... 17-3
17.9 Access to the Site by Other Contractors ............................................................................................. 17-3
17.10 Transportation to Site....................................................................................................................... 17-3
Page GS V Table of Contents

Draft No. DFA/3337
17.11 Contractor’s Own Rolling Stock ..................................................................................................... 17-4
17.12 Defined Area Working and Works Train Operations .................................................................. 17-4
17.13 Not used ............................................................................................................................................. 17-5
18. HEALTH AND SAFETY ................................................................................ 18-1
19. DAMAGE AND INTERFERENCE ................................................................. 19-1

19.1 Damage and Interference ..................................................................................................................... 19-1
19.2 Watercourses and Drainage Systems .................................................................................................. 19-2
19.3 Utilities ................................................................................................................................................... 19-3
19.4 Structures, Roads and Other Property ............................................................................................... 19-5
19.5 Access ..................................................................................................................................................... 19-6
19.6 Trees and Other Similar Obstructions ............................................................................................... 19-6
19.7 Noise Control on Works Site ................................................................................................................ 19-7
19.8 Spoil Disposal ........................................................................................................................................ 19-7
20. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS................................. 20-1

21. PHOTOGRAPHS ............................................................................................... 1
21.1 Photographs ................................................................................................................................................ 1
22 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY SUPPLY............................................................. 1

22.1 Electricity Supply for the Contractor by the Project Civil Contractors .............................................. 1
22.2 Applicability ............................................................................................................................................... 1
22.3 Work on Site ............................................................................................................................................... 1
22.4 Electrical General ...................................................................................................................................... 1
22.5 Materials, Appliances and Components .................................................................................................. 2
22.6 Mains Voltage ............................................................................................................................................. 2
22.7 Types of Distribution Supply .................................................................................................................... 2
22.8 Protection of Circuits ................................................................................................................................. 2
22.9 Earthing ...................................................................................................................................................... 3
22.10 Plugs, Socket Outlets and Couplers ..................................................................................................... 3
22.11 Cables ...................................................................................................................................................... 3
22.12 Lighting Installation .............................................................................................................................. 4
22.13 Electrical Motors .................................................................................................................................... 4
Page GS VI Table of Contents

Draft No. DFA/3337
22.14 Inspection and Testing........................................................................................................................... 4
22.15 Identification ............................................................................................................................................
22.16 Maintenance .............................................................................................................................................
22.17 Maintenance Record .............................................................................................................................. 5
22.18 Metering .................................................................................................................................................. 5
22.19 Inability to Supply ................................................................................................................................. 5
23 NOT USED ......................................................................................................... 1
APPENDIX-1
MONTHLY PROGRESS REPORT ............................................................................. 1
1.1 Topics .......................................................................................................................................................... 1
1.2 Progress Reports ........................................................................................................................................ 1
1.3 Copies .......................................................................................................................................................... 2
APPENDIX-2
PROGRAMME CALENDER ....................................................................................... 1
APPENDIX-3
SUBMISSION FOR REVIEW REQUEST FORM ........................................................ 1
APPENDIX-4
SCHEDULE OF ITEMS TO BE SUBMITTED BY CONTRACTOR ............................ 1
APPENDIX- 5
TYPICAL TYPE TEST REQUIREMENTS
5.1 Electronic and Electrical Equipment ....................................................................................................... 4
5.2 Mechanical Tests ........................................................................................................................................ 5
5.3 Environmental Tests .................................................................................................................................. 7
5.4 Electrical Tests ........................................................................................................................................... 9
APPENDIX-6
REQUEST FOR INSPECTION OF WORKS FORM ................................................... 1
APPENDIX-7
PROGRAMME REQUIREMENTS .............................................................................. 1
APPENDIX-8
FIRST AID REQUIREMENTS ..................................................................................... 1
Page GS VII Table of Contents

Draft No. DFA/3337
8.1 Provisions by others ................................................................................................................................... 1
8.2 Provisions by the Contractor .................................................................................................................... 1
APPENDIX-9
WORKS AREAS
9.1 Works Areas ............................................................................................................................................... 1
End of Table of Contents
Page GS VIII Table of Contents

Draft No. DFA/3337
Page Intentionally Blank
Page GS IX Table of Contents

Draft No. DFA/3337
Draft No. DFA/3337
CHAPTER 1
1. GENERAL
1.1 Application of the General Specification (GS)
1.1.1 The provisions contained in the Particular Specification (PS) and the Employer’s
Drawings shall prevail over the provisions contained in this GS.
1.1.2 The provisions contained in the GS shall prevail over the provisions contained in
International Standards, European Standards, British Standards, Indian Standards,
British Standard Codes of Practice and similar standard documents stated in the
Contract.
1.1.3 This GS shall be read in conjunction with the other documents constituting the
Contract.
1.2 Abbreviations
Common abbreviations used in the GS and in the PSs shall have the following
meanings:
ACB : Air Circuit Breaker
AMS : Auxiliary Main Sub Station
ASS : Auxiliary Sub Station
BCC : Backup Control Centre
BCU : Bay Control Unit
BIM : Building Information Modelling
BS : British Standard
BEC : Buried Earth Conductor
BMS : Building Management System
CADD : Computer Aided Design and Drafting
CAR : Corrective Action Request
CMV : Catenary Maintenance Vehicle
CNP : Construction Noise Permits
COTS : Commercial Off the Shelf
CPM : Critical Path Method
CV : Curriculum Vitae
DG : Diesel Generator
DLP : Defects Liability Period
DMRC : Delhi Metro Rail Corporation
ECS : Environment Control System

sfsfasfsff
E&M : Electrical & Mechanical
Page GS 1-1 of 11
Draft No. DFA/3337
EMC : Electromagnetic Compatibility
EMIP : Environmental Mitigation Implementation Plan
EMP : Environmental Management Plan
EMSD : Electrical and Mechanical Services Department
EMU : Electric Multiple Unit
EN : Euro-Norm (European Standards)
EPD : Environmental Protection Department
ETI : Employer's Training Instructors
FAI : First Article Inspection
FAT : Factory Acceptance Test(s)
GCC : General Conditions of Contract
GS : General Specification (this document)
HV : High Voltage
IEC : International Electro-technical Commission
IEE : The Institution of Electrical Engineers
IED : Intelligent Electronic Device
IP : Ingress Protection
IS : Indian Standards
ISO : International Standards Organisation
ITT : Instructions To Tenderers
ITU : International Telecommunications Union
LV : Low Voltage
MCB : Miniature Circuit Breaker
MMI/ HMI : Man/Human -Machine Interface
MTR : Mass Transit Railway
NSR : Noise Sensitive Receivers
OCC : Operations Control Centre
OEM : Original Equipment Manufacturer
OPC : Overhead Protection Cable
OSR : Operational Safety Report
OSR(S) : Operational Safety Report (Software)
OHE : Overhead Equipment (Flexible Catenary)
P3 : Primavera Project Planner
PLC : Programmable Logic Controller
Page GS 1-2 of 11
Draft No. DFA/3337
PPE : Personal Protective Equipment
PS/TS : Particular Specification
PVC : Polyvinyl Chloride
QA : Quality Assurance
RAMS : Reliability, Availability, Maintainability and Safety
RC : Return Conductor Cable
ROCS : Rigid Overhead Conductor System
RSS : Receiving Sub Station
RTU : Remote Terminal Unit
SAR : Special Administrative Region
SAT : Systems Acceptance Test(s)
SCADA : Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition System
SCC : Special Conditions of Contract
SIL : Safety Integrity Level
SQAP : Software Quality Assurance Plan
SRR : Submission Review Request
SWA : Steel Wire Armoured
T/C : Time Chainage
TRIP : Track Related Installation Programme
TSS : Traction Sub Station
TVS : Tunnel Ventilation System
UPS : Uninterrupted Power Supply
Table 1-1 General Abbreviations

1.2.1 Further abbreviations may be defined within the body of the GS or PS where there is
only local applicability. Where such abbreviations exist the Contractor shall exercise
great care that the abbreviation is not used out of context when communicating with
the Employer, the Employer’s Representative or any Third Party.
1.2.2 Abbreviations of units of measurement used in the GS shall have the meanings as
defined under the SI system of units.
1.3 Definitions
Words and phrases defined in the GCC or SCC shall retain the same meaning within
the GS and PS unless specifically redefined within this GS or under the provisions of
clause 1.1.1 above for the purpose of a particular clause or group of clauses.
(1) “Access Dates” are dates that are to be achieved by other than the
Contractor and which are considered to be essential to the successful
completion of the Contract to the original planned schedule.
(2) “Commissioning” means the process of setting to work the complete

transportation system through a series of integrated tests that
Page GS 1-3 of 11
Draft No. DFA/3337
demonstrate the installation and performance in accordance with the

specified criteria.
(3) “Day” means calendar day unless expressly stated otherwise.
(4) “Defined Area” means an area within which Works Trains will be
operated and the Employer’s defined area working safety rules will
apply.
(5) “Factory Acceptance Tests” means the tests to be performed at the

Contractor’s factories prior to delivery to the Site to verify compliance
with the Specification and quality standards
(6) “Installation Tests” means the tests to be performed to verify the

conformity of completion of an installation/assembly to the design
documents previously reviewed without objection by the Employers
Representative prior to the start of Commissioning. Installation Tests do
not form part of the Tests on Completion to be performed by the
Contractor in order to achieve Employer’s Taking Over of the Works or
any Section however they must be successfully completed before the
Tests on Completion can commence.
(7) “Key Dates” are dates which are to be achieved by the Contractor and
which are considered to be essential to the successful completion of the
project to the original planned schedule. A list of the activities,
completion of which gives rise to a Key Date, is included in the PS.
(8) “Partial Acceptance Tests” means the functional tests to be performed

on components and parts of systems to meet the specified criteria.
Partial Acceptance Tests form part of the Tests on Completion to be
performed under the Contract in order to achieve Employer’s Taking
Over of the Works or any Section.
(9) “Service Trial” means the phase after completion of the System
Acceptance Tests where the training and operating procedures are
validated through the running of the trains to the published timetable.
Service Trial form part of the Tests on Completion to be performed under
the Contract in order to achieve Employer’s Taking Over of the Works or
any Section.
(10) “Quality Control Point” means a point in time when a notice or other
document is to be submitted to the Employer’s Representative in
accordance with the Contract before the Contractor can commence,
proceed with or terminate an activity
(11) “Quality Hold Point” means a point in time when a notice of no objection
by the Employer’s Representative is required.
(12) ‘S’ curve” means the graphical relationship between the planned (and
actual where appropriate) quantity of completed work (or resources) and
time. The curve produced is to be illustrated on an accumulative basis
where the slope of the line indicates the rate of undertaking the work or
rate of expenditure of the resources.
(13) “Specification (the)” means the aggregate sum of the documents and
any amendments thereto, issued to Tenderers by DMRC as part of the
Tender process before the final date for submission of Tenders. This
shall include but not be limited to; Employer’s
Page GS 1-4 of 11
Draft No. DFA/3337
(14) Requirements, Employer’s Tender Drawings, Preliminary Operating

Plan and Clarification of Tender Documents issued in accordance with
the ITT but shall not include the ITT itself nor any minutes of meetings.
(15) “Specification (this)” means the particular document within which the
reference is made.
(16) “System Acceptance Tests” means those tests that demonstrate the
performance of the installation/equipment to the specified requirements
as detailed in the PS. SATs form part of the Tests on Completion to be
performed under the Contract in order to achieve Employer’s Taking
Over of the Works or any Section.
(17) “Integrated Testing and Commissioning” means those tests that

demonstrate the integration of the complete transport system meeting
the requirements of the Specification in an operating environment.
Integrated Testing and Commissioning form part of the Tests on
Completion to be performed by the Contractor in order to achieve
Employer’s Taking Over of the Works or any Section.
(18) “Validation” means the process of confirmation by examination and

provision of objective evidence that the application produced achieves
the particular requirements specified.
(19) “Verification” means the process of confirmation by examination and

provision of objective evidence that the specified requirements have
been incorporated.
1.4 Glossary of Terms

1.4.1 Words and expressions to which meanings are assigned in any paragraph of the GS
shall have the same meanings in other paragraphs of the GS except when the context
otherwise requires.
1.4.2 Utilities are electricity, lighting, traffic control, telephone and other communication
cables, gas, water, sewage and drainage pipes and ducts, including all associated
protection, supports, ancillary structures, fittings and equipment.
1.5 Submission for Review

1.5.1 Reference in the GS and PS to any submission made by the Contractor to the
Employer’s Representative having been reviewed without objection by the Employer’s
Representative shall mean the issue of a notice of no objection by the Employer’s
Representative issued in response to a submission made by the Contractor.
Documents, drawings, specifications, calculations, technical papers, material
samples, methods of construction and any other matters which have been reviewed
without objection by the Employer’s Representative shall not be changed without
further submission for review to the Employer’s Representative of the proposed
changes.
1.5.2 Clause 4.2 below prescribes the process to be adopted for submissions of
documents, material samples and any other items to the Employer’s Representative.
Schedules of items that are to be submitted to the Employer’s Representative for
review are contained within this GS and/or the PS.
1.5.3 Submissions for review shall be made in accordance with the dates (relative to the
Works Programme) stated in the GS and/or the PS, or in accordance with
APPENDIX 4 of this Specification. For items not specifically given a submission
Page GS 1-5 of 11
Draft No. DFA/3337
date in the Specification submissions shall be strictly in accordance with the agreed
Submissions Programme or as directed by the Employer’s Representative.
1.6 Standards, Codes of Practice

1.6.1 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract, reference in the GS to International
Standards, European Standards, British Standards, British Standard Codes of
Practice and similar standards shall be to that edition of the document stated in the
PS, including all latest amendments issued by the relevant authority. In the event that
no specific edition reference is given, the current edition as at the date of issue of the
Letter of Acceptance shall apply.
1.6.2 Later editions of International Standards, European Standards, other national or

international Standards or Codes of Practice and other similar standards, or standards
which are considered to be equivalent, shall not apply unless reviewed without
objection by the Employer’s Representative. The Employer’s Representative shall
give or withhold his notice of no objection after the Contractor has provided him with a
copy of the relevant standard for information. If a notice of no objection is given, the
Contractor shall provide two copies of the document for use by the Employer’s
Representative.
1.6.3 Permanent Works, Temporary Works, Contractor’s Equipment, hardware, firmware,

software, apparatus of all kinds, and, where appropriate, materials and workmanship
shall be in accordance with the Standards quoted in the Specification and the
requirements identified in the PS or, where no Standard is identified, the Contractor
shall make a proposal which shall be subject to review by the Employer’s
Representative.
1.7 Employer’s Drawings

1.7.1 The Employer’s Drawings assist in describing the scope of the Works in general and
clarify constraints, interface arrangements and the conceptual nature of the finished
structures/system outline.
1.7.2 The Contractor shall carefully check all Employer’s Drawings and advise the
Employer’s Representative of discrepancies, omissions, errors or ambiguities should
any be found.
1.7.3 The Contractor shall note that any drawings included but marked “For information
only” do not form part of the Contract.
1.7.4 Dimensions shall not be obtained by scaling from the Employer’s Drawings.
Dimensions that are not shown or are not calculable from dimensions shown on
Employer’s Drawings shall be obtained from the Employer’s Representative.
1.8 Specifications in Metric and Imperial Units

1.8.1 Specifications in imperial units shall not be substituted for specifications in metric units
stated in the Contract without the prior consent of the Employer’s Representative.
1.8.2 Conversion of metric units to imperial units and of imperial units to metric units shall
be in accordance with the Standard International Practice.
1.9 System Safety

1.9.1 Safety philosophy
1.9.1.1 Safety of passengers, staff and the general public is paramount for railway operation.
Prime consideration shall be given to all issues that can have an effect on safety.
Page GS 1-6 of 11
Draft No. DFA/3337
1.9.1.2 During the construction phase the safety of all staff involved in the Works and any
members of the general public affected by the Works shall be the prime feature of all
working methods, including storage and transport to site as well as all temporary
works not incorporated into the final construction.
1.9.2 Safety Management

The Contractor shall implement the Contract Systems Safety Management
Requirements, as referenced in the Project Safety Manual and elsewhere in the
Specification, in consultation with the Employer’s Representative.
1.9.3 Prescriptive Safety Criteria

1.9.3.1 The Contractor shall identify and list all applicable statutory and regulatory
requirements and codes of practice relevant to the Works and to work within the
constraints and limitations imposed by the requirements and codes.
1.9.3.2 The safety of the Contractor’s supplied systems and equipment shall be developed by
the Contractor in accordance with the requirements contained in clause 3.4.5 below
and the PS.
1.10 Not used
1.11 Suitability for Purpose

Delhi Metro Rail Corporation (DMRC) shall be operating high-density passenger trains
with high volume of traffic in the proposed corridors commensurate with the stage
opening of the sections.
1.11.1 Interference and Compatibility

The Contractor shall ensure that all Works and Contractor’s Equipment operate in a
satisfactory manner without causing interference to other equipment and services
including parties external to the Employer. The Contractor shall also ensure that the
Permanent Works are physically and technically compatible with associated plant and
in particular with that of other Contractors.
1.11.2 Planning for introduction to service

The Permanent Works shall be constructed in such a manner that they can be
installed, tested and commissioned without adversely affecting the operation or safety
of the Project. The Permanent Works shall be constructed so that, where appropriate,
considering the operating procedures adopted by the Employer, they can be brought
into operational use during non-traffic hours and if necessary during a single night
following maintenance, repair or overhaul during the life of the Permanent Works,
equipment and systems.
1.12 Climatic Condition / Operating Environment

1.12.1 General
1.12.1.1 The following information on climatic conditions in Delhi/NCR/actual project site shall
be taken into account by the Contractor when constructing any part of the Permanent
Works. The Contractor shall ensure that due allowance is made for more severe local
conditions when Permanent Works are required to operate, for example, with
restricted ventilation that may lead to higher local ambient temperatures, and any
other factors that may affect the operating environment in any way.
(1) Unless specific figures are provided elsewhere, the Permanent Works will
generally be required to function at its rated value with the values of ambient
temperature and relative humidity appropriate to the location of the
equipment within the classifications shown in Table 1-2. Certain parts of the
Page GS 1-7 of 11
Draft No. DFA/3337
Permanent Works may need to be rated for more or less onerous conditions
as required by the PS.
(2) Clause 1.12.2 below gives the different classifications of environment to be

encountered. For any type of item, examples of which are installed in more
than one environmental class, all examples of the type shall be suitable for
installation in the most severe environmental class conditions encountered by
any example of the type.
(3) The Contractor’s attention is drawn to the more severe environmental

conditions that may exist during the construction period and shall take
adequate measures to protect the Permanent Works against any deleterious
effects of such conditions during the time between installation and final
completion of the Project.
(4) Air throughout the Project will contain considerable moisture content and the
atmosphere will be corrosive. The Permanent Works shall be tropicalized
and vermin proof.
(5) The information on climatic conditions in Delhi / NCR / Actual project site
may be obtained from published data of India Meteorological Department
publication 2016 or latest.
(6) While designing and selection of the equipment and components, special
care shall be taken for protecting these items against dust, humidity and wide
temperature variations. The Contractor is also required to take into account,
quality of power supply available in general in Delhi / actual project site with
regard to voltage fluctuations, frequency variations, occasional voltage
surges / impulses and design his system components accordingly. As per the
experience of DMRC, high level of IP protection as well as higher equipment
ratings to protect against power supply variations / fluctuations is required to
ensure equipment reliability under severe environment / power supply
conditions of Delhi/NCR.
1.12.2 Classification of Equipment Environment

The locations at which equipment may be installed have been divided into three
environmental classes as shown in Table 1-2. The classes of environment are
considered to become more extreme from A to C.
CLASS LOCATION of EQUIPMENT
A Air Conditioned Offices, Computer and Equipment Rooms
B Ventilated Equipment Rooms in buildings at the surface or at the

underground station or structures.
C Outdoors
Table 1-2 Classes of Environment

The following are the minimum requirements for equipment to be installed in each
class of environment. Where any class does not have a value for a parameter the
most extreme value quoted for the lesser class environments should be used.
Page GS 1-8 of 11
Draft No. DFA/3337
1.12.3 Requirements for Class A

o
Minimum Temperature - 5C
o
Maximum Temperature - 35 C
Relative Humidity - Minimum 0%, Nominal 65%, Maximum 95% (Non
Condensing)
Electrical Noise - High Frequency to 1MHz, 1kV damped to 50% after
6 cycles.
Radio Frequency field strength 10 V/m, UHF & VHF
bands.
1.12.4 Requirements for Class B

o
Minimum Temperature - 5C
o
Maximum Temperature - 45 C
Relative Humidity - Nominal 70%, Maximum 100% (Non Condensing)
3
Air Quality - Polluted and dusty - SO2: 80-120mg/m
3
Suspended Particulate Matter: 360-540mg/ m
Electrical Noise - Impulse 1kV, 1.2/50 rise/decay, 500S source
impedance, 0.5 J source energy.
Radio & High frequency as Class A.
1.12.5 Requirements for Class C

Environmental conditions
0 0
(i) Ambient air temperature 0.6 to 47.2 C
(ii) Deleted
(iii) Maximum relative humidity 100%
Ranging from 1750 mm to

(iv) Annual rainfall
6250 mm.
(v) Maximum number of thunder storm days per annum 85
(vi) Maximum number of dust storm days per annum 35
(vii) Number of rainy days per annum 120
As per IS: 875 latest

(viii) Basic wind pressure
edition
(ix) Altitude Not exceeding 1000m
“VERY HIGH” as per IEC

(x) Pollution severity level
60815 Latest edition
Vibration Level
All equipments to be installed on viaduct must be designed for reliable operation upto vibration level
as prescribed in EN-61373:2010/AC:2017 or IEC- 60068-2 as applicable.
Page GS 1-9 of 11
Draft No. DFA/3337
1.12.6 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)

Electronic equipment in a railway environment shall be immunised against the usual
electromagnetic influences to be expected from the rail operations. For this, the
following EMC classification in accordance to IEC 801 or similar, for the equipment
rooms shall be achieved:
1.12.6.1 Electrostatic discharge

The electronic equipment rooms shall be constructed in accordance to class 2 of IEC
801-2 or similar.
1.12.6.2 Electromagnetic fields

801-3 or similar.
1.12.6.3 Fast transient interference (Burst)

801-4 or similar.
1.12.6.4 High energy transient interference

801-5 or similar.
1.12.6.5S witching processes in high-voltage installations

The location of computer systems in the neighbourhood < 1m of high-voltage
installations, such as medium voltage or transformer stations as well as direct parallel
exposure of power and data cables should be avoided.
1.12.6.6 Magnetic fields

The following magnetic field strengths at the place of installation of cathode ray tube
(CRT) based visual display units (VDU) should not be exceeded:
DC fields: 10 A/m or 12 µT
AC fields: 1 A/m or 1,2 µT
If the image quality is impaired by values exceeding the above the Contractor shall
provide any necessary shielding or alternative corrective measures to restore the
picture quality. Note flat screen VDU using LED technology or similar may be
acceptable if a sufficiently high resolution and image size can be obtained.
1.13 Survey and Site Investigations

1.13.1 For reference to surveys external to the Contract, the Contractor shall refer all Levels
to Mean Sea Level (MSL) Datum, which is that generally used throughout Delhi.
1.13.2 The datum used for the Contract shall be Mean Sea Level Datum.
1.13.3 The Contractor shall carry out all further site investigations necessary for the
construction of the Permanent Works and to enable the determination of the methods
of construction and the nature, extent and design of Temporary Works.
Page GS 1-10 of 11
Draft No. DFA/3337
1.13.4 The Contractor shall investigate environmental factors also to determine suitable
methods of manufacture and installation, both for Temporary and Permanent Works.
In particular the Contractor shall ensure that the dusty environment of Delhi has no
detrimental effect to the functionality, reliability or long-term maintainability of the
Permanent Works.
* End of Chapter *
Page GS 1-11 of 11
Draft No. DFA/3337
Draft No. DFA/3337
CHAPTER 2
2. PLANNING, PROGRAMME AND PROGRESS MONITORING

2.1 Planning
2.1.1 The Contractor shall develop in detail, a logical method of executing the Works taking
into account their complex nature and different phases and shall provide programmes
which reflect the detailed planning undertaken.
2.1.2 The programmes, shall start with the Commencement Date of the Works as day one,
are to be realistic, achievable and shall be accompanied by the detailed supporting
Plans referred to in Chapter 3 below.
2.2 Programming General Requirements

2.2.1 Programme activities shall be discrete items of work, which when combined, produce
definable elements, components, Milestones, Stages and Sections of the Works and
clearly identify the completion obligations of the Contractor.
2.2.2 Access Dates and Key Dates shall be an integral part of all programmes and all
activities, and sequencing and interrelationships required to achieve each completion
obligation shall be shown. Milestones shall not impose constraints that in any way
affect the programme logic and float or limit the achievement of Key Dates.
Milestones shall not be introduced into any programme as constrained dates.
2.2.3 The critical path shall be clearly identified in the programme and fully described in the
accompanying programme narrative.
2.2.4 Activity descriptions shall clearly convey the nature and scope of the Works.
Programmes shall take into account the activities of precursor, concurrent, adjacent
and follow on Project Contractors as well as utility service diversions, new utilities and
connections and any other activity that may affect the progress of the Works.
2.2.5 The Contractor shall also incorporate the Employer’s Representative’s requirements
for additional activities, to further explain or subdivide complex or long duration tasks,
without affecting completion dates.
2.3 Progress Monitoring
The Contractor shall monitor its and its subcontractors’ performance and against
programmes to ensure its compliance with its obligations under the Contract.
Monitoring of the Works shall include direct, daily monitoring of the progress of the
Works and the preparation of written and computerised reports to be submitted to the
Employer’s Representative. The reports shall include all necessary supporting data to
apprise the Employer’s Representative of the status of the completion of the Works as
described in clause 2.17 below.
2.4 Works Programme

The Works Programme to be submitted under the Contract shall be developed from
the Design Submission Programme / Outline Works Programme submitted and
developed during the Tender period.
Page GS 1-1 of 4
Draft No. DFA/3337
2.4.1 The Contractor shall prepare and submit its Works Programme and three month
rolling programmes and the detailed requirements contained in Appendices 2 and 7.
2.4.2 In compiling its Works Programme and in all subsequent updating and reporting, the
Contractor shall make provision for the time required for co-ordinating and completing
the design, testing, commissioning and integrated testing of the Works, including, inter
alia, design co-ordination periods during which the Contractor shall co-ordinate its
design with those of Designated Contractors, the review procedures, determining and
complying with the requirements of all Government Departments and all others whose
consent, permissions, authority or license is required prior to the execution of any
work.
2.5 Not used
2.6 Not used
2.7 Not used
2.8 Not used
2.9 Not used
2.10 Not used
2.11 Not used
2.12 Not used
2.13 Not used
2.14 Not used
2.15 Not used
2.16 Not used
2.17 Monthly Progress Report

2.17.1 The Contractor shall prepare Monthly Progress Reports covering all aspects of the
execution of the Works. Such Monthly Progress Reports shall be in writing and shall
be delivered to the Employer’s Representative by the 5th day of the month following
the month of the Monthly Progress Report. The Monthly Progress Report shall take
account of work performed up to and including the last day of the month to which the
Monthly Progress Report relates.
2.17.2 The Monthly Progress Report shall include an executive summary and contain clear
and concise statements in respect of every significant aspect of the Works including,
without limitation, the requirements specified in APPENDIX 1 of this
Specification.
2.17.3 The Monthly Progress Report shall contain evidence that documents and supports the
progress of the Works, as stated in the Interim Payment Certificates, to the
satisfaction of the Employer’s Representative.
Page GS 1-2 of 4
Draft No. DFA/3337
2.17.4 The reports, documents and data provided shall be an accurate representation of the
current status of the Works and of the work to be accomplished and shall provide the
Employer’s Representative with a sound basis for identifying problems and deviations
from planned work and for making decisions.
2.18 Programme Analysis Report

2.18.1 Deleted
2.18.2 Deleted
2.19 Key Date and Access Date Report

2.19.1 The Key Date and Access Date Report shall be prepared in a format reviewed by the
Employer’s Representative and identify and state the status of: -
(1) all Key Dates and Access Dates that were planned to be achieved in the
reporting period or earlier but have not been achieved;
(2) all Key Dates and Access Dates that have been achieved in the reporting
period;
(3) all Key Dates and Access Dates that are planned to be achieved in the next
reporting period; and
(4) any future Key Dates and Access Dates that appear unlikely to be achieved
on time.
2.19.2 The Key Date and Access Date Report shall identify, for all relevant Key Dates and
Access Dates, the planned dates, the actual dates achieved, and where the original
planned dates are forecast to be unachieved, the revised dates identified in the
Contract, as the same may be revised from time to time in accordance with the
Contract.
2.19.3 The Key Date and Access Date Report shall also provide an explanation for any
deviation from the planned dates. Measures taken or required to recover programme
delays shall also be identified.
2.20 Not used
2.21 Progress Meetings

2.21.1 The Employer will chair progress meetings every month with the Contractor. These
meetings will be held at dates and times to be advised by the Employer’s
Representative. Progress meetings shall not be later than 10 days after the issue of
the Contractor’s Monthly Progress Report.
2.21.2 The Employer’s Representative may convene at his discretion, at any time upon
reasonable notice to the Contractor, any meeting, either on or off the Site, to discuss
and address any aspect of the Works or the Contract. The Contractor shall attend
any such meetings convened by the Employer’s Representative.
2.21.3 All meetings shall be convened in New Delhi unless directed otherwise by the
Employer’s Representative. Meetings shall be attended by senior personnel from the
Contractor who shall arrive properly briefed for all aspects of the meeting and shall be
empowered to make executive decisions in respect of the execution of the Works.
Page GS 1-3 of 4
Draft No. DFA/3337
2.22 Quarterly Review Meetings

2.22.1 The Employer’s Representative may convene Quarterly Review Meetings in New
Delhi at approximately three monthly intervals. The Employer’s Representative will
notify the Contractor the date of such Quarterly Review Meetings not less than 28
days before they are to be held.
2.22.2 Quarterly Review Meetings shall be held over a period of up to 3 days in order to
review the overall progress of the Works in the context of the Project as a whole and
to address and resolve any issues relevant to the execution and progress of the
Works. Such Quarterly Review Meetings will be chaired by Senior official of the
Employer or his delegate. The Contractor shall have in attendance one senior
representative of Director level from each of the companies comprising the Contractor
(together with the Managing Director of the company acting as leader or sponsor of
the Contractor if it is a joint venture, consortium or partnership whenever necessary
and required by the Employer’s Representative).
2.22.3 The Contractor shall submit names of the persons whom the Contractor proposes to
attend each Quarterly Review Meeting to the Employer’s Representative for review
not less than 7 days prior to each Quarterly Review Meeting.
* End of Chapter *
Page GS 1-4 of 4
Draft No. DFA/3337
CHAPTER 3
3. MANAGEMENT PLANS AND SUBMISSIONS

3.1 General
3.1.1 In order to organise the various submissions required by the Employer’s
Representative, and to ensure the Contractor’s understanding and compliance with
the requirements of the Contract, a series of Management Plans shall be developed.
These Management Plans will serve to structure the submittals in a manner that the
Contractor can develop and prepare the submittals and the Employer’s
Representative can review and comment on a prescribed programme.
3.1.2 The Management Plans shall be configured as a family of “stand-alone” plans and
associated documents each covering one of the subjects listed below.
The plans and documents shall be co-ordinated with each other and shall collectively
define, describe and encompass the Contractor’s proposed methods, procedures,
processes, organisation, sequencing of activities, etc. and shall show how these
combine together to assure that the Works truly meet the requirements of the
Specification in respect of the subjects listed.
Unless otherwise stated in the PS, all plans and documents shall be submitted in
preliminary form within 60 days of the Commencement Date of the Works followed by
detailed plans within 60 days of the preliminary submission. Further submissions
shall be made:
(1) when required in accordance with the Works Programme;
(2) whenever the development of the Contractor’s planning allows the plan to be
developed further;
(3) in response to comments made by the Employer’s Representative in

accordance with clause 4.3.6 below;
(4) whenever any change occurs that invalidates the information contained in the
previously submitted and reviewed document, within 14 days of the
occurrence of such change; and
(5) when requested by the Employer’s Representative from time to time.
3.2 General Organisation

3.2.1 The Plans listed below shall be developed and submitted by the Contractor for the
Employer’s Representative's review:
Project Management Plan
- Contractor’s Project Plan
- Interface Management Plan
Systems Assurance Plans

- Quality Plans
- Safety Plans
Procurement and Manufacturing Plan
- Factory Testing Plan
Page GS 2-1 of 13
Draft No. DFA/3337
- Procurement, Manufacturing and Delivery Plan
Construction and Installation Management Plan
- Construction and Installation Plan
- Health and Safety Documentation
- Not used
Completion Management Plan

- Commissioning Plan
- Operation and Maintenance Manuals Plan
- Training and Transfer of Technology Plan
- Defects Liability Management Plan
3.3 Project Management Plan

The overall management of the Works shall be the Contractor’s responsibility. The
organisation of the resources for the procurement, manufacture, delivery, installation,
testing and commissioning, and setting to work is to be developed into a Project
Management Plan. Each section of this plan shall fully describe the Contractor’s
understanding of the Works and management skills and structure required to achieve
the same.
3.3.1 Contractor’s Project Plan

3.3.1.1 The Contractor’s Project Plan shall provide a clear overview of the Contractor’s
organisation, management systems and methods to be used for the complete
execution of the Works.
3.3.1.2 The Contractor’s Project Plan shall include a summary description of each and every
stage of implementation of the Works, clearly showing the principal organisational
interfaces both within the Contractor’s own organisation (including sub-contractors of
every tier) and with Other Contractors and Relevant Authorities, defining how each of
these interfaces is to be managed and controlled. An organisation chart shall be
produced to illustrate the subdivision of the work into elements for effective technical
and managerial control, the reporting structure and the interface relationship among
all parties involved. Names, addresses, telephone and fax numbers of all principal
contacts shall be listed.
3.3.1.3 The Contractor’s Project Plan shall contain structured organisation charts showing the
hierarchical relationship of the Contractor’s organisation (including sub-contractors of
every tier). The organisation charts shall be produced as a “family” such that the
basic chart shows the overall organisation structure supported by subsidiary charts
detailing the internal structure of the various departments or sections of the overall
organisation.
3.3.1.4 The Contractor’s Project Plan shall include full details of the qualifications,
experience, authority and responsibility of the personnel assigned to all key positions
of the Contractor’s organisation (including sub-contractors of every tier). As a
minimum, this shall include all levels down to senior managers and shall include the
personnel responsible for each individual department and functional group. A clear
reference shall be given as to the location of staff (e.g. Site resident or factory based,
etc.). Names, addresses, telephone and fax numbers of all principal contacts shall be
listed.
Page GS 2-2 of 13
Draft No. DFA/3337
3.3.1.5 The Contractor’s Project Plan shall define the Contractor's management structure for
the execution of the Works and for the control of the quality of the Works and shall,
without limitation, identify and set out:
(1) the procedure for audit;
(2) the procedures for the control of receipt and issue of all Works related
correspondence so as to ensure traceability;
(3) the procedures for filing system to be implemented to maintain the

Contractor’s records during the course of the work. The filing systems used
by the Contractor and sub-contractors of any tier shall be compatible as far
as is necessary;
(4) the procedures for the identification, production, verification, internal

approval, review (when required) by the Employer’s Representative,
distribution, implementation and recording of changes to all drawings, reports
and specifications;
(5) the procedures for the evaluation, selection, engagement and monitoring of
sub-contractors / suppliers together with the means of application of quality
assurance to their work including audit and acceptance;
(6) the procedure for the regular review and revision of each type of quality plan
and its supplemental individual specific quality plans to ensure their
continuing suitability and effectiveness, in addition to the method to be used
for revision and issue of revised documentation;
(7) the procedures for the control, calibration and maintenance of inspection,
testing and measuring equipment;
(8) the procedures for the selection, indexing, disposition and maintenance of
project records for storage in the archives. A list of items to be archived
including their periods of retention shall be submitted for review by the
Employer’s Representative;
(9) the procedures for identifying training needs and for the provision of training
of all personnel performing activities affecting quality; and
(10) the procedures for the control of non-conformity.
3.3.1.6 Particulars of agent

(1) The Contractor shall give and provide all necessary supervision during the
execution of the Works as long as the Employer’s Representative considers
necessary for the proper fulfilment of the Contractor’s obligations under the
Contract.
(2) The Contractor shall ensure that he is at all times represented on the Site by a
competent and authorised English/Hindi speaking agent who shall be deemed
to have been reviewed without objection by the Employer’s Representative
provided such agent is not expressly objected to by the Employer’s
Representative in writing within 14 days from the service of a notice upon the
Employer’s Representative by the Contractor of the appointment of such agent.
Such agent shall be constantly on the Site and shall give his full time to the
superintendence of the Works.
(3) The Employer’s Representative shall have the authority to withdraw his notice
of no objection to the agent at any time. If such notice of no objection is
withdrawn the Contractor shall remove the agent from the Site forthwith and
Page GS 2-3 of 13
Draft No. DFA/3337
shall not thereafter employ him again on the Site in any capacity and shall
forthwith replace him by another competent English/Hindi speaking agent
reviewed without objection by the Employer’s Representative.
(4) Such authorised agent shall receive on behalf of the Contractor directions and
instructions from the Employer’s Representative.
(5) The following particulars of the proposed agent shall be submitted to the
Employer’s Representative for review:-
(i) name;
(ii) copy of Identity Card;
(iii) details of qualifications, including copies of certificates; and
(iv) details of previous experience.
(6) The particulars of the agent shall be submitted 30 days before the agreed
scheduled start of that part of the Works. Except in the case of a replacement
agent (as provided for in clause 3.3.1.6.(3) above), in which case the said
particulars shall be submitted forthwith.
(7) The agent shall possess relevant academic or professional qualification and
have at least 10 years experience in relevant engineering works. The
Employer’s Representative reserves the right to call upon the Contractor to
prove such qualifications/experience to the satisfaction of the Employer’s
Representative.
3.3.2 Interface Management Plan

a) The Contractor shall interface and liaise with other Contractors in accordance
with the requirements of clause 16.3 below.
b) Within 60 days of notification from the Employer’s Representative of the identity
of each Other Contractor, the Contractor shall develop and submit to the
Employer’s Representative an Interface Management Plan that is mutually
acceptable to both the Contractor and the other Contractors. The Interface
Management Plan shall:
(1) identify the sub-systems as well as the civil works and facilities with
interfacing requirements;
(2) define the authority and responsibility of the Contractor’s and other
Contractors’ (and any relevant sub-contractors’) staff involved in
interface management and development;
(3) identify the information to be exchanged, together with the

management and technical skills required for the associated
development work, at each phase of the Contractor’s and other
Contractors’ (and any relevant sub-contractors’) project life-cycles;
(4) include considerations of the Interface Hazard Analysis;
(5) specify the configuration and version control procedures in accordance

with the Contractor’s and other Contractors’ (and any relevant sub-
contractors’) quality management system; and
(6) address the supply, installation, testing and commissioning programme

of the contracts to meet the key dates of each contract, and highlight
any programme risks requiring management attention.
Page GS 2-4 of 13
Draft No. DFA/3337
c) Once the Interface Management Plan has been reviewed without objection by
the Employer’s Representative, the Contractor shall execute the Works in
accordance with the Interface Management Plan. The Contractor shall advise
the Employer’s Representative immediately of any difficulty in developing a
mutually acceptable Interface Management Plan.
d) Within 90 days of notification from the Employer’s Representative of the identity
of each Other Contractor, the Contractor shall develop and submit to the
Employer’s Representative for review a Detailed Interface Document for each
Other Contractor that is mutually acceptable to both contractors. The Detailed
Interface Document shall address in detail how the dates identified in the
Interface Management Plan shall be achieved and shall identify the data
required by the interfacing other Contractors to meet the requirements of the
PS.
e) The Detailed Interface Document shall specify the proposed method and
schedule for verifying the interface integrity, the individual equipment/system
performance and the combined system performance. The Detailed Interface
Document shall include a programme of tests to demonstrate the performance
and integrity of the integrated systems. The Interface Specification appended
to the PS shall form the basis of the Detailed Interface Document, but does not
relieve the Contractor’s obligation to identify any new interface to meet the
Contract requirements. Any revision to the Detailed Interface Document shall
be mutually acceptable by contractors and submitted to the Employer’s
Representative for review.
3.4 Systems Assurance Plans

3.4.1 The Systems Assurance Plans shall submit for review to the Employer’s Representative
in Preliminary and Final forms.
3.4.2 The various plans shall be co-ordinated with each other and shall collectively define,
describe and encompass the Contractor’s proposed methods, procedures, processes,
organisation, sequencing of activities, etc. and shall show how these combine
together to assure that the Works truly meet the requirements of the Specification in
respect of the subjects listed.
3.4.3 Configuration management of all hardware and software shall be in accordance with
ISO 10007.
3.4.4 Quality Plans

The Contractor shall submit for review by the Employer’s Representative quality plans
in accordance with the requirements of clause 5.2 below.
3.4.5 Safety Plans

3.4.5.1 Site Safety Plan
3.4.5.1.1 The Contractor shall prepare a Site Safety Plan incorporating the requirements of the
Project Safety Manual and designed specifically for the various sites (including
storage and overseas sites) on which work under the Contract is carried out.
3.4.5.1.2 The Site Safety Plan shall form a part of the Health and Safety Documentation
referred to in Chapter 18 below.
3.4.5.2 RAMS Plan
3.4.5.2.1 Deleted
3.4.5.2.2 The Contractor shall submit for review by the Employer’s Representative, the
Contractor’s Systems, Safety Plan, Reliability Plan and Maintainability Plan of
Equipment/Systems for which it is required in the PS. The Contractor’s Reliability Plan
and Maintainability Plan shall include Failure Modes, Effects on the system
Page GS 2-5 of 13
Draft No. DFA/3337
performance and Criticality Analysis and the production of a Reliability Critical Items
List. Contractor shall also propose mitigation plan against each failure mode to
minimise its impact and restore the system back to original working state in the
shortest possible time.
3.5 Procurement and Manufacturing Plan
The Procurement and Manufacturing Plan shall be configured as a family of “stand-

alone” plans and associated documents each covering one of the subjects listed
below. The plans shall be co-ordinated with each other and shall collectively define,
describe and encompass the Contractor’s proposed methods, procedures, processes,
organisation, sequencing of activities, etc. and shall show how these combine
together to assure that the Works fully meet the requirements of the Specification in
respect of the subjects listed. The Contractor should ensure that the
equipment/systems proposed for elevated/at-grade/ underground sections shall be, as
far as possible, similar to the ones used in DMRC Projects.
3.5.1 Factory Testing Plan

3.5.1.1 Deleted
The plan shall contain but not be limited to the following topics:
(1) the plan for the production and submission of the inspection and test
procedures to the Employer’s Representative for review including the
submission of the inspection and test reports and records; and
(2) Type Tests, Routine Tests, First Article Inspections and any other tests
constituting the Factory Acceptance Tests.
3.5.1.2 The Contractor shall arrange for all equipment and systems manufactured for
incorporation into the Permanent Works to undergo a Factory Acceptance Test (FAT)
before shipment from the place of manufacture. Any particular requirements for
inspection and testing at the place of manufacture are prescribed in the PS.
3.5.1.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for re-inspecting and re-testing any failed
inspection and Factory Acceptance Test including regression testing on previously
passed items.
3.5.1.4 Inspections and tests that are to be witnessed by the Employer or the Employer’s
Representative shall be sensibly grouped and scheduled so that as many inspections
and tests as possible may be witnessed during a single visit.
3.5.1.5 Unless otherwise specified in PS, Type Tests as detailed in clause 9.2.6 below shall
be performed on equipment to be installed as part of the Permanent Works under the
Contract.
3.5.1.6 For all production items a First Article Inspection shall be undertaken as detailed in
clause 9.2.6.8 below. Routine production testing methods shall be detailed for review
by the Employer’s Representative. Routine testing shall ensure that all samples of a
production item are within the tolerances required for complete interchangeability.
The Contractor shall prepare two copies of an inspection or test report immediately
after the completion of each inspection or test whether or not witnessed by the
Employer or the Employer’s Representative. If the Employer or the Employer’s
Representative has witnessed the inspection or test, he will countersign the inspection
or test report to indicate his review of the information and conclusions (i.e. whether or
not the equipment being inspected or tested has passed satisfactorily) contained
therein. If the Employer or the Employer’s Representative has not witnessed the
inspection or test (i.e. if a waiver has been granted, or the Employer or the Employer’s
Representative has not witnessed the inspection or test for some other reason in
Page GS 2-6 of 13
Draft No. DFA/3337
accordance with the Contract), the Contractor shall forward two copies of the
inspection or test report without delay to the Employer’s Representative. The
Employer’s Representative will countersign the report to indicate his review of the
information and conclusions (i.e. whether or not the equipment being inspected or
tested has passed satisfactorily) and return one copy to the Contractor. Where the
results of the inspection or test do not meet the requirements of the Specification, the
Employer or the Employer’s Representative may call for a re-inspection or re-test.
3.5.1.7 For standard equipment, which is serial or bulk manufactured, manufacturer’s type
test certificates (or equivalent) may be accepted, subject to review by the Employer’s
Representative.
3.5.1.8 It is to be ensured that type test should not be more than 5 years old from the date of
Letter of Acceptance (LOA) of the contract, unless otherwise specified in PS.
3.5.1.9 Materials and equipment shall not be released for shipment until all applicable
inspections and tests including Factory Acceptance Tests have been satisfactorily
completed.
3.5.2 Procurement, Manufacturing and Delivery Plan

3.5.2.1 The Contractor shall prepare procurement, manufacturing and delivery plans in
respect of all items and goods. Separate parts of the plan shall be prepared for
Contractor or sub-contractor off-Site activities. Each plan shall identify the scope of
work to be applied. In relation to such scope of work, it shall, without limitation,
define:
a) the purchasing of items and goods and ensuring they comply with the
requirements of the Specification, including (without limit) purchasing
documentation and specific Verification arrangements for
Contractor/Employer’s Representative inspection of material or manufactured
product prior to release for use;
b) the manufacturing process so as to ensure compliance with the

design;
c) the manufacturing process so as to ensure clear identification and traceability

of material and manufactured parts;
d) the inspection and testing of incoming materials, in process and final product
so as to ensure specified requirements for the material and/or manufactured
product are met;
e) the identification of the inspection and test status of all material and
manufactured products during all stages of the manufacturing process to
ensure that only products that have passed the required inspections and
tests are dispatched for use and/or installation;
f) review and disposal of non-conforming material or product so as to avoid

unintended use;
g) the assessment and disposal of non-conforming material and manufactured

product and approval for reworking or rejection as scrap;
h) the identification of preventive action so as to prevent recurrence of similar

non-conformance; and
i) the handling, storage, packaging, preservation and delivery of manufactured

product.
Page GS 2-7 of 13
Draft No. DFA/3337
3.5.2.2 Deleted
3.5.2.3 Deleted
3.5.2.4 Once the inspection and any required remedial actions are completed to the
satisfaction of the Employer’s Representative, the Employer’s Representative shall
give a notice of no objection for unit shipment. The Employer’s Representative will
not withhold his notice of no objection for shipping unreasonably, provided all pre-
delivery assembly and testing has been successfully completed.
3.5.2.5 Any unit delivered without the Employer’s Representative’s notice of no objection shall
be rejected at the Site and all expenses thereby incurred shall be borne by the
Contractor.
3.6 Construction and Installation Management Plan

The Construction and Installation Management Plan shall be configured as a family of
“stand-alone” plans and associated documents each covering one of the subjects
listed below.
The plans shall be co-ordinated with each other and shall collectively define, describe
and encompass the Contractor’s proposed methods, sequencing of activities, etc. and
shall show how these combine together to assure that the Works truly meet the
requirements of the Specification in respect of the subjects listed.
3.6.1 Construction and Installation Plan

3.6.1.1 The Contractor shall prepare plans for the construction and installation activities on
and off the site, as referenced in clause 14.1.1 below, and shall ensure that these are
properly related to the subsequent testing and commissioning activity.
3.6.1.2 Separate parts of the plan shall be prepared for other contractor(s) or sub-
contractor(s) off-site activities.
3.6.1.3 Each construction plan shall identify the scope of activity to be controlled. In relation
to such scope of activity, it shall, without limitation, define:
(1) Deleted
(2) Deleted
(3) the interfacing or co-ordination required with the Contractor's other related
plans;
(4) the specific methods of construction and installation to identify any relevant
method statements and develop those method statements to a sufficient
degree of detail reviewed by the Employer’s Representative;
(5) a detailed method statement which shall include but not be limited to:
a) description of main operations and sub-operations;
b) sequence of sub-operations;
c) quantities of the work and production rates to be achieved;
d) resources to be employed; and
e) quality checks to be carried out, supervision being exercised and safety
precautions to be employed;
(6) the list of procedures and work instructions to manage and control the quality
of construction and installation works, including without limitation:
a) Deleted
b) Deleted
c) the construction processes including Temporary Works so as to ensure
compliance with drawings and Specification. In addition, any software to be
Page GS 2-8 of 13
Draft No. DFA/3337
used in the construction, installation and commissioning process shall be

identified and details of the Verification and Validation processes for the
software application shall be given;
d) the construction and installation process so as to ensure clear identification
and traceability of material and manufactured product;
e) the identification of the inspection and test status of all material and
manufactured products during all stages of the construction and installation
process to ensure that only products that have passed the required
inspections and tests are despatched for use and/or installation;
f) review and disposition of non-conforming material or product so as to avoid
unintended use/installation;
g) the assessment and disposition of non-conforming material and product and
approval for reworking or rejection as scrap;
h) the identification of preventive action so as to prevent recurrence of similar
non-conformance; and
i) the handling, storage, packaging, preservation and delivery of product; and
(7) the security control of the Site and the works area for Contractor’s
accommodation, storage, car park and other works facilities, etc. in
accordance with clause 15.10 below.
3.6.1.4 Deleted
3.6.1.5 Where all or part of the Works is within the DMRC Protection Zone, the Contractor
shall follow the guidelines issued by the Employer’s appropriate authority. The
Contractor shall submit to the Employer’s Representative for review his construction
method statement and detailed design of any Temporary Works proposed to be
erected within this zone adjacent to DMRC properties.
3.6.1.6 The following particulars shall be submitted to the Employer’s Representative for
review within 14 days of the Commencement Date of the Works:
(i) drawings showing the layout within the Site of the Employer’s Representative’s
and Contractor’s accommodation, Project signboards, access roads and major
facilities required early in the Contract;
(ii) drawings showing the layout and the construction details of the Employer’s
Representative’s accommodation; and
(iii) drawings showing the details to be included on Project signboards.
3.6.1.7 Drawings showing the location of stores, storage areas, work areas and other major
facilities shall be submitted to the Employer’s Representative for review as early as
possible, but in any case not later than 28 days before construction of the facilities.
3.6.2 Health and Safety Documentation

3.6.2.1 The Contractor shall submit Health and Safety Documentation to fully comply with the
requirements of the Project conditions and proposed work activities in accordance
with Chapter 18 below.
3.6.2.2 The Contractor shall submit to the Employer’s Representative the Health and Safety
Documentation for review within 30 days of the Commencement Date of the Works.
3.6.3 Not used
3.7 Deleted
3.7.1 Deleted
3.7.2 Commissioning Plan
Page GS 2-9 of 13
Draft No. DFA/3337
3.7.2.1 The Contractor shall ensure the timely preparation of the Commissioning Plan in a
format and to a level of detail in accordance with clause 9.3 below. The Contractor
shall submit the first draft of the Commissioning Plan to the Employer’s
Representative within 180 days of the Commencement Date of the Works.
3.7.2.2 The Commissioning Plan shall consist of the following:
a. Deleted
b. On-Site Testing and Commissioning Plan
(i) Installation Tests Schedule
The Contractor shall submit to the Employer’s Representative a
comprehensive schedule of Installation Tests as required by clause 9.4.3
below and the PS and in accordance with the Installation Programme as
stated in clause 1.1 above. The schedule shall be submitted within the
period of time laid down in the PS, or, if none is given, not later than two
months in advance of the date for the commencement of the Installation
Tests.
(ii) Partial Acceptance Tests Plan
comprehensive Partial Acceptance Tests Plan including all requirements
detailed in clause 9.4.4 below and the PS. The plan shall be submitted
within the period of time laid down in the PS, or, if none is given, not later
than four months in advance of the date for the commencement of the
Partial Acceptance Tests.
(iii) System Acceptance Tests Plan
comprehensive System Acceptance Tests Plan including all requirements
detailed in clause 9.4.5 below and the PS. The plan shall be submitted
within the period of time laid down in the PS, or, if none is given, not later
than four months in advance of the date for the commencement of the
System Acceptance Tests.
(iv) Integrated Testing & Commissioning Plan
comprehensive Integrated Testing & Commissioning Plan including all
requirements detailed in clause 9.4.6 below and the PS. The plan shall be
submitted within the period of time laid down in the PS, or, if none is
given, not later than four months in advance of the date for the
commencement of the Integrated Testing & Commissioning.
3.7.3 Operation and Maintenance Manuals Plan

3.7.3.1 The Contractor shall develop an Operation and Maintenance Manuals Plan to suit
staged commissioning of the system and to ensure the timely preparation of the
Contractor’s Operation and Maintenance Manuals and the ‘As-Built’ drawings in a
format and to a level of detail reviewed without objection by the Employer’s
Representative and in accordance with Chapter 11 below.
3.7.3.2 The Contractor shall submit the Operation and Maintenance Manuals Plan by the date
stated in the PS, or, if none is given, not later than nine (9) months prior to the issue
of the Taking Over Certificate for the Works and according to staged commissioning
of the proposed systems.
3.7.4 Training and Transfer of Technology Plan

3.7.4.1 The Contractor shall ensure the timely preparation of the Contractor’s Training and
Transfer of Technology Plan in a format and to a level of detail reviewed without
objection by the Employer’s Representative and fulfilling the requirements of clause
10.1 below.
Page GS 2-10 of 13
Draft No. DFA/3337
3.7.4.2 The Contractor shall submit the Training and Transfer of Technology Plan by the date
stated in the PS, or, if none is given, not less than six (6) months prior to the issue of
the Taking Over Certificate for the Works and also to suit the staged commissioning of
the relevant systems.
3.7.5 Not Used
3.7.6 Defects Liability Management Plan
The Contractor shall submit for review by the Employer’s Representative a Defects
Liability Management Plan to repair, replace and perform any remedial item upon the
Works identified by the Employer’s Representative during the Defects Liability Period
(DLP). The first submission of this plan is required upon issuance of the Taking Over
Certificate for the Works. The Contractor shall:
(a) endeavour to complete all necessary work in a timely responsible manner;

(b) not proceed with any remedial work without the consent of the Employer’s
Representative;
(c) submit a plan that details the methods and timing of any proposed work; and
(d) update the plan monthly, showing progress of the work and the time to
completion.
3.7.7 Not used
* End of Chapter *
Page GS 2-11 of 13
Draft No. DFA/3337
Draft No. DFA/3337
CHAPTER 4
4. DOCUMENTS SUBMISSION AND REVIEW

4.1 Documents, Submissions and Correspondence
Copies of correspondence relevant to the execution of the Works and not of a
confidential nature received from or despatched to Government departments, utility
undertakings and Project Contractors employed by the Employer shall be submitted to
the Employer’s Representative for information as soon as possible but in any case not
later than 7 days after receipt.
4.2 Submissions to the Employer’s Representative

4.2.1 General requirements
4.2.1.1 All submissions shall be made to the Employer’s Representative in a format reviewed
without objection by the Employer’s Representative and in accordance with the
requirements in:
(1) the Contract;
(2) the Computer Aided Design & Drafting (CADD) Manual; and
(3) the Document Submittal Instructions to Consultants and Contractors.
4.2.1.2 Paper and drawing sizes shall be “A” series sheets as specified in BS 3429.
4.2.1.3 The following software (versions quoted or higher) compatible for use with Intel-
Windows based computers shall be used, unless otherwise stated, for the various
electronic submissions required:
Document Type Electronic Document Format (latest versions of)

Text Documents MS Word
Spread Sheets MS Excel
Data Base Files MS Access
Presentation Files MS PowerPoint
Programmes Primavera for Windows
AutoCAD Graphics CorelDraw / AutoCAD
Photographic Adobe Photo Shop
Desktop Publishing QuarkXPress
CADD Drawings Micro Station
3D/4D Models BIM
Media for Electronic File Submission
All submittal shall be accompanied with a CD containing the submittal.
Internet File Formats/Standards
Deleted
4.2.1.4 Deleted
4.2.1.5 If required, two copies of all internal and external orders placed by the Contractor for
equipment or materials required for the Works shall be forwarded to the Employer’s
Representative at the time of issue. All orders shall state the Employer’s
Representative’s requirements for inspection and testing, shall bear the Contract
reference, Contractor’s name and address and shall indicate, where applicable, the
sub-section of the Works for which the equipment or material is required.
Page GS 3-1 of 5
Draft No. DFA/3337
4.2.1.6 Deleted
4.2.1.7 The Contractor shall have the obligation to upgrade, at his own cost, all the relevant
software to the latest version upon instruction by the Employer’s Representative, after
the new version of the relevant software has been launched for more than six months
in Delhi.
4.2.1.8 The Contractor shall submit a drawing register to the Employer’s Representative in
electronic copy and hard copy with each submission of drawings and at an interval
agreed by the Employer’s Representative. The drawing register shall be in a format
submitted for review and agreed without objection by the Employer’s Representative
and shall include each document reference number, version, date, title and data-file
name.
4.2.1.9 Specific additional requirements in respect of the numbering scheme shall be as
defined in the PS.
4.2.2 Content
4.2.2.1 Unless otherwise specified or permitted by the Employer’s Representative, each
submission shall comprise:
(1) for drawings - 3 paper A1 copy, 3 paper A3 copies and an electronic
data copy of all drawings; and
(2) for documents - the unbound original, 3 bound copies and an electronic
copy when applicable.
(3) Final approved submission shall be in 3 paper A1 copy, 6 paper A3

copies and an electronic data copy of all drawings and shall be the
unbound original, 6 bound copies and an electronic copy when
applicable of all documents.
4.2.2.2 The A3 copies of drawings shall be produced as reduced versions of the A1 original.
4.3 Records and Reports
4.3.1 Reports and records that are to be submitted to the Employer’s Representative shall
be in a format reviewed by the Employer’s Representative. Reports and records shall
be signed by the Contractor’s agent or by a representative authorised by the
Contractor.
4.3.2 Within 28 days of the Commencement Date of the Works, the Contractor shall submit
a Project document control procedure to the Employer’s Representative for review,
which shall include but not be limited to the following:
(1) a document approval system which shall specify the level of authority for
approval of all documents and material before submission to the
Employer’s Representative;
(2) a system of issuing documents to ensure that pertinent documents are

issued to all appropriate locations;
(3) a document change or re-issue system to ensure that only the latest
revision of a document can be used; and
(4) a submission identification system which identifies each submission

uniquely by the following:
(a) contract number;

(b) discipline;
(c) submission number; and
Page GS 3-2 of 5
Draft No. DFA/3337
(d) revision indicator.
4.3.3 Project records will eventually be used by the Employer to manage, operate and
maintain the Works after the completion of the Project under construction and for
future reference.
4.3.4 The Contractor shall submit the documents as required by the Employer’s
Representative as Project records in full and on time. The Employer’s Representative
shall determine the adequacy of the Project record.
4.3.5 Submission and review procedure

4.3.5.1 Except where specific procedures are given for certain items, all submissions shall be
submitted and reviewed according to the procedure laid down in the following clauses.
4.3.5.2 Each submission shall be accompanied by a brief introduction to explain which sub-
system, part or Section of the Works to which the submission refers, listing the
documents enclosed with the submission, and describing in outline how all relevant
requirements of the Specification are achieved by the proposals.
4.3.5.3 For each stage of submittal, the Contractor shall prepare a Submission Review
Request (SRR) carrying the date of submission, the submission reference number as
defined in clause 4.3.2.(4) above, the submission title, the stage of submission , and
the authorised signature of the Contractor’s responsible engineer in the format shown
in APPENDIX 3 of this Specification, to confirm that, in the opinion of the
Contractor, the submission:
(1) complies with all relevant requirements of the Specification;
(2) conforms to all interface requirements;
(3) contains, or is based on auditable and proven or verified calculations. ;
(4) has been properly reviewed by the Contractor, according to the

Contractor’s QA system, to confirm its completeness, accuracy,
adequacy and validity; and
(5) has taken account of all requirements for approval by statutory bodies or
similar organisations, and that where required, such approvals have
been granted.
4.3.5.4 The Employer’s Representative’s response to the submission will normally be made
within 30 calendar days of receipt of the submission, provided that the submission is
made no later than the date shown on the Submissions Programme described in
clause 2.5 above. The Employer’s Representative may extend the review period
depending on the amount of documentation accompanying the submission.
4.3.5.5 The Contractor shall record all of the Employer’s Representative’s observations and
any agreed actions resulting from the Employer’s Representative’s review meeting
and shall address each of these fully before submission of the respective documents
for formal review.
4.3.5.6 If, in the Employer’s Representative’s opinion, following receipt of a submission there
is benefit to be gained from a meeting with the Contractor to clarify or discuss any of
the contents of the submission, he will notify the Contractor accordingly with not less
than 5 days advance notice, and the Contractor shall attend at the time and place
appointed by the Employer’s Representative.
4.3.5.7 No submission may be made by the Contractor in respect of the Works or any sub-
system, part or Section thereof unless a notice of no objection has been received for
the previous stage of the same Works or any sub-system, part or Section thereof.
4.3.6 Employer’s Representative’s Response
Page GS 3-3 of 5
Draft No. DFA/3337
4.3.6.1 The Employer’s Representative will respond in one of the following three ways:
(1) “ Reviewed without Objection”
(2) “Reviewed without Objection, Subject to”
(3) “Rejected”
4.3.6.2 If the Employer’s Representative, having reviewed the submission, has not
discovered any non-compliance with the Contract, the SRR will be returned endorsed
with the Employer’s Representative’s signature and the words “Reviewed without
Objection”. Receipt of such notice of no objection does not in any way imply the
Employer’s Representative’s approval of the submission, nor does it remove any
responsibility from the Contractor for complying with the Contract. Issue of a “Notice
of No Objection” entitles the Contractor to proceed to the next stage of the
programme of work.
4.3.6.3 If the Employer’s Representative discovers minor non-compliance, discrepancies,
omissions, etc. that, in his opinion, are not of a fundamental nature, he may return the
SRR endorsed with the Employer’s Representative’s signature and the words
“Reviewed without Objection Subject to”, and including a list of the features that are
required to be amended, included or improved to comply with the Contract. Issue of a
“Notice of No Objection Subject to” entitles the Contractor to proceed to the next
stage of the programme of work provided that all of the Employer’s Representative’s
comments are taken into account fully and implemented exactly.
4.3.6.4 If the Employer’s Representative issues a “Notice of No Objection Subject to”, the
Contractor shall resubmit the affected parts of the submission, clearly demonstrating
how the Employer’s Representative’s comments have been taken into account and
resubmit amended or corrected material within 10 working days of issue of the
Employer’s Representative’s comments, using the process described in clause 4.3.5
above.
4.3.6.5 If the Employer’s Representative discovers major non-compliance, discrepancies,
omissions, etc. that, in his opinion, are of a fundamental nature, he may return the
SRR endorsed with the Employer’s Representative’s signature and the word
“Rejected”, and including a list of the features that are required to be amended,
included or improved to comply with the Contract. Issue of a “Notice of Rejection”
does not entitle the Contractor to proceed to the next stage of the programme of work
until all of the Employer’s Representative’s comments are fully taken into account and
a satisfactory re-submission has been made (i.e. one which results in a “Notice of No
Objection” or “Notice of No Objection Subject to”).
4.3.6.6 If the Employer’s Representative issues a “Notice of Rejection”, the Contractor shall
resubmit the complete submission, clearly demonstrating how the Employer’s
Representative’s comments have been taken into account and resubmit amended or
corrected material within 10 working days of issue of the Employer’s Representative’s
comments, using the process described in clause 4.3.5 above.
4.4 Records
4.4.1 The Contractor shall establish and maintain a place for the storage and archiving of all
the documents relating to the Works and not required to be submitted to the
Employer’s Representative under clause 4.1 above which shall be:
(1) the same place or office where the Contractor is performing the work and
storing documents reviewed by the Employer’s Representative, or;
(2) at the Site or elsewhere in Delhi, a records office, which contains all
other, documents that the Contractor is required to maintain in
accordance with the Contract.
Page GS 3-4 of 5
Draft No. DFA/3337
4.4.2 All documents shall be filed, indexed and suitably stored to permit easy identification
and necessary audits.
4.4.3 The Contractor shall maintain in Delhi his archive of all documents in connection with
and arising out of the Contract, until 28 days after the issue of the Final Certificate or
until final settlement of all Disputes, whichever is later.
4.5 Implementation of BIM (Building Information Modelling)
(i) The Contractor shall implement BIM system for executing and delivering the services set out in
this Agreement. Building Information Modelling (BIM) uses computing power and systems to
create 3D models of all kind of buildings and infrastructure, with information about its design,
operation and current condition. At the planning and design stage it enables designers, owners
and users to work together to produce the best possible designs and to test them virtually
before they are constructed. During construction, it enables DMRCs, contractors and suppliers
to integrate all components cutting out waste and reducing the risk of errors. In operation, it
provides users with real-time information about available services and facility managers with
accurate assessments of the condition of assets.

(ii) All services designs/design verification shall be done using BIM modelling. The Contractor
shall implement the necessary hardware, software and human resources towards this end. 3D
Coordination between all disciplines shall be achieved by incorporating them in a single model.

(iii) Contractor shall be required to produce, update and present to DMRC on a fortnightly basis an
integrated 3D BIM model incorporating all the services and system wide requirements under
the scope of Contract, in design review meetings. These models shall be 3D rendered and
shall help in design visualization and clash detection of elements as well as finalization of
design.
In addition, Contractor shall also provide following individual models: -  
1. Tunnel Services Modelling

2. Clash Detection
3. Quantity take-off from BIM model
4. Visualization and Animated Walkthrough

(iv) Final coordinated Working Reference drawings of all disciplines shall only be generated from
the BIM model.

(v) The Contractor shall develop “As build” BIM Model upto LOD 500 level and submit the same
to DMRC at the time of completion of the project. Schedule of BIM implementation Plan and
standards to be adhered to, shall be provided after award of contract.

(vi) Implementation of software-based billing & labour Management system.
* End of Chapter *
Page GS 3-5 of 5
Draft No. DFA/3337
Draft No. DFA/3337
CHAPTER 5
5. QUALITY MANAGEMENT
5.1 Introduction
5.1.1 The Contractor shall maintain and implement a Quality Management System that
shall remain in effect during the execution of the Works. The Contractor’s Quality
Management System shall be based on the International Standard ISO 9001:2015
“Model for quality assurance in design, development, production, installation and
servicing.” The Contractor shall submit its Quality Management System
documentation for the Employer’s Representative’s review as specified in this
Chapter.
The Quality Management System documentation shall include, but shall not be limited
to the following:
(1) quality manual;
(2) quality procedures, work instructions & Method Statements;
(3) quality plans; and
(4) inspection and test plans.
5.1.2 The Contractor shall plan, perform and record all quality control activities to ensure
that all work is performed in accordance with the requirements of the Contract and is
detailed in the quality plans which are required under this Chapter. Such activities
shall include, without limitation, the inspections and/or tests expressly or implicitly
required by the Contract.
5.1.3 Without prejudice to such requirements, the Employer’s Representative may from
time to time instruct the Contractor in relation to such further or other inspections
and/or tests as are in his opinion appropriate.
5.1.4 Quality audits will be conducted by the Employer’s Representative to verify the
Contractor’s implementation and compliance with the quality management system as
specified herein.
5.2 General Requirements

5.2.1 All quality system documents and plans to be submitted shall embrace all activities of
the Contractor and sub-contractors of any tier, including its suppliers.
5.2.2 Quality Plans

5.2.2.1 The quality plans to be submitted by the Contractor shall comprise of:
(1) a Management Quality Plan, for the control of all management related
activities;
(2) Deleted;
(3) Manufacturing Quality Plan and Site Quality Plan, for the control of
activities within each category of work or discrete element of
procurement, manufacturing, delivery, construction and installation of the
Works, including Temporary Works.
Page GS 4-1 of 7
Draft No. DFA/3337
5.2.3 Within 30 days of the Commencement Date of the Works, the Contractor shall submit
for review by the Employer’s Representative:
(1) a quality manual;
(2) the quality system procedures and any associated system instructions
and/or forms which he proposes to use for the Works; and
(3) Deleted
5.2.4 The Contractor shall submit separate Manufacturing Quality Plan and Site Quality
Plan covering all elements of the Works. These shall be in accordance with the
specific requirements of this Chapter and shall be submitted to the Employer’s
Representative for review 60 days prior to the commencement of the manufacturing
and construction works covered by the quality plans. In addition, the Contractor shall
prepare inspection and test plans for the management and control of the inspection
and/or testing by the Contractor of the Works identified in each quality plan.
5.2.5 The Contractor shall promptly supply the Employer’s Representative with two (2)
controlled copies of his quality manual, quality plans, inspection and test plans and
related procedures/instructions/forms upon such documents being reviewed without
objection by the Employer’s Representative. The Contractor shall maintain such
controlled documents throughout the duration of the Contract. For any amendment to
quality system documentation, the Contractor shall as soon as reasonably practicable
prepare and submit the proposed amendment for review by the Employer’s
Representative. In addition, the Employer’s Representative may request further
copies of the quality system documents and these documents shall reach the
Employer’s Representative’s office within fourteen (14) days of notification.
5.2.6 The Contractor shall appoint (a) suitably qualified and experienced person(s) as
Quality Manager(s), who shall be directly responsible to senior management level and
is able to discharge his duties without hindrance or constraint, and provide such other
resources as may be required to ensure effective implementation of the Quality
Management System and all quality plans. Details of the qualifications, experience,
authority and responsibility of the proposed Quality Manager(s) shall be submitted for
review by the Employer’s Representative within 30 days of the Commencement Date
of the Works.
5.2.7 During the Contract period, upon receipt of a Corrective Action Request (CAR) or
similar document issued by the Employer’s Representative as a result of quality
audits, the Contractor shall submit a proposed corrective and preventive action plan
within 14 days to the Employer’s Representative for review.
5.3 Management Quality Plan

5.3.1 The Management Quality Plan shall define the Contractor's management structure for
the execution of the Works and for the control of the quality of the Works and shall,
without limitation, define:
(1) 5.3.1.1 the appointment of a Quality Manager in accordance with clause
5.2.6 above;
(2) 5.3.1.2 the organisation of the Contractor’s managerial staff with

particular reference to any joint venture partners and main sub-
contractors. An organisation chart shall be produced to illustrate the
sub-division of the Works into elements for effective technical and
managerial control, the reporting structure and the interface relationship
between all parties involved;
(3) 5.3.1.3 the hierarchy of the overall quality management system

documentation to be applied to the Works;
Page GS 4-2 of 7
Draft No. DFA/3337
(4) 5.3.1.4 the quality management system of the Contractor in monitoring

and controlling sub-contractors and suppliers; and
(5) 5.3.1.5 the list of quality system procedures and work instructions to be
applied to manage the quality of the Works.
5.4 Not used
5.5 Site Quality Plan

5.5.1 The Contractor shall prepare a Site Quality Plan for its construction and installation
works. The Site Quality Plan shall, without limitation, define:
(1) the organisation of the Contractor’s staff directly responsible for the day-
to-day management of the construction and installation activities on or off
the Site;
(2) the specific allocations of responsibilities and authorities given to

identified personnel or sub-contractors for particular construction and
installation work;
(3) the hierarchy of quality management system documentation for

managing and controlling construction and installation works, including
construction and installation works of sub-contractors of any tier; and
(4) the list of procedures and instructions to be applied to manage and

control the construction and installation works together with the
procedures and instructions that have not been previously submitted for
review.
5.5.2 The Contractor shall also prepare inspection and test plans to manage and control
any test and inspection activities in accordance with clause 5.6.1 below.
5.6 Inspection and Test Plans, Records and Reports

5.6.1 Inspection and test plans shall be produced for every activity requiring test and/or
inspection. Each inspection and test plan shall identify the quality objectives and
include, without limitation:
(1) the personnel responsible for undertaking and certifying the inspection
and/or test;
(2) the procedure or instructions for the inspection and/or test;
(3) the test method or a reference to the relevant standard of testing;
(4) the inspection and/or test required prior to commencement of an activity;
(5) the inspection and/or test during an activity and its frequency;
(6) the inspection and/or test required to complete an activity;
(7) all Quality Control Points, Quality Hold Points and any notices or other
documents to be given to the Employer’s Representative in relation to
Quality Control Points and Quality Hold Points;
(8) the compliance criteria;
(9) the method of analysis of test data;
Page GS 4-3 of 7
Draft No. DFA/3337
(10) the procedure for correction or disposal of any work which fails the
compliance criteria;
(11) examples of the documentation to be used for reporting the results of

inspections, tests and analysis of test data;
(12) examples of the documentation to be used for recording the status of

inspections and tests in accordance with clause 5.8.1 below; and
(13) the procedure for the distribution, filing and storage of inspection reports,
test reports and reports on analysis of test data.
5.6.2 Each report of the inspection and/or test shall be prepared in accordance with clause
9.6.6.1 below.
5.6.3 The Contractor shall ensure that a signed copy of each report of inspection and test is
filed in his filing system within 3 (three) working days of the date of inspection and
test.
5.6.4 In relation to all Quality Control Points and Quality Hold Points involving inspection
and/or test by the Contractor, the Contractor shall give the Employer’s Representative
notice of when the relevant work will be inspected and/or tested in accordance with
clause9.8.1 below.
5.7 Review, Verification & Audit

5.7.1 The Contractor shall continuously monitor the performance of each quality plan
related to the execution of the Works and shall include in each Monthly Quality Report
the status of all quality system documentation, an up-to-date audit schedule and
status and an up-to-date non-conformity register providing the status of all non-
conformities identified by the Employer’s Representative and the Contractor. The
Contractor shall make an appraisal of such performance and identify in particular any
non-conformities or other shortcomings in the quality management system, the
actions being taken to dispose of these non-conformities, any necessary corrective
action taken or proposed to be taken to prevent the re-occurrence of these non-
conformities or shortcomings and, any other items as instructed by the Employer’s
Representative.
5.7.2 The Contractor shall ensure that audits of all the activities in each quality plan are
carried out at quarterly intervals, or at such other intervals as the Employer’s
Representative may require, to ensure the continuing suitability and effectiveness of
the quality management system. Reports of each such audit shall be submitted
promptly for review by the Employer’s Representative.
5.7.3 The Contractor shall ensure that the requirements for supervision and verification of
work by the Contractor and/or his sub-contractors of any tiers are identified in the
quality plans and adequate resources and trained personnel are provided for these
activities.
5.7.4 The Contractor shall submit for review by the Employer’s Representative details of the
authority, qualifications and experience of personnel assigned to review , verification
and to audit activities.
5.7.5 The Employer’s Representative may, by notice to the Contractor, require external
audits of the Contractor's quality management system to be carried out either by the
Employer's staff or by his representative. In such case, the Contractor shall afford to
such auditors all necessary facilities and access to the records to permit this function
to be performed.
Page GS 4-4 of 7
Draft No. DFA/3337
5.8 Quality Control Register

5.8.1 The Contractor shall provide and maintain at all stages of the Works a quality control
register or registers to identify the status of inspections, sampling and testing of the
work and all certificates. Such registers shall be updated by the Contractor to show
all activities in previous months and shall reach the Employer’s Representative’s
th
office before the 7 working day of each month. Each register shall:
(1) list the certificates received for each batch of goods and materials
incorporated in the Works and compare this against the certification
required by the Contract and the Contractor’s quality plans;
(2) list the inspection and testing activities undertaken by the Contractor on
each element of the Works and compare these activities against the
amount of inspection and testing required by the Contract and the
Contractor’s quality plans;
(3) show the results of each report of inspection and/or test and any required
analysis of these results and compare these results against the pass/fail
criteria; and
(4) summarize any actions proposed by the Contractor to overcome any

non-conformity identified in clauses 5.8.1.(1),(2) & (3) above.
5.9 Summaries of Inspection and/or Test

The Contractor shall submit to the Employer’s Representative for his information
summaries based on quality control register in accordance with the Summaries of
Inspection and/or Test described in clause 9.6.11 below.
5.10 Notification of Non-conformities

5.10.1 If, prior to the issue of the Taking Over Certificate for the Works or the relevant
Section, the Contractor has used or proposes to use or repair any item of the Works
which does not conform to the requirements of the Contract, he shall immediately
submit to the Employer’s Representative such proposal, supplying full particulars of
the non-conformity and, if appropriate, of the proposed means of repair which shall
include any calculation analysis or other documentation to support the repair or
acceptability of the non-conformity.
5.10.2 If the Employer’s Representative issues non-conformity reports or similar documents

to notify the Contractor of any item of the Works which he considers to constitute a
non-conformity and which has not been reported in accordance with clause 5.10.1
above, the Contractor shall promptly investigate the matter and, within 14 days of
notification by the Employer’s Representative, submit to the Employer’s
Representative for review the remedial measures to be taken and stating the reasons
for such measures.
5.11 Monthly Quality Report
The contractor shall submit the Monthly Quality Report as specified Clause 5.7.1
above. MQR would contain but not be limited to:
5.11.1 Status of Approval of Method Statements, Check-Lists & Test Procedures: The
contractor shall submit and get approved Method Statements for all site activities from
the engineer. Method Statements shall be as per Clause 3.6.1.3 above. The method
statements are to be prepared for execution of each and every item including
temporary works and shall be submitted and approved atleast 4 weeks before
execution of the works. All method statements shall conform to Specifications of the
Page GS 4-5 of 7
Draft No. DFA/3337
contract. Engineer may, if so desired, call for a mock-up demonstration of critical

works as per proposed method statement for its review.
The contractor shall keep up to date the status of submission/approval of all Method
Statements, Check-lists and Test procedure and submit statement duly indicating the
same in each MQR.
5.11.2 Quality Walks:It is of utmost importance to keep a check on the quality of works at
site to identify any quality issues, deviations from specification, procedures laid down
in approved method statements etc. Quality walks shall be conducted twice a week at
each work site jointly by Employer’s representative, Contractor’s quality manager &
Contractor’s site representative. All deviations/non-conformity noticed/observed in any
item of the Works shall be recorded and joint report prepared, the Contractor shall
promptly investigate the matter and, within 7 days of notification by the Employer’s
Representative, submit to the Employer’s Representative for review the remedial
measures to be taken and stating the reasons for such measures. Details of all
deviations/non-conformity noticed shall be compiled and reported in the MQR along
with status of closure of deviations/non-conformity.
5.11.3 Internal Quality Audit (IQA):The contractor shall conduct Internal Quality Audit (IQA)
at each site every month during the currency of the contract. The Internal Audit shall
be conducted by Contractor’s HQ team which shall be independent of the site team.
Report of IQA shall be submitted to the employer each month along with MQR.
5.11.4 External Quality Audit (EQA): The contractor shall get conducted External Quality
Audit (IQA) at each site on half-yearly basis during the currency of the contract
starting from the actual commencement of works at site. The External Audit shall be
rd
conducted by reputed independent 3 Party auditors who have proven track record
for conducting such Audits. Details of External Auditor shall be submitted to DMRC for
approval, decision of Engineer in terms of appointment of External Auditor shall be
final and binding. Report of EQA shall be submitted to the employer on half yearly
basis along with MQR.
5.11.5 Calibration of Test Equipment: The contractor shall make assessment of all Test
Equipment required for carrying out all quality checks and testing at site. The
contractor shall submit a list of all Test equipment to be made available at site during
the project. The engineer may at his discretion advice regarding availability of any
additional Test Equipment which shall be promptly arranged by the contractor. Sets of
Test Equipment shall be kept at each site. All test equipment shall be kept calibrated
by accredited calibration agencies at all times. Status of test equipment along with
calibration details shall be submitted along with each MQR.
5.11.6 External Testing of Samples: DMRC may get samples of material received at site
rd
tested at 3 Party accredited labs. Cost of Testing & Samples in case of failure of
samples sent from site shall be recovered from the contractor. In case of passing of
samples the cost of samples and testing shall be borne by DMRC. The samples shall
be collected jointly in presence of DMRC &Contractor’s representative.
Status of samples collected, test results, action taken etc. shall be kept up to date and
submitted along with each MQR.
5.11.7 Status of Plant & Machinery: The contractor shall submit details of Plant and
Machinery deployed at site along with status of their fitness certificates along with
each MQR. The competency details of operator of plant and machinery shall also be
submitted by contractor for Employer’s review and approval in MQR.
Page GS 4-6 of 7
Draft No. DFA/3337
5.11.8 NCNs (Non-Conformity Notice) of Quality issued by DMRC and NCRs (Non-
Conformity Report) of quality raised by the contractor: All Non-Conformity
Notices or Reports raised during Internal Quality Audit, External Quality Audit, Quality
Walks, Site Visits etc. shall be compiled and their status shall be reported in each
Monthly Quality Report.
5.11.9 In case the Contractor is not able to complete the Non-Conformity within reasonable
time frame, the employer reserves the right to get the work done at the risk and cost
of contractor or recover the cost of the Non- conformity as assessed by the Engineer.
* End of Chapter *
Page GS 4-7 of 7
Draft No. DFA/3337
Page GS 4-8 of 7
Draft No. DFA/3337
CHAPTER 6
6. SOFTWARE MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL

6.1 Prescriptive Framework
All software to be developed or modified (re-engineered software) shall follow the
normative requirements of EN50128 (Railway Applications: Software for Railway
Control and Protection Systems). The Software shall be designed, developed and
tested according to the Software Quality assurance Plan, Software Integrity Level
(SIL) and the Software Lifecycle. The Contractor shall define within the Software
Quality Assurance Plan what techniques and measures are to be applied for software
development. In addition to the requirements of the Software Quality Assurance Plan,
justification, which shall be reviewed without objection by the Employer’s
Representative, shall be required in respect of any highly recommended EN50128
Annex A normative clauses which are not to be applied to software development and
supply.
6.2 Software Framework

As defined in EN50128, all software produced or supplied for the project shall be
subject to a defined quality framework. The Contractor shall use a Quality Assurance
System which is compliant with CENELEC specifications, with EN29000 series and
others and meet the requirements as stipulated in the PS. ISO 9000-3 is considered
appropriate for Safety Integrity Level 0 or 1 software.
6.3 All Control & Monitoring Software has to be provided to the Employer in the following
formats
i) Source Code
II) Detailed Programme With explanation of key functions, protection schemes
and safety requirement.
III) System description and layout module wise.
IV) Troubleshooting of hardware & software including that in communication with
SCADA.
6.4 System should generate non- conformity statements with classification of severity of
the non-conformity. The daily reports should be updated.
6.4.1 The contractor/OEM shall ensure full support to the Employer or Engineer for all
Computer programs/softwares provided by the Contractor under the contract. The
Contractor/OEM shall be liable for upgrading the supplied software as a part of the
permanent works to the latest version, if the supplied software become obsolete/non-
compatible due to upgradation of operating system/hardware/firmware, Contractor
has to upgrade his supplied software accordingly to match the compatibility
throughout the design life of the system/software. However, the new version of
software must be fully tested and shall not result in any non-conformance with the
specifications, or degrade the operation of the system.
6.4.2 Sufficient software documentation shall be provided to give the Engineer a full
understanding of the software function and operation. Documentation shall be
complete, yet clear and concise, and include all modifications up to final acceptance.
Documentation shall include software block diagram showing signal flow, logic and
hardware interfaces. A top-level flow diagram and description of detailed operation
shall be provided.
6.4.3 The Contractor shall submit a software support plan at least 90 days before
commencement of software installation. This plan shall require the Contractor to
Page GS 5-1 of 2
Draft No. DFA/3337
provide all changes, bug fixes, updates, modifications, amendments, and new
versions of the program as required by the Engineer.
6.4.4 The Contractor shall provide all tools, equipment, manuals and training necessary for
the Employer / Engineer to maintain and re-configure all the software provided under
the Contract.
6.5 This will form part of the submittals.
* End of Chapter *
Page GS 5-2 of 2
Draft No. DFA/3337
CHAPTER 7
7. MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

7.1 Materials and Equipment Provided by the Employer
7.1.1 Materials and equipment which are to be provided by the Employer will be as stated in
the Contract.
7.1.2 Materials and equipment provided by the Employer shall be collected by the
Contractor from the locations stated in the Contract and delivered by the Contractor to
the Site. The Contractor shall inspect the materials and equipment before taking
receipt and shall immediately inform the Employer’s Representative of any shortage
or damage.
7.1.3 Materials or equipment provided by the Employer which are damaged after collection
shall be repaired by the Contractor and submitted to the Employer’s Representative
for review. Materials or equipment which are lost or which in the opinion of the
Employer’s Representative are not capable of being or have not been repaired
satisfactorily shall be replaced by the Contractor.
7.1.4 The Contractor shall dispose of crates and containers for materials or equipment
provided by the Employer.
7.1.5 Equipment / materials provided by the Employer, surplus to the requirements of the
Works shall be returned to the locations stated in the Contract.
7.1.6 The Contractor shall protect and maintain equipment provided by the Employer while
it is on the Site and shall provide operatives, fuel and other consumables required to
operate the equipment.
7.2 Materials
7.2.1 General
7.2.1.1 Materials for inclusion in the Permanent Works shall be new unless otherwise stated
in the Contract or having been reviewed without objection by the Employer’s
Representative.
7.2.1.2 Certificates of tests by manufacturers, which are submitted to the Employer’s
Representative, shall relate to the material delivered to the Site. Certified true copies
of certificates may be submitted if the original certificates cannot be obtained from the
manufacturer. A letter from the supplier stating that the certificates relate to the
material delivered to the Site shall be submitted with the certificates.
7.2.1.3 Materials, which are specified by means of trade or proprietary names, may be
substituted by materials from a different manufacturer, provided that the materials are
of the same or better quality and comply with the specified requirements and have
been reviewed without objection by the Employer’s Representative.
7.2.1.4 In addition to any special provisions in the Contract for the sampling and testing of
materials, the Contractor shall submit samples of all materials and goods which it
propose to use or employ in or for the Works. Such samples, if having been reviewed
without objection, shall be retained by the Employer’s Representative and shall not be
returned to the Contractor or used in the Permanent Works unless reviewed by the
Employer’s Representative. No materials or goods of which samples have been
submitted shall be used in the Works unless and until the Employer’s Representative
shall have reviewed such samples without objection.
7.2.1.5 The Employer’s Representative may reject any materials and goods which in his opinion
are inferior to the samples previously reviewed and the Contractor shall promptly remove
such materials and goods from the Site.
7.2.1.6 If any material required for this Contract is not available in metric specifications from any
known sources, at the time the material is required for the Contract, the Employer’s
Representative may, upon application from the Contractor, give permission to the use of
an equivalent material in imperial specifications as a substitute, provided that:
Page GS 6-1 of 5
Draft No. DFA/3337
(1) no statutory specification shall be altered except in accordance with

relevant legal provision, if any;
(2) the Employer’s Representative is satisfied that the Contractor has
made every reasonable effort to obtain the material in metric
specifications;
(3) in the opinion of the Employer’s Representative, the substitute material
is suitable for the Works in all respects;
(4) in the opinion of the Employer’s Representative, the substitute material
complies with all the specifications for the material substituted,
allowing minor discrepancies between the specified metric
measurements and the corresponding imperial measurements of the
substitute, provided that such discrepancies can be effectively and
satisfactorily compensated for by the provision of extra quantity of the
material; and
(5) the Contractor shall be responsible for all extra quantities of the
material required for meeting specification requirements of the Works
due to the use of the substitute.
7.2.1.7 Hardwood shall not be used for Site Hoardings, shoring of trenches and pits, false
work or form work.
7.2.2 Notice of place of manufacture and/or source of supply
The Contractor shall notify the Employer’s Representative of the places of
manufacture and/or the source of supply of all goods and materials previously
reviewed without objection by the Employer’s Representative to be incorporated into
the Permanent Works. The Contractor shall give reasonable notice (which shall not in
any event be less than 56 days) to the Employer’s Representative before the start of
any manufacturing and/or the supply of goods and materials.
7.2.3 Certificates for Manufactured Goods or Materials
The Contractor shall obtain certificates for each batch of goods and materials
incorporated into the Permanent Works. Each certificate shall certify that the
materials comply with the requirements of the Contract and shall include all reports of
inspections and/or tests carried out at the place of manufacture.
7.3 Equipment
7.3.1 Identification labels
7.3.1.1 Each and every individual item of equipment forming part of the Permanent Works
shall be fitted with permanent identification labels in accordance with a system based
on the contract identification. In this respect, the term “individual item of equipment”
refers to a complete assembly of components and to each removable sub-module
within the complete assembly.
7.3.1.2 The proposed labelling system shall be submitted for review by the Employer’s
Representative at least 3 months before the scheduled date for the shipment of the
first item of equipment to site.
7.3.1.3 The identification label shall be permanently attached in such a way that it shall not
become detached or illegible during the lifetime of the system from any cause
including wear and tear, environmental effects (such as rain, direct sunlight, etc.) or
any other influence. Preference shall be given to embossed or engraved metallic
labels mechanically fastened by riveting or similar means to the item to which they
refer.
7.3.1.4 All labels shall be easily cleaned to remove dirt and debris (including grease and oil)
without disturbing the legibility properties.
7.3.1.5 All labels shall incorporate the inscription “Property of D.M.R.C”.
7.4 Electronic Control Racks & Cabinets

7.4.1 Racks & Cabinets
Page GS 6-2 of 5
Draft No. DFA/3337
7.4.1.1 Electronic control equipment shall be housed in racks suitably enclosed in metal
cabinets.
7.4.1.2 The equipment shall be of modular construction to facilitate maintenance, repair and
replacement of parts. Standard commercial parts shall be utilised to the maximum
extent possible.
7.4.1.3 Cubicles, Equipment Racks, cable and wiring Termination Racks shall not be filled to
greater than 80% of their capacity at the completion of the works.
7.4.1.4 Deleted
7.4.1.5 The equipment shall be suitable for the environment in which it is to be used and it
shall be to prevent ingress of all vermin and to minimise the ingress of moisture, dust
and dirt.
7.4.1.6 Unless otherwise specified in PS , indoor equipments shall have a minimum IP
rating of IP54 and out door equipment shall have IP rating of IP 65 under IEC
529.
7.4.1.7 No item of equipment, which is removable, as part of routine maintenance procedures
shall be mounted at more than 2.0m above floor level.
7.4.2 Cables
7.4.2.1 No joints or splices shall be permitted in cables or wires except at recognised
termination points unless specifically approved by engineer incharge.
7.4.2.2 Not used
7.4.2.3 All cable cores shall be terminated including all spare conductors.
7.4.2.4 Each cable core shall be uniquely numbered and identified with a label giving details
of the circuit carried.
7.4.2.5 Terminals carrying voltages exceeding 50 volts shall be uniquely identified and
protected against accidental contact by persons, test equipment or other unintended
physical contact. Similarly, all bus bars shall be suitably identified and protected.
* End of Chapter *
Page GS 6-3 of 5
Draft No. DFA/3337
Page GS 6-4 of 5
Draft No. DFA/3337
CHAPTER 8
8. PACKAGING, STORAGE, SHIPPING AND DELIVERY

8.1 Storage of Equipment
8.1.1 The Contractor shall provide and maintain acceptable storage facilities for the
Permanent Works, equipment and materials of all kinds intended for use in carrying
out the Works or for incorporation into the Works.
8.1.2 The Contractor shall prepare, protect and store in an agreed manner all Permanent
Works, Contractor’s Equipment, equipment and materials so as to safeguard them
against loss or damage from repeated handling, from climatic influences and from all
other hazards arising during shipment or storage on or off the Site.
8.1.3 Secure and covered storage shall be provided by the Contractor for all Permanent
Works, Contractor’s Equipment, equipment and materials which are other than those
having been reviewed without objection by the Employer’s Representative as suitable
for open storage.
8.2 Crating
8.2.1 Deleted
8.3 General Precautions

8.3.1 Spare parts shall be tropicalised in their packing for prolonged storage in accordance
with BS 1133 or other equivalent International /Indian standard and shall be suitably
and individually labelled to indicate:
(1) shelf life and date of manufacture;
(2) type or condition(s) of storage and special handling information;
(3) description of item and relevant part number;
(4) serial number, if applicable;
(5) inspection/test certificate number and batch number; and
(6) Contract number, variation order number and item number.
8.3.2 Deleted
8.3.3 Deleted
8.3.4 Deleted
8.3.5 Deleted
8.3.6 Appropriate precautions in accordance with the Contractor’s safety regulations, the
regulations of the Employer, and statutory regulations shall be taken in respect of all
hazardous, toxic, inflammable, etc. materials.
Page GS 7-1 of 3
Draft No. DFA/3337
8.4 Packaging Procedures

8.4.1 All required inspection/test certificates shall be supplied and packed together with
individual material. All packaging materials and procedures shall be subject to review
by the Employer’s Representative.
8.4.2 All empty cases, crates or packages, whether or not returnable, shall be removed
from the Site by the Contractor or stored by the Contractor in such a way that they do
not interfere with the progress of the works of Project Contractors.
8.5 Shipping
8.5.1 The Contractor shall notify the Employer’s Representative ten days in advance of any
expected shipment date and give further notification of the actual shipment date and
routing when such information is subsequently established. This shall complement
the inspection requirements prior to delivery as specified herein.
8.5.2 Two copies of packing lists and quality certificates shall be attached to each case or
package to be shipped. One copy shall be placed inside the package and the second
copy shall be enclosed in a watertight enclosure on the outside of each case or
package. A copy of packing lists and quality certificates shall be sent to the
Employer’s Representative after each package of the Works, the equipment, spare
parts and other items to be shipped have been shipped.
8.5.3 Without prejudice to any other provisions of the Contract, the Contractor shall be
responsible for all legal requirements, duties, dues, taxes and other such
requirements and expenditures required for the importation of the Works, the
equipment, spare parts and other items to be supplied under the Contract into Delhi.
8.5.4 The Contractor shall clear the Works, the equipment, spare parts and other items to
be supplied under the Contract through Delhi customs/Indian sea port in accordance
with all Government of India Enactments.
8.6 Delivery
8.6.1 The Contractor shall deliver the Works and all items to be supplied under the Contract
to the Site.
8.6.2 The Contractor shall unload the Works and all items to be supplied under the Contract
at the designated delivery point and positioning or storing them.
8.6.3 Any part of the Works or any item to be supplied under the Contract that is damaged
in transit shall not be considered as delivered until repairs or replacements have been
made and all necessary spare parts or items have been delivered to the Site.
8.6.4 All documents, manuals, drawings and other deliverables shall be delivered to an
address in Delhi to be designated by the Employer’s Representative in writing.
8.6.5 The Contractor shall store and secure the Works, equipment, spare parts and other
items until the same have been inspected and are considered delivered at the
designated point by the Employer’s Representative.
8.6.6 The Contractor shall remove temporary fittings required for shipment and re-assembly
of equipment and shall complete this prior to the equipment or parts thereof being
inspected and before they are considered delivered.
8.6.7 An item shall be considered delivered when all damage have been repaired and all
documentation and post delivery preparation have been completed to the satisfaction
of the Employer’s Representative.
Page GS 7-2 of 3
Draft No. DFA/3337
* End of Chapter *
Page GS 7-3 of 3
Draft No. DFA/3337
Draft No. DFA/3337
CHAPTER 9
9. TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

Testing and Commissioning shall comply with all the requirements of the GCC
supplemented, amplified, modified or superseded as applicable by this Specification
and the PS.
9.1 General
9.1.1 Deleted.
9.1.2 Deleted
9.1.3 Deleted.
9.1.4 The Employer and the Employer’s Representative will bear their own costs for
attendance at witnessed inspections or tests (other than re-tests) scheduled in
accordance with the agreed Works Programme and subject to notice in accordance
with the Specification.
9.2 Manufacturing Test Plan

9.2.1 The Manufacturing Test Plan is the Contractor’s plan for carrying out the necessary
procedures to ensure that the items presented for acceptance by the Employer and
the Employer’s Representative are in compliance with the requirements of the
Specification.
9.2.2 During the process of procurement and manufacture of the system components the
Contractor shall undertake such testing and inspection as is required by the Quality
Plan referred to in clause 5.6.
9.2.3 The Employer and the Employer’s Representative will not become involved in the
Contractor’s Manufacturing Tests except in respect of the following:
• Type Tests; and
• First Article Inspection.
9.2.4 Before shipment of any items to Site the Contractor shall present the items for the first
stage of Acceptance according to the Commissioning Plan as detailed in clause 9.3
below.
9.2.5 Inspection
9.2.5.1 The Contractor shall be wholly responsible for all inward inspection of items to be
incorporated into the system as a whole.
9.2.5.2 Equipment issued by the Employer shall not be subject to Type Tests or First Article
Inspection however the Contractor shall undertake Inspection as referenced in
clause 7.1 above. Should the Employer’s issued equipment be subsequently
incorporated into another manufactured item then the whole item shall be subject to
both Type Tests and First Article Inspection.
9.2.6 Type Tests

9.2.6.1 The Contractor must submit Type test reports of equipment / components as per the
relevant standard mentioned in the Contract.
Page GS 8-1R1 of 15
Draft No. DFA/3337
9.2.6.2 Deleted
9.2.6.3 Deleted
9.2.6.4 Where only some of the required tests have been carried out, the Employer’s
Representative may agree to selected type tests being carried out individually rather
than as part of a sequence.
9.2.6.5 Deleted
9.2.6.6 Deleted
9.2.6.7 For each test, the Employer’s Representative will determine whether the item under
test has passed or failed. In general, the test will be considered to have failed if either:
• The result of the test is not in accordance with the expected result described in
the test procedure, or
• The result of the test is in accordance with the expected result described in the
test procedure, but some other unexpected or unexplained event occurred
which the Employer’s Representative considers to be a fault.
9.2.6.8 If during Type Tests, any failure occurs or the equipment is changed, it shall be
reported to the Employer’s Representative who may, at his discretion, require
repetition of the previous tests at the Contractor's cost.
9.2.7 First Article Inspection

9.2.7.1 FAI shall be performed jointly by the Employer and the Employer’s Representative and
the Contractor on all major equipment items or sub-systems identified by the
Employer’s Representative.
9.2.7.2 Equipment shall be shipped from the point of manufacture only after a FAI has been
completed or the requirement waived in writing by the Employer’s Representative.
9.2.7.3 The Contractor shall provide a minimum of 15 working days notice to the Employer’s
Representative before any FAI.
9.2.7.4 At least 15 days prior to each FAI, the latest drawings, inspection and test procedures,
specifications and quality documentation required for adequate inspection of the
equipment under inspection shall be submitted to the Employer’s Representative. The
drawings shall be complete to the lowest level replaceable unit.
9.2.7.5 The Contractor shall ensure that he and his subcontractors are prepared for all FAIs.
The Contractor shall not schedule more than one FAI on the same day without prior
notice of No Objection by the Employer’s Representative.
9.2.7.6 Deleted
9.2.7.7 Deleted
9.2.7.8 The Contractor shall be responsible for the cost and scheduling, to the Employer and
the Employer’s Representative's convenience, of any repeat testing of items which fail
FAI.
9.2.8 Factory Acceptance Test

9.2.8.1 Before shipment all manufactured items or systems shall undergo FAT in accordance
with the requirements of the PS / TS.
9.3 Commissioning Plan

9.3.1 The Commissioning Plan is the Employer and the Employer’s Representative’s tool for
managing and co-ordinating the Testing, Commissioning, Training and Service Trial
activities. The Commissioning Plan will be divided into the following sub-plans:
(1) Factory Testing Plan ( see clause 3.5.1 above and PS / TS)
Page GS 8-2R1 of 15
Draft No. DFA/3337
(2) On-Site Testing and Commissioning Plan
9.3.2 Testing and Commissioning Phases

9.3.2.1 Testing and Commissioning activities shall be undertaken in the following phases:
(1) Factory Acceptance Test (which requirements are specified in clause 3.5.1
above);
(2) Installation Tests;
(3) Partial Acceptance Tests;
(4) System Acceptance Tests;
(5) Integrated Testing & Commissioning; and
(6) Service Trial.
9.3.2.2 Items (3), (4), (5) and (6) as required by the PS / TS constitute the Tests on
Completion referred to in the GCC.
9.4 On-Site Testing and Commissioning Plan

9.4.1 The Contractor shall prepare and submit for review by the Employer’s Representative
the Contractor’s On-Site Testing and Commissioning Plan detailing and explaining
how the Contractor will plan, perform and document all tests and inspections that will
be conducted to verify and validate the Works on Site. The On-Site Testing and
Commissioning Plan shall consist of a narrative description supported by graphics,
diagrams and tabulations as required.
9.4.2 The On-Site Testing and Commissioning Plan shall contain, but not be limited to, the
following topics:
(1) the Contractor’s strategy for testing and commissioning all constituent
parts of the Works and how this relates to the sequence of construction
and installation;
(2) Deleted
(3) the interdependency and interaction with other Contractors and their
commissioning programmes; the type and extent of testing and
commissioning to be undertaken and the parts of the Works to be proven
by that testing; the objective of each test, what particular operating criteria
the test or inspection will prove and how the success of the test will be
demonstrated or measured;
(4) Deleted
(5) the plan for the production and submission of the testing and
commissioning procedures to the Employer’s Representative for review
including the submission of the testing and commissioning reports and
records; and
(6) the On-Site Testing and Commissioning Plan shall be organised and
submitted in the stages described in clauses 9.3.2 above, 9.4.3 below &
9.4.7 below.
9.4.3 Installation Tests
Page GS 8-3R1 of 15
Draft No. DFA/3337
9.4.3.1 The Installation Tests phase is defined as being the final stage of assembly/installation
before the start of commissioning itself. The Installation Tests are to be performed by
the Contractor under the Contract and may be witnessed by the Employer or the
Employer’s Representative. During this phase, the Contractor shall perform static
testing of components and/or systems in preparation for Partial Acceptance Testing.
9.4.3.2 The particular requirements for Installation Tests are prescribed in the PS. Where
performance across interfaces to other Contractors or to other parties is required to be
verified, the Contractor shall liase with the interfacing party to co-ordinate the test
procedures and programme in the manner prescribed in clause 3.3.2 above.
9.4.3.3 The Contractor shall prepare three copies of a test report immediately after the
completion of each test whether or not witnessed by the Employer or the Employer’s
Representative. If the Employer or the Employer’s Representative has witnessed the
test, he will countersign the report to indicate his agreement to the information and
conclusions (i.e. whether or not the equipment being tested has passed satisfactorily)
contained therein. If the Employer or the Employer’s Representative has not
witnessed the test (i.e. if a written waiver has been granted), the Contractor shall
forward three copies of the test report without delay to the Employer’s Representative.
9.4.3.4 The Employer’s Representative will countersign the report to indicate his agreement to
the information and conclusions (i.e. whether or not the equipment being tested has
passed satisfactorily) and return one copy to the Contractor. Where the results of the
test do not meet the requirements of the Specification, the Employer or the Employer’s
Representative may call for a re-test.
9.4.3.5 Test equipment and instrumentation shall be subject to calibration test within a
properly controlled calibration scheme, and signed calibration certificates shall be
supplied to the Employer’s Representative in duplicate. Such calibration checks shall
be undertaken prior to testing and, if required by the Employer or the Employer’s
Representative, shall be repeated afterwards.
9.4.3.6 The Contractor shall submit to the Employer’s Representative a comprehensive
schedule of tests as required by the PS giving full details and procedures for each test
to be carried out under the Contract and including the pass / fail criteria (i.e. the
standards or limits to be achieved).
9.4.4 Partial Acceptance Tests

9.4.4.1 Partial Acceptance Tests are defined as the performance of functional tests of
sections, areas, or stages of a system. The Partial Acceptance Tests are part of the
Tests on Completion to be performed by the Contractor under the Contract in order to
achieve Employer’s Taking Over of the Works. During this phase, an energy source
shall be introduced to enable functional testing to be performed. On satisfactory
completion of the Partial Acceptance Tests, the tested items will be considered
available for Systems Acceptance Testing.
9.4.4.2 The particular requirements for Partial Acceptance Tests prescribed in the PS / TS are
indicative only.
9.4.4.3 The Contractor shall submit to the Employer’s Representative a comprehensive Partial
Acceptance Tests Plan including all requirements detailed in the PS / TS. The plan
shall be submitted on a logical section-by-section basis, using a “top-down” approach
describing the testing and commissioning strategies and processes clearly showing
how these serve to provide the full verification of the systems and equipment.
9.4.4.4 The Partial Acceptance Tests Plan shall identify a comprehensive list of specifications,
standards, method statements, procedures, pass/fail criteria, sample records,
resources to be made available, drawings and records to be submitted to the
Employer’s Representative, and a programme showing the dates for testing and for
submission of each test procedure.
9.4.4.5 Test procedures shall be carefully planned to ensure that the work can be executed in
the time available. If the available time is restricted, this planning shall include
contingency plans to be implemented if testing proceeds slower than anticipated or if
Page GS 8-4R1 of 15
Draft No. DFA/3337
defects are discovered that necessitate rectification and subsequent repeat testing,
etc.
9.4.4.6 If any working equipment is relocated or altered by the Contractor during the execution
of the Works, thorough re-testing shall be performed to verify that the equipment
remains fully functional and operates safely according to its specification. The testing
to be performed shall be no less rigorous than the procedures used for the original
testing and commissioning of the equipment.
9.4.4.7 The Contractor shall submit to the Employer’s Representative by the date laid down in
the PS / TS (or if none is given, no later than two months before the commencement of
the commissioning work whichever is earlier), 3 copies of its proposed Partial
Acceptance Tests records. The records shall be appropriately sub-divided to make
provision for the various parts of the systems and equipment covered by the Contract
and shall cover all tests (mechanical, electrical or otherwise), positive identification of
equipment, assemblies and sub-assemblies by serial number, drawing and
specification reference numbers (and issue reference) and any other data to be
certified by the Employer or the Employer’s Representative during the course of
commissioning.
9.4.4.8 The Contractor shall during the execution of the Works prepare such reports and
records of, manufacture, installation, erection and testing as may be required in order
that any relevant licences or approvals (including any statutory approvals) may be
issued or granted. Such records shall be adequate to enable the system or its
respective part to be commissioned and to meet the requirements of the licensing
authority or statutory body.
9.4.4.9 Immediately following the successful Partial Acceptance Testing of the system or any
constituent part, the Contractor shall complete the appropriate Partial Acceptance
Tests records in the agreed format and submit 3 signed copies to the Employer’s
Representative.
9.4.4.10 The Contractor shall include a complete schedule of all Partial Acceptance Tests
records and their current status within the Monthly Progress Report.
9.4.5 System Acceptance Tests

9.4.5.1 System Acceptance Tests are defined as the tests undertaken to demonstrate that the
Works in its entirety is capable of functioning in accordance with the specified
requirements in the Contract in all respects. The System Acceptance Tests are part of
the Tests on Completion to be performed by the Contractor under the Contract in order
to achieve Employer’s Taking Over of the Works. The System Acceptance Tests may
commence before remote operations capability (if any) is fully functional, however, the
system must be satisfactorily tested remotely (if specified to have such capability)
before the System Acceptance Tests can be considered to be completed. On
satisfactory completion of the System Acceptance Tests, the tested items will be
considered available for Integrated Testing & Commissioning.
9.4.5.2 The particular requirements for System Acceptance Tests are prescribed in the PS /
TS are indicative only.
System Acceptance Tests Plan including all requirements detailed in the PS / TS. The
plan shall be submitted on a section by section basis to demonstrate how the System
Acceptance Tests are to be carried out. The plan shall adopt a top down approach
and describe the system completion strategy and process.
9.4.5.4 System Acceptance Tests shall comprise comprehensive testing of the assembled
installation to ensure that it operates in accordance with the requirements of the PS /
TS.
9.4.5.5 The tests shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
(1) tests of all functional and performance requirements for the system;
Page GS 8-5R1 of 15
Draft No. DFA/3337
(2) tests of behaviour under failure conditions, e.g. changeover to redundant

hardware; initiation of re-configuration functions or reverse modes of
operation; and recovery of the equipment and system from failure.
9.4.5.6 The System Acceptance Test Plan shall identify a comprehensive list of specifications,
standards, method statements, procedures, pass / fail criteria, sample records,
resources to be made available, drawings and records to be submitted to the
Employer’s Representative, and programme showing the dates for testing and for
etc.
9.4.5.8 Immediately following the successful acceptance testing of the system, the Contractor
shall complete the appropriate commissioning records in the agreed format and submit
3 signed copies to the Employer’s Representative.
9.4.5.9 The Contractor shall include a complete schedule of all System Acceptance Test
records and their current status within the Monthly Progress Report.
9.4.6 Integrated Testing & Commissioning

9.4.6.1 Integrated Testing & Commissioning are defined as the final tests to be undertaken
before the commencement of Service Trial. The Integrated Testing & Commissioning
are part of the Tests on Completion to be performed by the Contractor under the
Contract in order to achieve Employer’s Taking Over of the Works. The Integrated
Testing & Commissioning shall demonstrate the full compatibility between all
interfacing systems. On satisfactory completion of the Integrated Testing &
Commissioning, the tested items will be considered available for Service Trial.
9.4.6.2 The particular requirements for Integrated Testing & Commissioning are prescribed in
the PS are indicative only.
Integrated Testing & Commissioning Plan as required by the PS. The plan shall be
submitted on a logical section-by-section basis, using a “top-down” approach
describing the testing and commissioning strategies and processes clearly showing
how these serve to provide the full verification of the systems and equipment in
context of the complete railway system.
9.4.6.4 The Contractor shall co-ordinate with the Employer and the Employer’s Representative
and with all interfacing parties to ensure that the proposed test programme and
schedule truly demonstrate that the full specified performance requirements are
achieved.
9.4.6.5 The tests shall include, but shall not be limited to the following:-
(1) test of all functional and performance requirements for the system;
(2) test to demonstrate compliance with all interface specifications; and
(3) test of behaviour under failure conditions (e.g. changeover to redundant

hardware, initiation of re-configuration functions or reversionary modes of
operation, recovery of systems and equipment from failure,
demonstrations of planned emergency procedures, etc.).
9.4.6.6 The Integrated Testing & Commissioning Plan shall identify a comprehensive list of
specifications, standards, method statements, procedures, pass/fail criteria, sample
records, resources to be made available, drawings and records to be submitted to the
Employer’s Representative, and a programme showing the dates for testing and for
Page GS 8-6R1 of 15
Draft No. DFA/3337
etc.
9.4.6.8 Immediately following the successful Integrated Testing & Commissioning of the
system or any constituent part, the Contractor shall complete the appropriate
commissioning records in the agreed format and submit 3 signed copies to the
9.4.6.9 The Contractor shall include a complete schedule of all Integrated Testing &
Commissioning records and their current status within the Monthly Progress Report.
9.4.7 Service Trial

9.4.7.1 Service Trial is defined as the final test of the fixed equipment, the rolling stock, and
the operational procedures including the final elements of the Tests on Completion to
demonstrate that the system in its entirety can operate satisfactorily. The Service Trial
is performed by the Employer with attendance by the Contractor under the Contract in
order to achieve Employer’s Taking Over of the Works. During this phase, the system
will be run to the published timetable but without fare-paying passengers. This phase
also allows for Validation of the training procedures in a real time environment.
9.4.7.2 The Commissioning Team in conjunction with the Employer will develop the Service
Trial Plan. Operations Department and will serve to organise and co-ordinate all on-
Site activities.
9.4.7.3 The particular requirements for tests to be undertaken during the Service Trial are
prescribed in the PS / TS.
9.4.7.4 The Contractor shall provide special and general attendance to the Employer and the
Employer’s Representative during the Service Trial period as required by the PS / TS.
9.4.7.5 The Contractor shall co-operate with the Employer and the Employer’s Representative
and with all interfacing parties to ensure that the proposed Service Trial programme
and schedule truly demonstrates that the full, specified performance requirements and
operating parameters are achieved.
9.4.7.6 The Contractor shall review and comment on the Employer’s Representative’s Service
Trial Plan and shall identify specifications, standards, method statements, procedures,
pass / fail criteria, to the Employer’s Representative for inclusion in the Plan.
9.4.7.7 The Contractor shall not interfere with the Service Trial tests and Validations in any
manner. Any need for remedial works required to be performed by the Contractor
shall be co-ordinated with the Employer and the Employer’s Representative in
advance.
9.4.7.8 Immediately following the successful tests of the system or any constituent part during
Service Trial the Contractor shall complete the appropriate commissioning records in
the agreed format, submit 3 signed copies to the Employer’s Representative and may
then apply for the Taking Over Certificate in accordance with the requirements of the
GCC.
9.4.7.9 The Contractor shall include a complete schedule of all Service Trial records and their
current status within the Monthly Progress Report.
9.5 Activity of the Employer and the Employer’s Representative

9.5.1 The Employer and the Employer’s Representative will establish a Commissioning
Team and a Site Co-ordination Team at appropriate stages of the Project. These
teams will comprise representatives of all interested parties including not more than
two representatives of the Contractor, subject to review by the Employer and the
Employer’s Representative. In accordance with the Commissioning Plan, the
Page GS 8-7R1 of 15
Draft No. DFA/3337
Commissioning Team shall advise and plan to co-ordinate the activities of the
Contractor to ensure the Employer and the Employer’s requirements are met.
9.5.2 The Contractor shall participate in the activities of the Commissioning Team and Site
Co-ordination Team in addition to its own testing and commissioning or as directed by
the Employer or the Employer’s Representative.
9.6 Records and Reports

9.6.1 The Contractor shall submit to the Employer’s Representative for review not less than
six (6) months before commissioning activities commence his proposed format for the
commissioning records. The records shall be appropriately sub-divided to make
provision for the various parts of the Permanent Works covered by the Contract.
9.6.2 The format of the records shall cover all mechanical and electrical tests, provide
positive identification by serial number for assemblies and sub-assemblies of the
Permanent Works and show modifications to Employer’s Drawings and diagrams or
"as built" data to be certified by the Employer or the Employer’s Representative in the
course of installation, testing and setting to work of the Works.
9.6.3 The Contractor shall, during the execution of the Works, prepare such reports and
records of manufacture, installation and testing as may be required in order that a
licence may be issued or statutory requirements may be met or approval given. Such
reports or records shall be adequate to enable each part of the Permanent Works to
be commissioned and to meet the requirements of the licensing authority or any
standing statutory regulations, and shall be reviewed by the Employer and the
9.6.4 The Contractor shall obtain reports of each inspection and/or test. Such reports shall
show the results of all the inspections and/or tests carried out and shall certify that the
work has been inspected and/or tested in accordance with the requirements of the
Contract and that the work complies with the requirements of the Contract.
9.6.5 Any analysis of the results required to confirm that the work complies with the
requirements of the Contract shall be compiled and reported to the Employer’s
Representative in accordance with Chapter 4.
9.6.6 A representative of the Contractor who has been allocated the required authority under
the relevant quality plans shall sign each report of inspection and/or test.
9.6.6.1 Each report of inspection and/or test shall include the appropriate details of:-
(1) the description of the item or goods subjected to the test or inspection;
(2) if applicable, the batch from which the samples were taken for test, the
size and description of samples and the method of sampling;
(3) the place of testing;
(4) the date and time of tests;
(5) the environmental conditions;
(6) the technical personnel supervising or carrying out the test or inspection;
(7) the properties tested or inspected;
(8) the method of testing or inspection;
Page GS 8-8R1 of 15
Draft No. DFA/3337
(9) all relevant checklists and work sheets used during the inspection and/or
test, including the readings and measurements taken during the tests; and
(10) the test results, including any calculations and graphs.
9.6.7 After Commissioning of a part of the Works, the Contractor shall complete each
commissioning record in the agreed format and shall forward copies of the record to
the Employer’s Representative for review.
9.6.8 The Contractor shall submit within its Monthly Progress Report a complete schedule of
his commissioning records showing completion dates, target completion dates and
status.
9.6.9 Timing for Reports of Inspection and/or Test

The Contractor shall ensure that a signed copy of each report of inspection and test is
filed in his filing system within 3 (three) working days of the date of inspection and test.
9.6.10 Quality Control Register

The Contractor shall provide and maintain at all stages of the work a quality control
register or registers to identify the status of inspections, sampling and testing of the
work and all certificates in accordance with Quality Control Register in Chapter 5.
9.6.11 Summaries of Inspection and/or Test

The Contractor shall submit to the Employer’s Representative for his information
summaries based on each quality control register showing the type and amount of
certification received and the inspection and/or testing undertaken on each element of
the Works. Such summaries shall reach the Employer’s Representative’s office before
th
the 7 working day of the month. The summaries shall identify and demonstrate the
compliance of such certification, inspection and/or testing with the requirements of the
Contract and shall identify any item which does not conform to the requirements of the
Contract.
9.7 Test Equipment and Facilities

9.7.1 The Contractor shall provide all equipment and services required for testing, including,
but not limited to:
i. Laboratory test instruments.
ii. Special test equipment, emulators, simulators and test software, to permit
full testing of System functions and performance.
iii. Other items of the System, specified elsewhere as being part of the
Contractor's supply, even if not part of the Subsystem under test.
iv. Consumables.
9.7.2 All test instruments shall be subject to routine inspection, testing and calibration by the
Contractor.
9.7.3 Details of all test instruments shall be submitted for review by the Employer’s
Representative and, if required by the Employer or the Employer’s Representative,
shall be calibrated at the expense of the Contractor by an independent standards
laboratory.
9.7.4 All test equipment must be capable of operating from the mains supply (230V AC
50Hz).
Page GS 8-9R1 of 15
Draft No. DFA/3337
9.7.5 All test software shall be subject to formal quality assurance requirements stipulated
elsewhere in the Specification.
9.7.6 The Contractor shall ensure that all inspection and test equipment is calibrated in
accordance with the specified standards or, if such standards are not applicable to
certain test and inspection equipment, with systems and programmes of calibration
which have been reviewed without objection by the Employer’s Representative.
9.7.7 The Contractor shall ensure that documented evidence of instrument calibration is
maintained and made available to the Employer or the Employer’s Representative on
request.
9.8 Witnessing by the Employer and the Employer’s Representative

9.8.1 Notice for Trial, Inspection and/or Test to the Employer’s Representative
9.8.1.1 In relation to all Quality Control Points and Quality Hold Points involving inspection
and/or testing by the Contractor, the Contractor shall give the Employer’s
Representative notice of when the relevant work will be inspected and/or tested using
the form in APPENDIX 6 of this Specification. The period of notice shall be as
stated in the PS or such period as in the opinion of the Employer’s Representative is
reasonable and notified to the Contractor. In the absence of any such statement or
notice, a reasonable period of notice shall be given by the Contractor provided that:
(1) in the case of on-Site work, such notice shall be given not less than 72
hours of normal working time before the work is to be inspected and/or
tested;
(2) in the case of work carried out off-Site in Delhi, such notice shall be given
not less than 5 days before the work is to be inspected and/or tested; and
(3) in the case of work carried out outside Delhi, such notice shall be given
not less than 14 working days before the work is to be inspected and/or
tested.
9.8.1.2 In relation to all inspection and/or testing notified by the Contractor, the Employer and
the Employer’s Representative may elect to witness such inspections and/or tests but
the Contractor may proceed with the inspections and/or tests notwithstanding the
absence of the Employer or the Employer’s Representative or of any response to the
said notice.
9.8.1.3 If the Contractor is in any doubt whether inspection and/or testing by the Employer’s
Representative is required as a Quality Hold Point, the Contractor shall request that
the Employer’s Representative clarifies his requirements prior to submitting the
relevant inspection and testing plan for review, and in any event not later than 30 days.
9.8.2 Timing for Inspection and/or Test by the Employer and the Employer’s
Representative
9.8.2.1 The Contractor shall allow the Employer and the Employer’s Representative a
reasonable time to carry out any inspection and/or testing and to assess the result of
any inspection and/or test before proceeding with the Works.
9.8.2.2 Unless the Employer’s Representative’s prior review without objection has been
obtained, all inspections and/or tests to be carried out or witnessed by the Employer
and the Employer’s Representative shall be carried out between 0800 and 1800 hours.
9.8.3 Failure to Notify the Employer’s Representative

The Employer or the Employer’s Representative may reject the test and test results in
question, and require the test to be repeated in the event of any failure by the
Page GS 8-10R1 of 15
Draft No. DFA/3337
Contractor to notify the Employer’s Representative in accordance with clause 9.8.1.1

above.
9.9 Failures
9.9.1 The Contractor shall correct all faults found during testing, and shall arrange for the
relevant tests to be repeated. The relevant tests shall only be repeated when the fault
has been remedied and the equipment demonstrated to function correctly.
9.9.2 Where remedial measures involve significant modifications that might, in the
Employer’s Representative's opinion, affect the validity of earlier tests, the Contractor
shall repeat the earlier tests and obtain results satisfactory to the Employer and the
Employer’s Representative before repeating the test in which the fault was first
identified.
9.9.3 The Employer or the Employer’s Representative shall have the right to order the
repeat or abandonment of any test in the event that results demonstrate that the
equipment is significantly non-compliant with the Contract.
9.9.4 The Employer or the Employer’s Representative shall have the right to suspend any
test in the event that errors or failures have become unacceptable. The Employer or
the Employer’s Representative shall also have the right to suspend any test if a fault
was detected by the Contractor but not reported to the Employer’s Representative
within 24 hours of the detection. In this event, the suspension shall remain in effect
until reporting has been brought up to date to the satisfaction of the Employer and the
9.10 Repeat Tests

9.10.1 The Contractor shall correct and re-test every fault detected during the tests.
9.10.2 If the test results in a failure of the item under test the provisions of GCC Clause 7
shall apply.
9.11 Fault Categories

9.11.1 Deleted
9.12 Fault Log

9.12.1 The Contractor shall maintain a fault log throughout each series of tests. Every fault
detected during the tests will be entered in the log, together with the actions taken to
clear and re-test the fault.
9.12.2 The fault log will be retained as part of the permanent quality assurance record for the
system and be subject to regular inspection by the Employer’s Representative.
9.13 Hardware Failure Reports

9.13.1 For each hardware failure that occurs at any stage of testing, the Contractor shall
investigate the failure and prepare a report on its cause(s) and implications, if any,
resulting from such failure. The report shall clearly show:
(1) the observed symptoms;
(2) the most likely cause of the failure;
(3) the fault category
(4) an analysis of any stress that may have been caused to other components
of the equipment being tested as a result of the failure;
Draft No. DFA/3337
(5) whether the failure is a result of any component operating outside its
range; and
(6) whether any design changes should be made to avoid further failures.
9.13.2 All such reports will be retained as part of the permanent quality assurance record for
the system, which shall be subject to inspection by the Employer’s Representative.
9.14 Software Failure Reports

9.14.1 For each software failure that occurs, once the software has been reviewed without
objection for inclusion into the system and is subject to configuration control, the
Contractor shall generate a software failure report.
9.14.2 All such reports will be retained as part of the permanent quality assurance record for
the system, which shall be subject to inspection by the Employer’s Representative.
9.14.3 The report shall clearly show:

(1) the observed symptoms;
(2) the likely cause;
(3) the fault category (from Table 9.1); and
(4) the operator input.
9.14.4 The report shall also clearly show the following information which shall be entered
when the failure has been investigated:
(1) the actual cause of the failure;
(2) the corrective action taken; and
(3) all software modules affected at the location
(4) all similar software modules used in the project.
* End of Chapter *
Draft No. DFA/3337
CHAPTER 10
10. TRAINING & TRANSFER OF TECHNOLOGY

10.1 Training Requirements
10.1.1 The Contractor shall provide comprehensive training to the Employer’s staff to
enable all of the systems and equipment supplied, installed or modified as part
of the Works to be operated and maintained in the designed manner safely and
efficiently so as to achieve the maximum reliability and economy, and to meet
the requirements of the Employer’s programme.
10.1.2 To achieve the objective, it will be necessary to train the Employer’s staff,
including Employer’s Training Instructors (ETI). The Contractor shall submit to
the Employer’s Representative for review and critique the range of staff for
which training is recommended and a Training Plan to be proposed for the
Employer in accordance with clause 3.7.4 above.
10.1.3 The recommendation shall include details of training equipment necessary and
appropriate to achieve the training objectives.
10.1.4 The Training Plan shall provide a structured training programme to educate and
train the personnel of the Employer in all aspects of the system operation and
maintenance and shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
(1) schedule of training courses;
(2) objective, syllabus, format, class size and duration of each training
course;
(3) training facilities to be provided by the Employer;
(4) list of training materials and documentation to be included with the

training course;
(5) method of pre- and post- testing to be utilised;
(6) qualifications and experience level necessary for the trainees;
(7) instructor’s qualifications; and
(8) course evaluation methods.
10.1.5 Courses offered shall be suitable for operations and maintenance staff
classified below as distinct from engineering staff:
(1) first line and second line maintenance staff undertaking

recovery/corrective and routine/preventive maintenance;
(2) third line (high skill level) maintenance staff specialised in workshop
repair and overhaul of equipment; and
(3) technical support staff specialising in fault analysis and

investigation techniques associated with the particular type of
equipment.
Page: GS 9-1 of 5
Draft No. DFA/3337
10.1.6 Training shall, as a minimum, impart the following techniques to the Employer’s
staff of the appropriate grades:
(1) all planned maintenance and overhaul of the systems and

equipment supplied, installed or modified under the Contract;
(2) fault finding and rectification techniques for the systems and
equipment supplied, installed or modified under the Contract.
These shall be developed from the Contractor’s previous
experience with similar equipment and also from the fault tree
analysis and other analyses carried out as part of the reliability
engineering studies undertaken by the Contractor;
(3) normal and degraded modes of operation of the systems and

equipment supplied, installed or modified under the Contract;
(4) all rules, regulations, practices and procedures necessary for the
safe and efficient operation of the systems and equipment supplied,
installed or modified under the Contract; and
(5) all contingency plans necessary to recover speedily and safely from
any mishaps or emergencies that may arise with the systems and
equipment supplied, installed or modified under the Contract.
10.1.7 Training shall be carried out in the medium of the English language and
supplemented, if necessary, in the Hindi language.
10.2 Training Method

10.2.1 Training shall consist of classroom (theory) training, computer based interactive
multi-media training (CBT) and practical (hands on) training.
10.2.2 The training shall take place in Delhi, unless there are prohibitive reason(s),
and shall be related to Permanent Works that are to be or are being installed
on the Project.
10.2.3 The training in Delhi shall be supplemented, where appropriate, by training at

the Contractor’s own premises and the premises of the major sub-contractors
during the manufacturing and factory testing phases of the Works. Maximum
use shall be made of the opportunities presented during equipment testing
phases of the Contract to demonstrate and practise fault finding and diagnostic
techniques.
10.2.4 To meet this need, the Contractor shall supply competent trainers/instructors to
carry out training to a high degree of proficiency in areas where the Contractor
has the specialised knowledge.
10.2.5 In order to ensure that satisfactory standards are met, the Employer’s relevant
Operations/Maintenance Department in liaison with the Training Department
will monitor all training.
10.2.6 During the Defects Liability Period, when the Contractor is responsible for
faultfinding and repair, he shall provide practical hands on training to the
Employer’s maintenance staff to facilitate the successful hand over of this
function.
Page: GS 9-2 of 5
Draft No. DFA/3337
10.2.7 Where applicable, the Employer will pay all of his staff’s salaries, travelling,
subsistence and other related allowances.
10.3 Employer’s Instructor Training

10.3.1 The Contractor shall provide training courses and training materials to train the
Employer’s Training Instructors (ETI) to a level of competence to allow the ETIs
to subsequently train the Employer’s staff in all aspects of operation and
maintenance of the systems and equipment supplied, installed or modified as
part of the Works.
10.3.2 For Maintenance Instructors, this shall include specific training in the use of
maintenance documentation, all faultfinding guides and any special gauges,
instrumentation or test equipment required in any maintenance or fault finding
and analysis.
10.3.3 For Operations Instructors, this shall include training in the operation of the
equipment and the various systems/sub systems under both normal and fault
conditions.
10.4 Training Plant & Equipment

10.4.1 With the prior review of the Employer’s Representative, the Contractor may use
the Permanent Works being erected, tested or commissioned for the training of
the Employer’s staff. In general, the Contractor shall not use Contract Spare
parts for this purpose.
10.4.2 Training course notes shall be entirely compatible, and, where appropriate,
cross-referenced to the manuals supplied by the Contractor as part of the
Operation and Maintenance documentation.
10.4.3 The Contractor shall provide such written or printed matter, functional
equipment, samples, models, cutaway equipment, slides, films and other
instructional materials as may be necessary for training. Such equipment and
material shall remain the property of the Employer and shall be sufficient both
for the persons trained by the Contractor and for those to be subsequently
trained by the ETI.
10.4.4 The Contractor shall provide an instructor’s guide for each training course. The
guide shall include the course agenda, objectives, list of resources and facilities
required, detailed lesson plans, presentation notes, discussion guides, training
aids and job aids, test papers, criteria and methodology for testing and
assessment, and all other things that will enable the ETI to carry out repeat or
refresher courses in the future.
10.4.5 Not used
10.4.6 All training course notes and instructor’s guides shall be in a form that allows
for easy reproduction.
10.4.7 All training course notes and instructor’s guides shall be in a standard format as
set out by the Employer.
Page: GS 9-3 of 5
Draft No. DFA/3337
10.5 Testing and Assessment

10.5.1 The Contractor shall, at the conclusion of each training course, issue
questionnaires to, and/or set practical tests for all trainees directed at
determining the level of satisfaction with the course content and to assess the
level of knowledge and understanding of the course content by each trainee.
10.5.2 The Contractor shall review the responses to questionnaires and the trainees’
test results and forward a summary to the Employer’s Representative.
10.5.3 If the Employer’s Representative considers that the course has not achieved
the required objectives, he will advise the Contractor who shall then organise
and implement appropriate re-training.
10.6 Training Records

10.6.1 The Contractor shall, at the completion of each training course:
(1) provide the Employer’s Representative with a consolidated training
record listing the training course title, date of training, name of all
trainees, training result and other relevant information; and
(3) issue an appropriate certificate to each trainee who has successfully
completed the course.
10.7 Transfer of Technology

10.7.1 Tenderer shall submit the detailed plan of transfer of technology along with
MOU with suitable Indian companies or company having proven track record
and working in related areas for major systems / subsystems in accordance
with clause 10.7 of GS.
10.7.2 TOT shall be essential and shall include system assembly, installation,
maintenance and software modification / customisation and training of
Employer’s personnel to cover the systems/subsystems as specified in
Particular Specifications:
10.7.3 TOT shall essentially include the following aspects as a minimum:

§ Engineering or extensions and up gradations of the system.
§ Re-engineering to suit changed traffic conditions.
§ Incorporation of optional facilities.
§ Any other configuration/programmes required for maintenance/ up
gradation of hardware/software.
10.7.4 The Transfer of Technology shall require involvement of Employer’s personnel

in each of sub-systems during the contract period. The sponsored engineers
shall be under the technical administrative control of the contractor. It is
tentatively proposed to deploy 2 No. Employer’s personnel for this purpose.
10.7.5 The contractor shall undertake to supply or make arrangement with the original
manufacturer to supply additional equipment required for replacement or
expansion of the network in future.
10.7.6 The contractor shall undertake to provide, if required during the life of the
equipment ordered, technical assistance in the form of additional drawings,
maintenance practices and technical advice.
Page: GS 9-4 of 5
Draft No. DFA/3337
* End of Chapter *
Page: GS 9-5 of 5
Draft No. DFA/3337
Draft No. DFA/3337
CHAPTER 11
11. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION

11.1 General
11.1.1 The Contractor shall supply Operation and Maintenance documentation in respect of
the systems and equipment supplied or installed or modified under the Contract in
accordance with the requirements of the following clauses, except where expressly
specified otherwise in the Contract.
11.1.2 All Operation and Maintenance Manuals produced by the Contractor shall conform to
the requirements of the Employer. The Contractor shall interface with the Employer
for the requisite format.
11.1.3 The Contractor shall supply all documentation, including Operation and Maintenance
Manuals and “as-built” drawings, necessary for operating, maintaining, repairing and
modifying the systems and equipment supplied, installed or modified under the
Contract.
11.1.4 Except where otherwise stated, the Contractor shall provide one electronic copy, eight
bound copies and one unbound copy of all documentation. The unbound copy will be
used by the Employer for reproduction purposes. All documentation shall be in the
English language.
11.1.5 The Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be provided in the English language.
11.1.6 The Contractor shall fully co-ordinate and cross-reference interfaces and areas
associated with interconnecting equipment and systems within the Contract. The
Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall fully describe the overall operation of all
systems incorporating all equipment.
11.1.7 The Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall contain no irrelevant or ambiguous
information and shall relate specifically to this Contract.
11.1.8 The Contractor may use manufacturer’s data and handbooks for individual items of
E&M equipment that are a sub-component of the overall system, including printed
circuit boards, providing they meet the intent of the Specification, and are integrated
by the Contractor into the description of his equipment, and are indexed accordingly in
his own general index. All such documentation shall be contained in similar binders.
11.1.9 Where a sub-assembly item is of such a nature that local repairs in New Delhi/India
cannot be made and it is necessary to be returned to the manufacturer as a unit for
overhaul, the specific information concerning its repair and breakdown into
component parts shall be provided.
11.1.10 The document shall be collated and numbered in proper order and correspond to the
contents and index tables. Nomenclature or references to any items of equipment,
diagrams, figure numbers or units shall be consistent throughout the text. In order to
comprehend the text, diagrams, drawings, sketches and actual photographs shall be
added where necessary. All manufacturers’ literature identification codes or stamp
markings shall be omitted. Precautions and warnings regarding the safety of life and
equipment shall be included where applicable.
Page: GS 10-1 of 5
Draft No. DFA/3337
11.2 Arrangement and Format of Manuals

11.2.1 The Contractor shall arrange all documentation in accordance with the Employer
requirements.
11.2.2 The Contractor shall provide documentation for all hardware and software for
computer systems and other associated electronic equipment to meet the following
requirements. Such documents shall include but not be limited to:
(1) manufacturers’ documentation supplied as standard with the equipment;
(2) hardware configuration with details of expansion capabilities and options;
(3) programme loading instructions, including runtime environment

configuration;
(4) programme listing including comprehensive 'comment statements' in hard

copy and soft format for source code, compilers and development tools
necessary to modify and recompile software;
(5) flow charts, data flow diagrams and state diagrams as appropriate;
(6) description of software modules including purpose, linkage with other

modules, error routines and any special considerations;
(7) memory maps for both internal and peripheral memory showing
description of all programmes, data files, overlay areas, memory available
for expansion and the like;
(8) loading and operating instructions for diagnostic programmes and

specifically developed debugging tools; and
(9) programming manuals relevant to operating systems, languages,

development tools, etc.
11.2.3 The documentation shall in all respects be entirely sufficient to allow any competent
software programming organisation to undertake programme and/or system
modifications without recourse to the Contractor. These requirements shall apply in
respect of microprocessor based equipment and 'firmware'.
11.3 Drawings
11.3.1 The Contractor shall submit such drawings as may be required for the operation and
maintenance and repair of the Permanent Works by the Employer.
11.3.2 Information contained on the drawings shall include but not be limited to:
(1) arrangement drawings for all sub-systems and individual items of
equipment;
(2) installation and fixing drawings for all sub-systems and individual items of
equipment;
(3) interface drawings for all sub-systems and individual items of equipment;
(4) schematic drawings for all electrical, pneumatic, hydraulic, water and
drainage systems;
(5) sizes, material and finish of all fixtures and threads;
Page: GS 10-2 of 5
Draft No. DFA/3337
(6) manufacturer's code, drawing and reference numbers;
(7) wiring diagrams to BS EN 60617, BS 3939 and BS 376 including internal

wiring of sealed unit items;
(8) setting dimensions and tolerances; and
(9) bill of materials.
11.3.3 Where instructed by the Employer’s Representative, drawings shall be supplied with
Hindi language notation in addition to English. The Employer’s Representative will
supply such Hindi notation to the Contractor.
11.4 Submissions
11.4.1 The Contractor shall deliver all documentation to the Employer’s Representative by
the date stated in the PS, or, if none is given, preferably six (6) months prior to the
issue of the Taking Over Certificate for the Works (for the final draft version), and one
(1) month prior to the issue of the Taking Over Certificate for the Works (for the final
version). The delivery shall include a copy of the software and licence to operate the
software to modify the manuals together with one set of CADD drawing files. The
final manuals shall incorporate comments made by the Employer’s Representative on
the draft manual.
11.4.2 Drawings shall be submitted to the Employer’s Representative as stated in the PS.
The submission shall be in accordance with stage commissioning requirements
specified in the Works Programme and shall include two 35mm microfilms and/or
Compact Discs (CD) for each drawing.
11.4.3 Following the Employer’s Representative’s review, the Contractor shall make a final
submission of the complete Operation and Maintenance Manuals and as-built
drawings in a form and in a quantity specified in the PS. The final submission shall be
made not later than the date set by the Employer’s Representative. The type of
binder used to bind the Operation and Maintenance documentation shall be of a
design, which will permit all changes and additions to the said documentation to be
readily collated therein. The Contractor shall make such amendments to his
submissions as may prove necessary during commissioning of the Permanent Works
and the Defects Liability Period. Amendments found necessary during commissioning
shall be completed within two months after the issue of the Taking Over Certificate for
the Works. Subsequent amendments shall be completed two months prior to the
issue of the Defects Liability Certificate.
11.5 Operation and Maintenance Manuals

The Employer shall have the right to reproduce any part or the whole of any Operation
and Maintenance Manual as he wishes for his O and M requirements.
* End of Chapter *
Page: GS 10-3 of 5
Draft No. DFA/3337
Page: GS 10-4 of 5
Draft No. DFA/3337
CHAPTER 12
12. SUPERVISION AND PLANNING OF MAINTENANCE

12.1 Scope
12.1.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for the supervision of maintenance of the
equipment supplied under the Contract after the Employer’s Taking Over of the Works
or Part of the Works. The maintenance personnel shall be provided by the Employer.
12.1.2 The responsibility for the provision of supervision of maintenance shall be based on
the number of man-months identified during the Tender period and incorporated into
the Contract. The actual utilisation of these man-months shall be at the Employer’s
discretion and may be at any time up to six months after the Employer’s Taking Over
of the whole of the Works or the last part of the Works or the date of issuing of the
Performance Certificate whichever shall be the later.
12.1.3 The scope of maintenance activities shall include all scheduled and unscheduled
maintenance required including all routine inspections and service overhauls at
trackside, on trains and in workshops. Maintenance work shall include faultfinding
following report of incidents and repair of items of equipment changed out in the
course of fault rectification but excluding any Contractor’s liability for work to be
carried out under the requirements of the Defects Liability Period.
12.2 Maintenance Planning & Management Staff

12.2.1 The Contractor shall undertake the necessary tasks in planning the maintenance
activities to ensure that the reliability of the operating railway is upheld including but
not limited to:
(i) Provide recommendations in respect of philosophy and procedures for
repairs of electronic systems, including PCBs, and the scale of facilities
required to be set up in the Depot and Workshops for this purpose.
(ii) Preparation of detailed operational plan for the routine servicing of any
equipment which requires such service. The plan shall ensure that all
items in use receive maintenance within the required time cycle by
suitably trained and qualified staff and under the personal safety regime
appropriate to the location of the equipment being maintained.
(iii) Preparation of a detailed staffing for each and every different inspection,
overhaul and repair activity. The plan shall also identify and quantify
resources required by staff and groups of staff in terms of tools, tackle,
protective clothing, etc..
(iv) Preparation of a detailed quality plan, covering all maintenance activities.
Based on the plan it shall be possible for the maintenance organisation to
obtain ISO-9002-2002 certification.
(v) Preparation of a computer based Stores management Plan, which shall
assist the management, ensuring a timely availability of spares, tools and
consumable materials with a low level of inventory.
(vi) Setting in position a computerised defects and failure analysis and
documentation system, based on FMEA principles for all systems, sub-
systems and components including individual PCBs.
(vii) Efficient supervision of the maintenance, overhaul and repair activities of
maintenance staff to ensure high quality work and productivity. This shall
also include planning and supervision of ongoing training and re-training
as required in the correct procedures using the training materials and
courses supplied under the Contract. Where the supplied training
courses are insufficient the Contractor shall develop additional training
Page: GS 11-1 of 2
Draft No. DFA/3337
courses, manuals and materials to make good the deficiency as part of

his Defects Liability responsibilities.
12.3 Supervisory Staff

12.3.1 The Contractor shall provide supervisory maintenance staffs who are experts in the
first and third line faultfinding, maintenance and repair of the various systems supplied
under the Contract:
12.3.2 The experts provided for supervision of maintenance shall have adequate
qualifications and experience in the relevant discipline in the maintenance depots /
workshops of existing metro type undertakings.
12.3.3 The deployment of the experts may not be continuous and they may be required to
supervise the maintenance in short periods at the discretion of the Employer.
12.3.4 The experts shall be available in Delhi at short notice to supervise the Employer’s
staff at any time during the Normal Operating hours and by arrangement to undertake
extended investigations during Non-Revenue hours.
* End of Chapter *
Page: GS 11-2 of 2
Draft No. DFA/3337
CHAPTER 13
13. SUPPLY OF SPARE PARTS, SPECIAL TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT
13.1 Details of supply

13.1.1 Deleted
13.1.2 Deleted
13.1.3 The Contractor shall submit to the Employer’s Representative for review, in the format
of a contract spares schedule, in accordance with Chapter 4 above, a list of:
(a) the Spare Parts to be supplied by the Contractor as part of the Works to
suit stage, categorised into individual parts or sealed units; and
(b) the Special Tools and Test Equipment to be supplied by the Contractor as
part of the Works to suit stage.
Such list shall be an amplification and confirmation of the list supplied with the
Tender, as may have been subsequently modified during the Tender period, and shall
be amended as necessary to reflect changes that may have occurred since the date
of the Letter of Acceptance.
13.1.4 The Contractor shall use separate sets of contract spares schedules for different sub-
assemblies of the main assembly / equipment.
13.1.5 The information supplied in respect of each spare part or special tool shall include, but
not be limited to, the following:
13.1.5.1 core data - main assembly/equipment
(i) manufacturer / brand name
(ii) manufacturer's type/model number
(iii) rating
(iv) serial number if applicable
(v) total number of the main assembly/ equipment supplied under the
Contract
13.1.5.2 core data - sub-assembly of main assembly/equipment

(i) manufacturer / brand name
(ii) manufacturer's type/model number
(iii) rating
(iv) serial number, if applicable
(if items (i) to (iv) above are different from those of the main assembly/equipment)
(v) total number of sub-assembly in the main assembly/equipment supplied

under the Contract
13.1.5.3 individual item of main/sub assembly/equipment
Page: GS 12-1R1 of 7
Draft No. DFA/3337
(i) manufacturer order number
(ii) parts description - a full description of the Spare Part, including a note as
to whether it is a sealed unit or whether it is an assembly or sub-assembly
which can be broken-down into component parts
(iii) manufacturer / brand name
(iv) the manufacturer's part number (if different from the ordering number)
(v) the sub-contractor's ordering part number/reference, if applicable
(vi) recommended quantity
(vii) unit of measurement
(viii) unit price CIF to Delhi including delivery to designated location amount
(quantity multiplied by unit price)
(ix) total number of the Spare Part in the sub-assembly of the main
assembly/equipment supplied under the Contract
(x) total number of the Spare Part in all the sub-assemblies of all the main
assemblies/ different equipment supplied under the Contract
The Contractor shall ensure that the ordering part numbers specified shall
enable the Employer to procure the exact item in future without reference
to the Contractor.
13.1.5.4 primary data

(i) parts catalogue number/cross reference (illustrated parts
catalogues to be submitted together with the contract spares
schedules to the Employer’s Representative)
(ii) drawing number
13.1.5.5 secondary data

(i) lead times stating whether for ex-stock or for product
manufactured upon receipt of order.
(ii) delivery schedule(s).
(iii) supplementary information:
a) special handling instruction, e.g. for fragile materials,

hazardous substances, radioactive materials, etc.
b) storage requirement, e.g. overall dimensions including

special packing (if any) for bulky materials, materials with
limited shelf life, etc.
c) statutory requirements, e.g. licences, test certificates, etc.
d) interchangeability information
e) tailor-made product for the Contract or a standard bought-in

product
Draft No. DFA/3337
f) the source of the Spare Part or Special Tool and Test

Equipment, including the manufacturer’s name and address
together with that of his Delhi agent
g) Supplementary sheets to be used for detailed information

that is important to the Employer's future procurement.
13.2 Manufacture and delivery of Spare Parts

13.2.1 All Spare Parts shall be manufactured, works tested and inspected in accordance with
the relevant quality system, suitably packed and labelled in accordance with Chapter
8 above, and delivered to the Employer by the Contractor. Before the Spare Parts are
delivered to the Employer, the Contractor shall submit to the Employer’s
Representative a shipment advice notifying details such as date of despatch, date of
arrival, vessel name, etc. as well as a packing list to indicate the contract number,
variation order number, the lot size, quantity and weight. The Spare Parts shall be
consigned to the Employer and delivered in accordance with The Employer’s
Representative's instructions to a programme which shall ensure that sufficient Spare
Parts are delivered to facilitate normal routine maintenance of the Permanent Works
by the Employer at all stages of completion. Contractor may refer Spares’ policy
defined in relevant clause of PS/Preamble of BOQ for more details.
13.2.2 Spare Parts shall be fully interchangeable with their corresponding part. All Spare
Parts shall be configured to the latest revision during the Defects Liability Period. For
Spare Parts such as electronic components, lamps, fuses and other consumable and
high-use items, the Contractor shall ensure that a minimum of two alternative sources
of supply are available.
13.2.3 An adequate supply of Spare Parts shall be available throughout the design life of the
Works, from the date of the Employer’s Taking Over of the Works. The
Contractor/OEM undertakes to notify the Employer at least 6 months prior to deleting
any item used in the Works from general availability.
13.2.4 For any Spare Parts that the Contractor/OEM is unable to supply throughout the design
life of the Works, or where the Contractor/OEM ceases availability support of that item
before the end of such design life or if the Contractor/OEM ceases trading, the
Contractor/OEM undertakes to transfer the relevant intellectual property rights, design
rights and technology to the Employer and the Employer shall have the full right to
manufacturing drawings, schedules, software and any other information needed to
manufacture the relevant item. Such rights shall give the Employer complete freedom to
manufacture the item in Delhi or anywhere else world-wide. The Contractor/OEM shall
also undertake to notify the Employer two years in advance of the intended cessation of
spares availability of any item.
13.2.5 If any Spare Part is rendered obsolete by a design change or material change during the
design life of the Works supplied under the Contract, the Contractor/OEM shall design a
replacement item to match the identical mechanical and electrical interfaces as the former
item.
13.2.6 If, as a result of changes in technology, any Spare Part is not completely interchangeable
with the original item, or the performance of any Spare Part is different from the original
item, then the Contractor shall purchase the same from the Employer, at a price agreed
between the parties, such quantities of the obsolete Spare Part as the Employer may
possess.
13.2.7 The contractor shall furnish an undertaking that he has no objection whatsoever and
shall not in any way deter or obstruct the Employer, its licensee or its representative
from dealing directly with the OEMs for purchase of the Spares during the service life
Draft No. DFA/3337
of the equipment. Such an undertaking has to be submitted at the time of Vendor

approval.
13.2.8 Contractor shall obtain an undertaking from all OEMs approved by the Engineer under
the contract at the time of Vendor Approval that they will deal directly with Employer
for Supply of Spares, Equipment and/or sub-system or any required Technical support
if the Employer so desires. The Employer shall have the option to procure as many
Spares Parts as desired at a reasonable cost.
13.3 Contract Spares
13.3.1 The quantity of Spare Parts to be supplied by the Contractor to the Employer shall be
determined in accordance with the formulae described in clauses or for particular items as
detailed in the PS. Deleted
13.3.2 Notwithstanding the quantities defined, PS or by the following formulae the quantity of
Spare Parts shall be sufficient for the full operation of the Permanent Works for the first
two 5 years following the expiry of the Defects Liability Period for the works ("Contract
Spares').
13.3.3 The Contractor shall supply and deliver the Contract Spares on or before completion of the
Systems Acceptance Test
13.3.4 Deleted
13.3.5 Deleted
13.3.6 Deleted
13.3.7 Deleted
13.4 Commissioning Spares

13.4.1 In addition to the Contract Spares, the Contractor shall keep on the Site ,under his
own custody throughout the installation, erection and commissioning periods,
sufficient stocks of Spare Parts to enable immediate replacement of any item in the
Permanent Works found to be defective or in any way in non-conformance with the
Specification during the installation, erection and commissioning period
("Commissioning Spares").
13.4.2 The Contractor shall supply and deliver the Commissioning Spares on or before the
commencement of any Partial Acceptance Tests (PAT) or as defined in the PS.
13.4.3 Deleted
13.4.4 The Contractor shall not be entitled to use any of the Contract Spares to replace any
item in the Permanent Works during the installation, erection and commissioning
periods.
13.5 Defects Liability Spares

13.5.1 In addition to the Contract Spares, the Contractor shall keep sufficient stocks of Spare
Parts, in his own custody in an off-site location in Delhi throughout the Defects
Liability Periods to enable rapid replacement of any item in the Permanent Works
found to require replacement as part of the Contractor's obligations during the Defects
Liability Periods ('Defects Liability Spares").
Draft No. DFA/3337
13.5.2 The Contractor shall supply and deliver the Defects Liability Spares on or before the
commencement of the Service Trial. Deleted
13.5.3 The Contractor shall submit to the Employer’s Representative for review a list of all
Defects Liability Spares that shall be maintained by the Contractor during the Defects
Liability Periods.
13.5.4 The Contractor shall not be entitled to use any of the Contract Spares to replace any
item in the Permanent Works during the Defects Liability Periods.
13.6 Special Tools and Test Equipment

13.6.1 The Special Tools and Test Equipment (together with the relevant calibration
certificates) required to carry out all the functions described in the Operation and
Maintenance Manual or as required by the PS shall be suitably packed and identified
in accordance with Chapter 8 above, consigned to the Employer by the Contractor
and delivered to the Employer in accordance with the Employer’s Representative's
instructions not later than the date referred in Spares’ policy defined in relevant clause
of PS/Preamble of BOQ. The extent of supply shall include protective carrying cases
as may be appropriate for the storage and use of each item.
13.6.2 All Special Tools and Test Equipment shall be supplied with Operation and
Maintenance Manuals, complete diagrams, schematics, assembly and connection
drawings, calibration instructions and circuit diagrams/descriptions for future
maintenance.
13.6.3 Where the Contractor has used the Special Tools and Test Equipment for installation
and commissioning of the Permanent Works, he shall refurbish and re-calibrate each
item to the satisfaction of the Employer’s Representative prior to handover to the
Employer, accompanied by the Certificate of Calibration traceable to a recognised
International or National standard.
13.6.4 Where any item of Special Tools and Test Equipment is provided by the Contractor, it
shall be accompanied by drawings, manuals and full operating instructions to enable
them to be used by suitably skilled (but not necessarily specially trained) personnel in
a non-hazardous manner and to achieve the desired result in terms of accuracy and
quality.
13.6.5 The Contractor shall provide the means and instructions which describe the
parameters of each item of Special Tools and Test Equipment that are critical to their
proper methods of use and which enable the Employer's staff using the Special Tools
and Test Equipment to achieve the proper performance and operation. Such means
and instructions shall include, but not be limited to, any routine checking or re-
calibration needs for the Special Tool and Test Equipment itself.
13.7 Coding and Tagging of Spare Parts and Special Tools and Test
Equipment
13.7.1 All Spare Parts and Special Tools and Test Equipment to be delivered to the
Employer shall each carry a tag suitably marked, bar-coded (as directed by the
Employer’s Representative) and numbered.
13.7.2 The numbers on the tags shall correspond with those on the coding system
developed by the Contractor for all components, parts and equipment's. See also
clause 7.3.1 above.
* * End of Chapter *
Draft No. DFA/3337
Draft No. DFA/3337
CHAPTER 14
14. THE WORKS AND CARE OF THE WORKS

14.1 Methods of Construction
14.1.1 The Contractor shall, as stated in the PS and in any case not less than 12 weeks
before starting the construction of the Works on Site, submit to the Employer’s
Representative the Construction and Installation Plan as specified in Chapter 3
above.
14.2 Temporary Works

Upon receiving a written application from the Contractor, the Employer’s
Representative may at his absolute discretion consent to certain Temporary Works of
a minor nature being exempted from the requirements of this Chapter. Such
exemption shall not relieve the Contractor of any of his obligations under the Contract.
14.3 Normal Working Hours

14.3.1 Normal working hours shall be defined as the period between 0700 hours and 1900
hours on all days excluding General Holidays. Work outside normal working hours
shall not be carried out unless reviewed without objection by the Employer’s
Representative and unless the Contractor has obtained any necessary permission or
approval from Relevant Authorities.
14.3.2 The Contractor shall inform the Employer’s Representative 24 hours, or such shorter
period reviewed without objection by the Employer’s Representative, in advance of
any occasion when work outside normal working hours is proposed.
14.4 Drawings and Schedules

Detailed manufacturing drawings for the Permanent Works will not normally be
required to be submitted to the Employer’s Representative for review but shall be
available on the Contractor’s or his sub-contractor’s premises if required. The
Contractor shall also maintain at the Site a comprehensive and up-to-date set of
drawings properly indexed and catalogued, which shall include complete sets of
detailed working and, where applicable, manufacturing drawings and shall permit free
access to such drawings by the Employer’s Representative at any reasonable time.
14.5 Notification and Inspection of Works

14.5.1 The Works will be the subject of a formalised system of written applications for
inspection.
14.5.2 Work that is carried out without being appropriately sanctioned by the Employer’s
Representative could be classified as defective work.
14.6 Construction Restraints

14.6.1 The Contractor shall design and implement Temporary Traffic Management (TTM) in
accordance with the provisions of the Enactment.
14.6.2 The Contractor shall ensure that the , construction and performance of all Temporary
Works and the and construction of all Permanent Works shall be such that any ground
movements in and around the Site will not result in settlement and/or subsidence of
the ground that will cause damage to any buildings, structures, rail, roads, footpaths,
slopes or utilities.
Page: GS 13-1 of 3
Draft No. DFA/3337
14.6.3 The Contractor shall ensure that the method of installation of any part of the
Permanent Works (prior to dewatering and excavation) minimises settlements in the
adjacent ground or buildings. Dewatering of an excavation will not be permitted
unless a closed perimeter of impermeable wall is complete.
14.7 Protection from Water

14.7.1 Deleted
14.7.2 Deleted
14.7.3 Deleted
14.7.4 Measures shall be taken to prevent flotation of new and existing structures.
14.8 Protection from Weather

14.8.1 Work shall not be carried out in weather conditions that may adversely affect the work
unless protection by methods reviewed without objection by the Employer’s
Representative is provided.
14.8.2 The Permanent Works, including materials for the Permanent Works, shall be
protected by methods reviewed without objection by the Employer’s Representative
from exposure to weather conditions which may adversely affect the Permanent
Works.
14.9 Protection of Work

Finished work shall be protected against damage that could arise from the execution
of adjacent work. Work shall be carried out in such a manner that work carried out by
others, including Government departments, utility undertakings, Relevant Authorities
and Project Contractors, is not damaged.
The Contractor shall, provide CCTV cameras covering all the major work areas for the
purpose of security and work progress monitoring. All the cameras installed at
different sites under Contractor’s jurisdiction, shall be connected to a centralized
location preferably in headquarters for central monitoring.
14.10 Liability of Design Deficiency

In Design & built Contracts, for design deficiencies getting identified after
commissioning of the system / equipment, the design & built contractor shall be fully
liable to analyze the deficiencies / failures and undertake suitable remedial measures
to overcome the identified design deficiency. In such cases, the contractor will be
required to obtain prior approval of Engineer before undertaking any such design
alterations. Decision of Engineer shall be final and binding in such cases.

In Design Verification Contracts (Design Verification type BOQ based Contracts), in
case a design deficiency is observed after commissioning of the system / equipment,
the Contractor shall be liable to carry out failure analysis and suggest remedial
measures to be undertaken. If design lapses are found to be pertaining to OEM /
Equipment manufacturer, the Contractor shall get the same rectified through the
OEM / Equipment manufacturer. In case, design deficiency is observed in method of
installation of the system / equipment, the Contractor shall get the reinstallation
Page: GS 13-2 of 3
Draft No. DFA/3337
done to overcome the defect. Decision of Engineer shall be final and binding in such
cases.
* End of Chapter *
Page: GS 13-3 of 3
Draft No. DFA/3337
Page: GS 13-4 of 3
Draft No. DFA/3337
CHAPTER 15
15. SITE ESTABLISHMENT AND ATTENDANCE

15.1 Use of the Site
15.1.1 The Site shall not be used by the Contractor for any purpose other than for executing
the Works or carrying out other work which is associated with the Works and having
been reviewed without objection by the Employer’s Representative.
15.1.2 The Employer can provide free of cost clear area subject to availability, to the
contractor on work sites for setting up of office and local stores. The provision of area
will depend on the scope/quantum of work of the contractor at that particular site and
decision of Employer in this respect will be final. The contractor shall vacate the area
before the handing over of works or as and when instructed by the Employer.
The Employer can also provide area at any other location than the work sites subject
to availability and quantum/scope of work of contractor for setting up of central store
and office, the same shall be vacated after completion of Defect liability period. The
space provided in such cases shall be on chargeable basis at the rate of Rs
2
200/m /year excluding electricity, water and other maintenance charges.
15.1.3 All materials and equipment stored on Site shall be adequately protected against loss
or damage due to any cause such as climatic effects, vandalism, shock and vibration,
etc. according to the nature of the articles stored and the local Site condition.
15.1.4 The particular use to which the Site is put shall be submitted to the Employer’s
Representative for review with the following particulars:
(1) drawings showing the layout within the Site of the Employer’s
Representative’s and Contractor’s accommodation, access roads and
major facilities required early in the Contract;
(2) drawings showing the layout and the construction details of the
Employer’s Representative’s accommodation; and
(3) proposals for the Employer’s Representative’s Site accommodation (if

applicable) as defined by clause 15.4 below.
15.2 Survey of the Site

On or before the Contractor is granted access to a certain portion of the Site, the
Contractor shall carry out a survey jointly with the Other Contractors executing works
on that portion of the Site. The Contractor shall advise the Employer’s Representative
of the date of the joint survey at least 1 week in advance of the date.
15.3 Fences and Signs on the Site

15.3.1 Hoardings, fences, gates and signs on and at the Site shall be maintained in a clean,
stable and secure condition.
15.3.2 Project signboards stated in the Contract shall be erected not more than 28 days, or
such other period reviewed without objection by the Employer’s Representative, after
the Commencement Date of the Works. Other advertising signs shall not be erected
on the Site unless reviewed by the Employer’s Representative.
15.3.3 The permission of the Employer’s Representative shall be obtained before hoardings,
fences, gates or signs are removed. Hoardings, fences, gates and signs which are to
Page: GS 14-1 of 6
Draft No. DFA/3337
be left in position after Employer’s Taking Over of the Works shall be repaired and
repainted as instructed by the Employer’s Representative.
15.4 The Contractor’s Site Accommodation

15.4.1 The Contractor’s offices, sheds, stores, mess rooms, latrines and other
accommodation on the Site shall be maintained in a clean, stable and secure
condition. Living accommodation shall not be provided on the Site unless stated in
the Contract or having been reviewed without objection by the Employer’s
Representative. The Contractor's personnel shall not be allowed to live on the Site.
15.4.2 The Contractor shall provide and maintain all necessary offices, sheds, stores, mess
rooms, latrines and other accommodation and remove the same from the Site on the
Employer’s Taking Over of the Works. These shall be to the satisfaction of the
Employer’s Representative and shall be kept in a clean and sanitary condition. No
structure shall be erected by the Contractor within the Site without the written consent
of the Employer’s Representative and such consent will not relieve the Contractor of
the responsibility of siting temporary structures clear of the Works.
15.4.3 A copy of the plan showing the extent and position of all offices, stores, sheds, etc.
shall be prepared by the Contractor and retained for inspection in the Site office.
15.4.4 Deleted
15.4.5 The Contractor shall not erect or operate canteen and kitchen facilities on the Site
except with the consent of the Employer’s Representative and, where appropriate, the
Relevant Authorities. Any such facilities shall, in particular but without limitation,
conform to all regulations and standards to the extent required by the concerned city
authorities of GNCTD..
15.5 Site Utilities and Access

15.5.1 Temporary clean drinking water, wash room , electricity, , ) sewerage and drainage
facilities shall be provided for the Employer’s Representative’s office accommodation
along with Contractor’s office for carrying out the Works. The Contractor shall make
all arrangements and obtain the necessary approvals from the Relevant Authorities
for the facilities.
15.5.2 If, under the Contract, the Contractor is provided with Site utilities and access by any
Other Contractor under the attendance of the same or another Other Contractor, the
Contractor shall ensure that all requirements in terms of use of such facilities, their
upkeep and maintenance, etc. are properly observed. If the facilities provided under
such attendance are insufficient for the Contractor’s bona fide needs, the Contractor
shall be solely responsible for providing such additional facilities he may require for
the execution of the Works.
15.5.3 Access roads and parking areas shall be provided within the Site as required and
shall be maintained in a clean, passable and stable condition.
15.6 Site Facilities for the Employer’s Representative

15.6.1 The Contractor will be required to provide suitable accommodation for Employer’s
representative in Contractor’s site office/work site.
15.6.2 The office accommodation for Employer’s Representative shall include furniture, fan,
air conditioner, drinking water facilities etc. .
15.6.3 Deleted
Page: GS 14-2 of 6
Draft No. DFA/3337
15.6.4 Office facilities and equipment provided for the use of Employer’s Representative
shall be maintained in a clean and suitable condition and all containers shall be
replenished if required.
15.6.5 If any facility is to be removed/curtailed, the permission of the Employer’s

Representative shall be obtained.
15.6.6 The accommodation to be provided for the Employer’s Representative can be used
for the Contractor’s staff associated with the Project, if necessary.
15.6.7 All accommodation and equipment for the Employer’s Representative shall be
provided throughout the course of the Works and for so long a period of time during
the Defects Liability Period as the Employer’s Representative may require.
15.6.8 The Contractor’s proposals for the construction of the office shall be submitted for
review by the Employer’s Representative within 14 days of the Commencement Date
of the Works and erected within 60 days of the Commencement Date of the Works.
15.6.9 The Contractor shall, when advised in writing by the Employer’s Representative,
remove the accommodation and equipment, leaving the Site in a clean and tidy
condition.
15.7 Clearance of the Site

Temporary Works, which are not to remain on the Site after the Employer’s Taking
Over of the Works, shall be removed on the Employer’s Taking Over of the Works or
at such other time(s) as instructed by the Employer’s Representative. The Site shall
be cleared and reinstated to the lines and levels and to the same condition as existed
before the Works started except as otherwise stated in the Contract.
15.8 Attendance
15.8.1 Offices for the Employer or the Employer’s Representative
Unless otherwise stated in the Contract, the Employer or the Employer’s
Representative may supply his own temporary accommodation on the Site at
locations indicated in the Contract or in writing. The Contractor shall afford, provide
and maintain free and unhindered access to such Employer or the Employer’s
Representative’s Site offices and parking areas and for the Employer or the
Employer’s Representative’s Site officers, contractors and workmen as may be
necessary for installation, inspection, maintenance, repair and removal of the
aforesaid Employer or the Employer’s Representative’s Site offices and the services
thereto.
15.8.2 Attendance on the Employer or the Employer’s Representative

The Contractor shall provide all necessary assistance to the Employer or the
Employer’s Representative, including adequate and safe means of access to all parts
of the Site to assist him in carrying out his duties and responsibilities under the
Contract. Such assistance shall not include the provision of full-time attendance upon
the Employer or the Employer’s Representative.
15.8.3 Attendance on the Commissioner of Metro Rail Safety or other inspecting

authorities.
15.8.3.1 The Contractor shall afford all necessary attendance upon the Commissioner of metro
Rail Safety or other inspecting authorities Inspectorate during their inspections
including adequate and safe means of access to appropriate parts of the Site.
15.8.3.2 The Contractor shall provide all documents necessary for inspection as are requested
by the above authorities.
Page: GS 14-3 of 6
Draft No. DFA/3337
15.8.4 Not used
15.8.5 Attendance on Other Contractors

15.8.5.1 The Contractor shall provide general and special attendance on Other Contractors
who will be carrying out the execution of electrical and mechanical and other works on
the Site. Reference shall be made to the PS to determine the full extent of such
attendance.
15.8.5.2 General attendance shall include but not be limited to providing for accepting
deliveries, unloading and storing materials for the Other Contractors on the Site and
allowing the Other Contractors space for their site offices, and all reasonable access
and facilities for the proper execution of their work including the free use of access
roads, craneage, scaffolding, ladders, stores, mess rooms, sanitary and welfare
facilities provided that these facilities are normally available on the Site at the time.
15.8.5.3 Intentionally left blank
15.8.5.4 Special attendance shall include but not be limited to cutting of holes and other
openings, forming chases, providing built-in sleeves, grouting in bolts, anchors,
brackets, base plates, frames and the like, including making good to the disturbed
work and cleaning after completion of the disturbed work.
15.8.6 Attendance by Other Contractors

15.8.6.1 Where provided for under the Contract, the Contractor shall receive attendance from
Other Contractors. The Contractor shall ensure that by receiving such attendance, it
does not hinder, obstruct or otherwise frustrate the Other Contractor that is providing
the attendance in any way.
15.9 Contractor’s Equipment

The Employer’s Representative reserves the right to order the immediate removal and
replacement of any Contractor’s Equipment that, in his opinion, is unsatisfactory for its
purpose.
15.10 Security
15.10.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for the security of the works area for Contractor’s
accommodation and shall provide and maintain fencing.
15.10.2 The Contractor shall provide adequate training to its security staff to ensure that they
are able to discharge their security duties properly.
15.10.3 The Contractor shall establish and maintain contingency plans to cope with
emergency situations such as fire, flooding, serious damage to the Works, etc.
15.10.4 The Employer’s security staff will conduct inspections and security audits on the Site
and the works area for Contractor’s accommodation from time to time. The
Employer’s Representative will give recommendations for improvement arising from
the inspections and security audits to the Contractor. However, managing the
security of the Site and the works area for Contractor’s accommodation remain the
Contractor’s responsibility.
* End of Chapter *
Page: GS 14-4 of 6
Draft No. DFA/3337
CHAPTER 16
16. LIAISON WITH OTHERS

16.1 Liaison with Others
16.1.1 The Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements with and obtain the necessary
approvals from Government departments, utility undertakings and other duly
constituted authorities for the execution of the Works.
16.1.2 The Contractor shall maintain close liaison with Other Contractors and other
contractors employed by the Employer, utility undertakings or other authorities who
are carrying out work on or adjacent to the Site. The Contractor shall ensure as far as
possible that the progress of the Works is not adversely affected by the activities of
such other entities.
16.2 Work by Other Contractors

16.2.1 The contractor shall keep note of the works which may be proceeding on various
adjacent areas by others include, but is not limited to, those listed in the PS. The
Employer’s Representative will keep the Contractor informed of forthcoming work by
Other Contractors in the proximity of the Site.
16.2.2 The Contractor shall provide reasonable access to such contractors and any other
adjacent contractors and shall where necessary liase with the appropriate contractors,
utility undertakings and other duly constituted authorities on details of interdependent
phasing. The Contractor shall notify the Employer’s Representative and other
concerned entities at least 14 days in advance should he wish to alter these access
arrangements during the course of the Works.
16.3 Interface Management

16.3.1 The Contractor shall co-ordinate with Relevant Authorities and Other Contractors in
the execution of the Works.
16.3.2 The Contractor shall interface and liase with Other Contractors to ensure the effective
and compatible co-ordination of all aspects of the installation and testing of the
Works. The Employer’s Representative shall be kept fully informed at all stages of
the Works.
16.3.3 The Contractor shall assign a person as the interface contact for each Other
Contractor to actively manage the progress of each interface to ensure adherence to
the jointly developed Interface Management Plan.
16.3.4 Throughout the process, the Contractor shall liase with Other Contractors to develop
interface designs in conjunction and co-operation with the designers of interfacing
systems. Interfacing systems include, but are not limited to, those listed in the PS /
TS. These interface designs will be monitored and reviewed by the Employer’s
Representative but the Contractor shall work directly with the Other interfacing
Contractors to develop designs which are mutually acceptable to all parties. The
Employer’s Representative will provide details of the Other Contractors as contracts
are awarded.
16.3.5 The Employer’s Representative may, at his discretion, attend the Contractor’s
meetings with Other interfacing Contractors. The Contractor shall give the Employer’s
Representative a minimum of 7 days notice of all meetings to be held with any Other
interfacing Contractors, or 14 days notice if the meeting is to be outside New Delhi. If
Page: GS 15-1 of 3
Draft No. DFA/3337
insufficient notice is given to the Employer’s Representative, he may require the

meeting to be postponed to a later date to enable him to attend.
16.3.6 The Contractor shall provide the Employer’s Representative with two copies of the
minutes of all meetings within 14 days of each meeting and also two copies of all
correspondence with any Other Contractor.
16.3.7 The Contractor shall attend co-ordination meetings chaired by the Employer’s
Representative at no greater than monthly intervals to discuss and ensure that
designs are correct and that conflicts in E&M services requirements between the
Contractor and Other Contractors are identified and resolved.
16.3.8 The Contractor shall co-ordinate his installation activities with the Other Contractors.
The Contractor shall ensure that there is no interference to the work of the Other
Contractors and shall maintain close co-ordination with Other Contractors working on
or adjacent to the Works to ensure that their work can progress in a smooth and
orderly manner.
16.3.9 The Contractor shall be given access to the various parts of the Site by the dates
relative to the Works Programme defined in the ITT and the PS as Access Dates.
The ITT and the PS specify certain Key Dates by which the Contractor shall complete
certain parts of his Works to enable work to be undertaken by the Other Contractors.
These dates may be subject to adjustment by the Employer’s Representative in
consultation with the Contractor and the Other Contractors to ensure the progress of
the Project.
16.3.10 The Contractor's responsibility shall include provision of and receipt from Other
Contractors or the Employer’s Representative of information required for construction
of the Works and the installation of the Works and Contractor's Equipment, insofar as
that requirement is specified in or can reasonably be inferred from the Contract.
Where the execution of work by a Other Contractor depends upon the Contractor’s
Site management or upon information to be given by the Contractor, the Contractor
shall provide the Other Contractor with either the required services or the correct and
accurate information required to enable the Other Contractor to meet his programme
for the construction or installation of his works.
16.3.11 In the event of any disagreement as to the extent of services or information required
to be exchanged between the Contractor and another Contractor, the Employer’s
Representative shall determine the requirements and this determination shall be final
and binding on the Contractor and the Other Contractor.
16.3.12 The Contractor shall co-ordinate his testing and commissioning activities with the
Other Contractors. The Contractor shall ensure that there is no interference to the
work of the Other Contractors and shall maintain close co-ordination with Other
Contractors working on or adjacent to the Works to ensure that their testing and
commissioning work can progress in a smooth and orderly manner.
* End of Chapter *
Page: GS 15-2 of 3
Draft No. DFA/3337
CHAPTER 17
17. THE SITE

17.1 Access to Site
The Contractor will be given access to the Site in accordance with following
conditions.
17.2 Site Restrictions

17.2.1 The particular use to which the Site is put shall be submitted to the Employer’s
Representative for review within 14 days of the Commencement Date of the Works
and the Contractor shall:
(1) confine his use of the areas of the Site to purposes having been reviewed
without objection by the Employer’s Representative who reserves the
right to extend, amend or restrict the uses to which areas of the Site will
be put;
(2) where required under the Contract, provide and maintain fencing and
lighting around and within the areas of the Site when or where necessary
for the safety and convenience of the public or others or as directed;
(3) refrain from depositing rubbish or causing nuisance or permitting

nuisance to be caused and, except where reviewed without objection by
the Employer’s Representative, depositing earth on or removing earth
from areas of the Site;
(4) Deleted
(5) refrain from obstructing manholes, utility access points and the like; and
(6) Deleted
17.2.2 Work other than that necessary for completion of the Works shall not be carried out
on the Site.
17.2.3 While the Contractor is being given access to the Site, he shall provide means of
distributing loads imposed by Contractor’s Equipment and prevent damage to utility
services.
17.2.4 Except where otherwise provided, the Contractor shall not permit any person to reside
on the Site.
17.2.5 Unless otherwise stated, the Contractor shall pay all rates and charges of any nature
whatsoever arising out of his use of the Site and all work areas provided therein under
the Contract.The location and size of stockpile material, including excavated material
within the Site, shall be submitted to the Employer’s Representative for review. All
stockpiles shall be maintained at all times in a stable condition.
17.2.6 The Contractor shall not allow animals to be brought onto or kept on the Site.
17.2.7 The Contractor’s attention is drawn to the Waste Disposal Regulation currently
prevalent in Delhi, regarding storage, transportation and disposal of chemical waste.
The Contractor’s proposed methods and chemicals to be used in cleaning shall be
submitted for review by the Employer’s Representative.
Page: GS 16-1 of 6
Draft No. DFA/3337
17.2.8 No rock crushing or screening facilities shall be set up on Site unless reviewed by the
Relevant Authorities and reviewed without objection by the Employer’s
Representative.
17.3 Site Services

17.3.1 Deleted
17.3.2 The Contractor shall provide such services for use solely in connection with the
proper execution of the Works. The Contractor shall comply with all regulations of the
utility companies and Government departments concerned. The Contractor shall
provide and maintain installations associated with such services and in relation
thereto and shall take all reasonable precautions to safeguard the safety and health of
all persons and the security of the Site. The Employer’s Representative may demand
the immediate disconnection or alteration of such installations or portions thereof he
considers as being prejudicial to safety, health or security. As soon as any or all of
the Contractor’s installations are no longer required for the execution of the Works,
they shall be entirely removed to the satisfaction of the Employer’s Representative.
17.3.3 Deleted
17.3.4 The Employer’s Representative will instruct the Contractor as to the requirements for
Site services to be connected to the Employer’s Representative’s portable Site
accommodation at any given location and the Contractor shall provide and maintain
these services during his use of the Site.
17.4 Site Cleanliness

17.4.1 Deleted
17.4.2 Deleted
17.4.3 Deleted
17.4.4 Deleted
17.4.5 Deleted
17.5 Prevention of Mosquito Breeding

17.5.1 Measures shall be taken to prevent mosquito breeding on the Site. The measures to
be taken shall include the following:
(1) empty cans, oil drums, packing and other receptacles which may retain
water shall be deposited at a central collection point and those not
required for future use shall be removed from the Site regularly;
(2) standing water shall be treated at least once every week with an
environmental acceptable oil which will prevent mosquito breeding; and
(3) Contractor’s Equipment and other items on the Site that may retain water
shall be stored, covered or treated in such a manner that water will not
be retained.
(4) Anti mosquito breeding sprays should be done in the area during the
rainy season at frequent intervals.
17.5.2 Posters in both English and Hindi drawing attention to the dangers of permitting
mosquito breeding shall be obtained from the Delhi Government and displayed
Page: GS 16-2 of 6
Draft No. DFA/3337
prominently on the Site, to the requirement of the Enactments. These posters shall
be removed on Employer’s Taking Over of the Works.
17.6 Deleted
17.7 Deleted
17.8 Deleted
17.9 Access to the Site by Other Contractors

17.9.1 Due to the multi-discipline nature of the Project, several different parties may require
access to the same portion of the Site during the construction phase for the
installation, erection and testing of the Works. To facilitate the organisation and co-
ordination of access and occupation requirements, including the use of Works Trains,
if any, the Employer’s Representative will issue and maintain a TRIP as referred to in
clause 1.1 above.
17.9.2 The TRIP will be developed from the declared requirements of all Project Contractors
and others having need of access and occupancy, at the weekly Works Train
Meeting. The TRIP will be subject to revision and updating to reflect changing
circumstances during the progress of the Project.
17.9.3 The Contractor shall work in accordance with the arrangements prescribed by the
TRIP.
17.9.4 The Contractor shall ensure that his working arrangements on the Site conform to the
agreements made with the Employer’s Representative during establishment of the
TRIP requirements. In particular, the Contractor shall ensure that his occupancy does
not extend either physically or chronologically beyond the agreed boundaries.
17.10 Transportation to Site

17.10.1 The Contractor shall use such routes and rights of entry to the Site as may be decided
by the Employer’s Representative from time to time. Routes for very large or very
heavy loads shall be discussed with the Employer’s Representative in advance of the
need arising and all arrangements therefor shall be submitted for review by the
17.10.2 In this context, the definition of the terms “very large” and “very heavy” refer to articles
that cannot be transported by normal road vehicles or be handled by readily available
methods. Where doubt exists, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to notify
and discuss the nature of the load in question with the Employer’s Representative in
accordance with clause 17.10.1 above.
17.10.3 The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of the Commissioner of Transport
and /or the Commissioner of Police and / or any other Relevant Authority regarding
any special traffic arrangements that may be necessary. The Contractor’s attention is
drawn to the Road Traffic (Regulation and Licensing of Vehicles) Regulations and the
Road Traffic (Construction and Use) Regulations currently in use at Delhi.
17.10.4 Extraordinary traffic may be moved from docks and between areas of the Site over
public highways only by police escort and on a route and at a time determined by the
Relevant Authority. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining permission from
the Relevant Authorities to move extraordinary loads and traffic and for arranging
police escorts as necessary.
Page: GS 16-3 of 6
Draft No. DFA/3337
17.10.5 The Contractor shall make all arrangements and assume full responsibility for
transportation to the Site of all Contractor’s Equipment, materials and supplies
needed for the proper execution of the Works.
17.10.6 While travelling to and from the Site, the Contractor shall observe all posted speed
limits, traffic regulations, stop signs, etc., and adherence to the access route indicated
on the Employer’s Drawings or as instructed by the Employer’s Representative. No
employee of the Contractor shall trespass into any part of the Employer's premises
other than the Site or the designated route of access.
17.10.7 The Contractor shall ensure that all roads and pavements, etc. leading to and around
the Site are kept free from obstructions and shall not cause inconvenience or
hindrance to traffic or persons either by its vehicles or by its workmen, scaffolding,
plant, materials, equipment, etc.
17.10.8 The Contractor shall repair damage to existing roads, footpaths, steps, cables,
sewers, live drains, etc. and shall reinstate any damage caused by the Contractor’s
actions.
17.11 Contractor’s Own Rolling Stock

17.11.1 Where the Contractor is to provide rolling stock (either self-propelled or trailing) for
use during the installation and testing of the Works, the requirements of clause 17.12
below shall apply. All the Contractor’s own rolling stock shall not exceed the
Construction Vehicle Load Gauge as shown in the Specification Drawings except with
the Employer’s Representative’s written consent.
17.11.2 The Contractor shall submit full details of any rolling stock that is to be used during
the installation and testing of the Works to the Employer’s Representative for review
within 90 days of the Commencement Date of the Works. Such details shall include a
full description and drawings of the rolling stock, details of axle load, stopping
distance, fail-safe braking system, kinematic envelope, and operating and
maintenance instructions.
17.11.3 Deleted
17.11.4 Prior to use, and following each maintenance examination, the Contractor’s qualified
engineer shall certify the Contractor’s own rolling stock as fit-to-run. Thereafter, the
Contractor’s qualified engineer shall issue a registration tag. The expiry date, i.e. the
date of the next inspection, shall be shown on the registration tag. The Contractor’s
own rolling stock shall not be used without a valid registration tag.
17.11.5 Deleted
17.11.6 If the Contractor’s own rolling stock is found to be operating in an unsatisfactory or

unsafe condition, it shall be immediately removed until it has been restored to an
acceptable condition to the satisfaction of the Employer’s Representative.
17.12 Defined Area Working and Works Train Operations

17.12.1 When the Project under construction has been made available for track related
electrical and mechanical installation works, the area will be classified as a Defined
Area within which Works Trains will be operated.
17.12.2 All persons whose duties require them to work within a Defined Area must observe
safety rules and procedures to be provided by the contractor and reviewed without
objection by the Employer’s Representative. It shall provide procedures and guidance
for the safety of all persons in the Defined Area.
Page: GS 16-4 of 6
Draft No. DFA/3337
17.12.3 Deleted
17.12.4 Persons working on or near tracks in a Defined Area, either by themselves or

supervising a working party, must be suitably trained and qualified by the Employer or
his delegates in the safety provisions of the Works Train Manual. Persons who are not
qualified shall not attempt to gain access to the railway tracks unless accompanied by
a qualified person.
17.12.5 When overhead lines are energised, EMUs may be running at high speed for testing.
No work may be undertaken on either the Up or Down tracks when test trains are
running. Procedures for gaining access to the energised track will be detailed in the
Works Train Manual. The Contractor shall make requests for gaining access to the
energised track at the weekly Works Train Meetings.
17.13 Not used

* End of Chapter *
Page: GS 16-5 of 6
Draft No. DFA/3337
Draft No. DFA/3337
CHAPTER 18
18. HEALTH AND SAFETY

Please refer to Conditions of “Contract on Safety, Health and Environment”
Page: GS 17-1 of 12
Draft No. DFA/3337
Draft No. DFA/3337
CHAPTER 19
19. DAMAGE AND INTERFERENCE

19.1 Damage and Interference
19.1.1 Work shall be carried out in such a manner that, as far as is practicable, there is no
damage to or interference with the following, other than such damage as is
necessitated to enable the execution of the Works:
(1) watercourses or drainage systems;
(2) utilities;
(3) structures, roads including street furniture, or other property;
(4) public or private vehicular or pedestrian accesses;
(5) trees, graves or burial urns; and
(6) existing railways and railway systems.
The Contractor shall obtain prior approval of the concerned authority or party, if so
required, for any work near properties under their ownership or management.
The Contractor shall inform the Employer’s Representative as soon as practicable of

any item, utility or thing which is not stated in the Contract as requiring diversion,
removal or relocation but which the Contractor considers as requiring diversion,
removal or relocation to enable the Works to be executed. The Contractor shall not
divert, remove or relocate any such item, utility or thing without such diversion,
removal or relocation having been reviewed without objection by the Employer’s
Representative.
19.1.2 Items which are damaged or interfered with as a result of the Works being carried out
and items which are diverted, removed or relocated to enable the Works to be carried
out, shall be reinstated to the same condition as existed before the Works started or
to such condition as may be reviewed without objection or instructed by the
19.1.3 The Contractor shall excavate by hand where damage may be caused by the
operation of mechanical plant adjacent to any utilities.
19.1.4 Except with the prior approval of the Delhi Fire Services, no damage or interference
with existing fire hydrants and valves shall be caused.
19.1.5 Prior to trench excavation, the Contractor shall carry out investigations to locate
utilities by means of hand-dug inspection pits. The locations and number of
inspection pits required in meeting the Contractor’s obligations to establish the
location of existing utilities and underground features shall be determined by the
Contractor. The Contractor shall note that many existing
pipes/ducts/cables may not be shown in the records kept by the utility undertakings,
and may only be exposed as the excavation proceeds. The trench excavation shall
be carried out by hand where there are utilities adjacent to or within the excavation
works and the Contractor shall have allowed in his programme the time required for
the exposing, temporary support and diversion of these recorded or unrecorded
utilities. Should any pipes/ducts/cables or cover tiles be exposed, the respective
utility undertaking shall be contacted to determine if all the utilities have been located.
Cover tiles and utilities shall only be removed by the utility undertakings concerned.
Page: GS 18-1 of 9
Draft No. DFA/3337
19.1.6 Where the Employer’s Representative has conducted utility and ground investigation
on behalf of the Employer, the Contractor may obtain the data obtained from the
investigations from the Employer’s Representative in accordance with clause 1.7.2
above and subject to the condition of clause 19.3 below.
19.2 Watercourses and Drainage Systems

19.2.1 Existing watercourses and drainage systems shall be temporarily diverted as required
to enable the Works to be carried out. Particulars of the proposed diversions shall be
submitted to the Employer’s Representative for review at least 14 days before the
relevant work starts. Diversions shall be constructed to the satisfaction of the
Employer’s Representative with such alignment and in such manner that the flow is
discharged adequately and effectively without causing flooding or erosion to the adjacent
area. The diversions shall be maintained while the work is being carried out and shall
be reinstated, including the removal of any obstructions to flow, as soon as
practicable after the work is complete.
19.2.2 Measures shall be taken to prevent excavated material, silt or debris from being
deposited in existing drainage systems, watercourses or the river.
19.2.3 Under no circumstances shall foul sewage flow be diverted into existing storm-water
drains and vice versa.
19.2.4 The Contractor shall adequately maintain the existing drainage and sewerage systems
at all times including removal of solids in sand traps, manholes, gullies and streambeds.
19.2.5 The Contractor shall discharge water surface run-off from the Site into storm drains
via adequately designed sand/silt removal facilities such as sand traps, silt traps and
sediment basins. Channels or sandbag barriers shall be provided on Site to properly
direct the storm water to such silt removal facilities. The Contractor shall remove all
silt, which may have accumulated in the drainage or sewerage systems whether
within the Site, or not. If at any time such provisions prove to be ineffective, the
Contractor shall take such additional measures as the Employer’s Representative
deems necessary.
19.2.6 Water pumped out of the trenches under construction shall be discharged into storm
drains after the removal of silt in silt removal facilities.
19.2.7 The Contractor shall maintain the silt removal facilities, channels and manholes and
remove the deposited silt and grit regularly, at the onset and after each rainstorm to
ensure that these facilities are functioning properly at all times.
19.2.8 No obstruction to flow is to be left in position longer than is necessary for carrying out
the Works. The Contractor shall ensure that adequate provisions are made for
dealing with increased flow of water during the wet season.
19.2.9 The Contractor shall keep interruption or disturbance to the public due to the diversion
works to a minimum.
19.2.10 If any mechanical equipment is required for the foul sewage diversion work, the
Contractor shall suggest and provide precautionary measures to mitigate against
consequences of break down of the equipment.
19.2.11 The Contractor shall at all times ensure that all existing stream courses and drains
within and adjacent to the Site are kept safe and free from any debris and any
excavated materials arising from the Works. The Contractor shall ensure that
chemicals and concrete agitator washings are not deposited in watercourses.
19.2.12 The Contractor shall be responsible for the Temporary Works involved in training,
diverting, or conducting of open streams or drains intercepted by the Works and the
Page: GS 18-2 of 9
Draft No. DFA/3337
Site, for the maintenance of the Temporary Works and waterways as required by the
Employer’s Representative, and for reinstating these to their original courses on
Employer’s Taking Over of the Works, when and where in the opinion of the
Employer’s Representative such action is desirable.
19.2.13 The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to prevent water entering upon or
being discharged from the Site, from entering upon the works of adjacent contractors
or adjacent properties.
19.2.14 The Contractor shall provide where necessary temporary water courses, floodwalls,
flood gates, ditches, drains, pumping or other means of maintaining the Works and
the Site free of water.
19.3 Utilities
19.3.1 The details of existing utilities are given by the employer for information only and the
accuracy of the details is not guaranteed. The Contractor shall make his own
enquiries and shall carefully excavate trial holes to locate accurately the utilities
indicated to him by the utility undertakings.
19.3.2 Temporary supports and protection to utilities shall be provided by methods reviewed
without objection by the Employer’s Representative. Permanent supports and
protection shall be provided if instructed by the Employer’s Representative.
19.3.3 The Contractor shall inform the Employer’s Representative and the utility
undertakings without delay of the following:
(1) damage to utilities;
(2) leakage of utilities;
(3) discovery of utilities not shown on any drawings; and
(4) diversion, removal, repositioning or re-erection of utilities which is

required to enable the execution of the Works.
19.3.4 The Contractor shall take all steps necessary to enable the utility undertakings to
proceed in accordance with the programme agreed between the Contractor and the
utility undertakings under clause 2.2.2 above. The Contractor shall maintain close
liaison with the utility undertakings and shall inform the Employer’s Representative of
any delays in works by the utility undertakings.
19.3.5 The Contractor shall keep records of existing utilities encountered on the Site and a
copy provided for the Employer’s Representative. The records shall be submitted for
review by the Employer’s Representative and shall contain the following details:
(1) location of utility;
(2) date on which utility was encountered;
(3) nature and size of utility;
(4) condition of utility; and
(5) temporary or permanent supports provided.
19.3.6 The Contractor shall co-ordinate the activities of the utility undertakings in connection
with the diversion of utility services necessary for the execution of the Works.
Page: GS 18-3 of 9
Draft No. DFA/3337
19.3.7 The Contractor shall set up and manage a Utilities Liaison Group for the duration of
the Contract. The Group shall meet at a frequency to be as instructed by the
Employer’s Representative but at least once a month, and shall discuss and resolve
matters associated with utility undertakings on programming, co-ordination and
action. The Contractor shall ensure that all relevant utility undertakings and the
Employer’s Representative are represented at the meetings.
19.3.8 The Contractor shall inform the Employer’s Representative of the date, time and place
of every meeting with utility undertakings and he shall copy all correspondence and
minutes of meetings to the Employer’s Representative.
19.3.9 The programme for any section of work to be carried out by a utility undertaking shall
be confirmed in writing by the Contractor to the utility undertaking no more than four
weeks and no less than one week before the agreed scheduled start date for that
section of Works, such confirmation to be notified to the Employer’s Representative.
19.3.10 The Contractor shall monitor the progress of utility undertakings against the agreed
programmes and shall notify the Employer’s Representative of any slippage to these
programmes. The agreed programmes shall mean those programmes agreed in
writing by the Contractor and the various utility undertakings described in 19.3.9
above.
19.3.11 In the event of any such slippage, the Contractor shall prepare and execute a plan of
action with the relevant utility undertaking to redress the slippage. Such a plan may, if
necessary, include provision of Contractor’s labour resources, materials and/or plant
to the utility undertaking.
19.3.12 The Contractor shall ensure that the peak particle velocity and amplitude of ground
movement due to temporary sheet pile driving for trench excavation or any other
construction activities, as measured by a vibrograph at all water mains within or
adjacent to the Site shall not exceed the values specified in Table 19-1of this GS.
Type of structure or Peak particle Vibration amplitude

installation velocity (mm/s) (mm)
13 0.1
Water retaining structures
Water tunnels
25 0.2
Water mains
Other structures and pipes
Table 19-1 – Peak Particle Velocity & Vibration Amplitude
19.3.13 Hand digging method shall always be employed where there are utilities adjacent to
or within the trench excavation works. Portable mechanical tools may be used but
shall be restricted to the breaking of the pavement surface. Due care shall be
exercised to prevent damage to the underground cables, water pipes, gas pipes or
other utility installations.
19.3.14 Exposed utility installations shall be adequately supported and protected from
accidental damage.
19.3.15 Smoking and use of naked flames shall be prohibited if gas pipes are present, or
pipes the use of which are not identified are present.
Page: GS 18-4 of 9
Draft No. DFA/3337
19.4 Structures, Roads and Other Property

19.4.1 The Contractor shall immediately inform the Employer’s Representative of any
damage to structures, roads or other property that is not required for the execution of
the Works.
19.4.2 The Contractor shall use every reasonable means to prevent any of the highways or
bridges connecting with, or on the routes to, the Site from being damaged by any
traffic of the Contractor or any of his sub-contractors of any tier and the Contractor
shall, in particular, select routes, choose and use vehicles and restrict and distribute
loads so that the moving of Temporary Works, Permanent Works and Contractor's
Equipment from and to the Site shall be organised as far as reasonably possible so
that no unnecessary damage or injury may be occasioned to such highways and
bridges. The Contractor shall in selecting such routes take advice from and follow the
instructions of the Commissioner for Transport and other Relevant Authorities of
GNCTD and GOI.
19.4.3 Should the Commissioner for Transport or any other Relevant Authority or the
Contractor be of the opinion that it should be necessary to move one or more loads of
Temporary Works, Permanent Works or Contractor's Equipment over a highway or
bridge the moving of which is likely to damage any highway or bridge unless special
protection or strengthening is carried out then the Contractor shall, before moving the
load on to such highway or bridge, give notice to the Employer’s Representative of
the weight and other particulars of the load to be moved and request the protection or
strengthening of the said highway or bridge. If within 14 (fourteen) days of receipt of
such notice the Employer’s Representative directs in writing that such protection or
strengthening is unnecessary then the Contractor may move the said load or loads
over the said highway or bridge but otherwise the Contractor shall not move the said
load or loads until notified by the Employer’s Representative of the route which he
may use.
19.4.4 If during the execution of the Works or at any time thereafter the Contractor shall
receive any claim arising out of the execution of the Works in respect of damage or
injury to highways or bridges he shall immediately report the same to the Employer’s
Representative and thereafter the Employer shall negotiate the settlement of and pay
all sums due in respect of each claim and shall indemnify the Contractor in respect
thereof and in respect of all claims, demands, proceedings, damages, costs, charges
and expenses whatsoever in relation thereto. Provided always that if and so far any
such claim or part thereof shall in the opinion of the Employer’s Representative be
due to any failure on the part of the Contractor to observe and perform his obligations
under clauses 19.4.2 above and 19.4.3 above, the amount certified by the Employer’s
Representative to be due to such failure shall be paid by the Contractor to the
Employer.
19.4.5 Where the nature of the Works is such as to require the use by the Contractor of
water-borne transport, the foregoing provisions of this Clause shall be construed as
though "highway" includes any river or other structure related to, on or beneath a
waterway, and "vehicle" includes craft, vessels or platforms and shall be read and
construed accordingly.
19.4.6 If in the course of or for the purposes of the execution of the Works or any part thereof
any highway or road or way shall have been damaged, broken or broken into then
notwithstanding anything herein contained:
(a) If the permanent reinstatement of such highway or road or way is to be

carried out by the appropriate Relevant Authority or by some person
other than the Contractor or any sub-contractor of any tier to him, the
Contractor shall:
Page: GS 18-5 of 9
Draft No. DFA/3337
(i) at his own cost and independently of any requirement of or notice

from the Employer’s Representative be responsible for the
temporary reinstatement of such highway, road or way and the
making good of any subsidence or shrinkage or other defect,
imperfection, settlement or fault in the temporary reinstatement of
such highway, road or way and for the execution of any necessary
repair or amendment thereof from whatever cause the necessity
arises until the end of the Defects Liability Period in respect of the
part of the Permanent Works beneath or over such highway, road
or way or until the Relevant Authority or such other person as
aforesaid shall have taken possession of the highway, road or way
for the purpose of carrying out permanent reinstatement, whichever
is the earlier; and
(ii) indemnify and save harmless the Employer against and from any
damage or injury to the Employer or claims by third parties arising
out of or in consequence of any neglect or failure of the Contractor
to comply with the foregoing obligations or any of them, and
against and from all claims, demands, proceedings, damages,
costs, charges and expenses whatsoever in respect thereof or in
relation thereto; and
b) as from the end of such Defects Liability Period or the taking of possession
of such highway, road or way referred to in clause 19.4.6(a)(i) above
whichever shall first happen, the Employer shall indemnify and save
harmless the Contractor against and from any damage or injury to the
Contractor arising out of or in consequence of or in connection with the said
permanent reinstatement or any defect, imperfection or failure of or in such
permanent reinstatement and against and from all claims, demands,
proceedings, damages, costs, charges and expenses whatsoever in respect
thereof or in relation thereto.
19.4.7 Where the Relevant Authority or other person referred to in clause 19.4.6 above shall
take possession of the highway, road or way as aforesaid in sections or lengths, the
responsibility of the Contractor under clause 19.4.6 above shall cease in regard to
any such section or length at the time at which possession thereof is so taken. But
shall during the continuance of the said Defects Liability Period continue to be
responsible for any section or length of which possession has not been taken and the
indemnities given by the Contractor and Employer respectively under clause 19.4.6
above shall be construed and have effect accordingly.
19.5 Access
Alternative access shall be provided if interference with existing public or private
vehicular or pedestrian access is necessary to enable the execution of the Works.
The arrangements for the alternative access shall be as reviewed without objection by
the Employer’s Representative. The permanent access shall be reinstated as soon
as practicable after the work is complete and the alternative access shall be removed
as soon as practicable after it is no longer required.
19.6 Trees and Other Similar Obstructions

19.6.1 Trees which are to be retained or which are not required to be removed in order to
carry out the Works, shall be protected from damage at all times by methods
reviewed without objection by the Employer’s Representative. Materials, including
excavated materials, shall not be banked around such trees and they shall not be
trimmed or cut without having been reviewed without objection by the Employer’s
Representative.
Page: GS 18-6 of 9
Draft No. DFA/3337
19.6.2 If any trees or other obstructions are required to be removed during the execution of
the Works which are not specifically required to be removed or otherwise catered for,
the Contractor shall draw the attention of the Employer’s Representative to them and
shall not remove them without having received a notice of no objection from the
19.7 Noise Control on Works Site

19.7.1 All Contractor’s Equipment shall be effectively “sound-reduced” by means of
silencers, mufflers, acoustics linings or shields or acoustic sheds or screens to levels
prescribed in the relevant Noise Control Ordinance and measured outside the nearest
occupied property or to the satisfaction of the Employer’s Representative. The
Contractor shall provide details of proposed noise control measures to the Employer’s
Representative for review prior to the use of any Contractor’s Equipment on the Site.
19.7.2 Provided that the provisions of this Paragraph shall not be applicable in the case of
emergency work necessary to save life or property or for the safety of the Works or in
the case of blasting operations necessitated by urgency and reviewed by the
19.7.3 The Contractor shall provide a sound level meter (as specified in this Specification),
reviewed without objection by the Employer’s Representative, for the exclusive use of
the Employer’s Representative at all times during the continuance of the Contract.
19.8 Spoil Disposal

19.8.1 The Contractor shall make his own enquiries and arrangements regarding the location
and the availability of spoil disposal areas and reclamation and shall pay all costs of
complying with all regulations and requirements of Relevant Authorities in connection
with the use of such areas. These areas are not within the control of the Employer
and no claims will be entertained in respect of non-availability of a particular areas or
changes in the costs of arrangements for the use thereof.
19.8.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for all necessary liaison to ensure compliance
with the requirements of unproductive disposal of any surplus excavated rock or soft
material which is suitable for filling
19.8.3 The Contractor shall conform to all pertinent Environmental Protection Ordinances
and be liable for any breach of such Ordinances committed by himself and/or his sub-
contractors during the disposal of surplus excavated material and water from the Site.
* End of Chapter *
Page: GS 18-7 of 9
Draft No. DFA/3337
Draft No. DFA/3337
CHAPTER 20
20. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS

Please refer to “Conditions of Contract on Safety, Health and Environment”
Page: GS 19-1 of 9
Draft No. DFA/3337
Draft No. DFA/3337
CHAPTER 21
21. PHOTOGRAPHS
21.1 Photographs
21.1.1 Colour progress photographs showing the progress of the Works and the quality of
the materials and workmanship shall be taken by the Contractor. The photographs
shall be taken by a professional photographer, nominated by the Contractor and
reviewed without objection by the Employer’s Representative. Processing shall be
carried out by a competent processing firm, nominated by the Contractor and
reviewed without objection by the Employer’s Representative. The photographs shall
be taken under the direction of the Employer or the Employer’s Representative at
locations selected by the Employer or the Employer’s Representative. Photographs
shall be taken once every month and at other times instructed by the Employer or the
Employer’s Representative.21.1.2 One proof 3R print of each progress
photograph shall be provided to the Employer’s Representative not more than 2 days
after the photographs are taken. The Employer’s Representative shall select the sets
of progress photographs to be provided. The selected sets shall be provided not
more than 2 days after the Employer’s Representative has selected the sets. The
following shall be provided for the Employer’s Representative:
(1) one set of each selected progress photograph comprising the negatives
and three 3R prints;
(2) albums for the photographs and negatives; and
(3) printed labels for each photograph.
21.1.3 The Contractor shall provide to the Employer’s Representative the photographs
selected in clause above on Photo Compact Disks with a minimum resolution of 64
Base (4096 x 6144).
21.1.4 The Contractor may propose to the Employer’s Representative the use of a digital
photography system to meet the requirements of this Chapter. The Employer’s
Representative shall at his discretion, review the proposed system for practical and
technical compliance.
21.1.5 Colour progress photographs shall provide a fair representation of the Works. A
minimum of 24 photographs per month shall be submitted to the Employer’s
Representative.
* End of Chapter *
Page: GS21- 1 of 2
Draft No. DFA/3337
Page: GS21- 2 of 2
Draft No. DFA/3337
CHAPTER 22
22 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY SUPPLY

22.1 Electricity Supply for the Contractor by the Project Civil Contractors
Please Refer Clause 56 of SCC
22.2 Applicability
22.2.3 Where the Contractor is required to provide temporary electrical supplies, or to use, extend or
expand on temporary supplies installed by others, all such activity shall be executed in
accordance with clauses 22.3 to 22.19 inclusive.
22.2.4 When the Contractor makes use of temporary electrical supplies provided by other, viz.
Project (Civil) Contractors, he will observe and comply with the requirements of this Chapter.
22.3 Work on Site

22.3.3 The Contractor shall nominate a representative whose name and qualifications shall be
submitted in writing to the Employer’s Representative for review not later than 4 weeks before
the appointment and who shall be solely responsible for ensuring the safety of all temporary
electrical equipment on Site. The Contractor shall not install or operate any temporary Site
electrical systems until this representative is appointed and has commenced duties.
22.3.4 The name and contact telephone number of the representative having been reviewed without
objection by the Employer’s Representative shall be displayed at the main distribution board
for the temporary electrical supply so that he can be contacted in case of an emergency.
22.3.5 The Contractor shall submit schematic diagrams and the details of the equipment for all
temporary electrical installations, and these diagrams together with the temporary electrical
equipment shall be submitted to the Employer’s Representative for review.
22.3.6 All electrical installation work on Site shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements
laid down in BS 7375 and the Specification. All work shall be supervised or executed by
qualified and suitably categorised electricians, who are registered as such under the
Electricity Ordinance 1990/Electricity (Registration) Regulations 1990.
22.4 Electrical General
Temporary electrical Site installations and distribution systems shall be in accordance

with:-
(1) Indian Electrical Regulations;
(2) The Power Companies’ Supply Rules;
(3) Electricity and its subsidiary Regulations;
(4) IEE Wiring Regulations (16th Edition);
(5) BS 7375 Distribution of Electricity on Construction and Building Sites;
(6) BS 4363 Distribution Assemblies for Electricity Supplies for Construction

and Building Sites; and
Page: GS22- 1 of 6
Draft No. DFA/3337
(7) Any other applicable national standards
22.5 Materials, Appliances and Components
All materials, appliances and components used within the distribution system shall
comply with BS 4363 and BS 7375 Appendix A.
22.6 Mains Voltage

22.6.3 The Site mains voltage shall be as the Electricity Companies’ Utility supplies, 415V 3-phase 4
wire system.
22.6.4 Single-phase voltage shall be as the Electricity Companies' Utility supplies, 240V supply.
22.6.5 Reduced voltages shall conform to BS 7375.
22.7 Types of Distribution Supply

22.7.3 The following voltages shall be adhered to for typical applications throughout the distribution
systems:
(1) fixed plant - 415V 3 phase;
(2) movable plant fed by trailing cable - 415V 3 phase;
(3) installations in Site buildings - 240V 1 phase;
(4) fixed flood lighting – 240V 1 phase;
(5) portable and hand held tools - 115V 1 phase;
(6) Site lighting (other than flood lighting) - 115V 1 phase; and
(7) portable hand-lamps (general use) - 115V 1 phase.
22.7.4 When the low voltage supply is energised via the Employer's transformer, any power utilised
from that source shall be either 415V 3 phase or / 240V single phase as appropriate. The
Contractor shall carry out any conversion that may be necessary to enable him to use power
from that source.
22.8 Protection of Circuits

22.8.3 Protection shall be provided for all main and sub-circuits against excess current, residual
current and earth faults. The protective devices shall be capable of interrupting (without
damage to any equipment or the mains or sub-circuits) any short circuit current that may
occur.
22.8.4 Discrimination between circuit breakers, circuit breakers and fuses shall be in accordance
with:-
(1) BS 88;
(2) BS EN 60898; and
(3) BS 7375;
Page: GS22- 2 of 6
Draft No. DFA/3337
(4) Any other appropriate Indian Standards.
22.9 Earthing
22.9.3 Earthing and bonding shall be provided for all electrical installations and equipment to prevent
the possibility of dangerous voltage rises and to ensure that faults are rapidly cleared by
installed circuit protection.
22.9.4 Earthing systems shall conform to the following standards:-

(1) IEE Wiring Regulations (16th Edition);
(2) BS 7430;
(3) BS 7375; and
(4) IEEE Standard 80 Guide for Safety in AC Substation Grounding.
22.10 Plugs, Socket Outlets and Couplers
Low voltage plugs, sockets and couplers shall be colour coded in accordance with BS
7375, and constructed to conform to BS EN 60309. High voltage couplers and 'T'
connections shall be in accordance with BS 3905.
22.11 Cables
22.11.3 Cables shall be selected after full consideration of the conditions to which they will be
exposed and the duties for which they are required. Supply cables up to 3.3KV shall
be FR type in accordance with BS 6346/ IS 694. The cable armouring shall
be used as the earth return in conditions where the cable is continuously extended
and not subject to continuous movement after installation.
22.11.4 For supplies to mobile or transportable equipment where operation of the equipment
subjects the cable to flexing, the cable shall conform to one of the following standards
appropriate to the duties imposed on it:
(1) BS 6708 flexible cables for use at mines and quarries;
(2) BS 6007 rubber insulated cables for electric power and lighting; and
(3) BS 6500 insulated flexible cords and cables.
22.11.5
Where low voltage cables are to be used, reference shall be made to BS 7375. The
following standards shall also be referred to particularly for underground cables:-
(1) BS 6346 for armoured PVC insulated cables; and
(2) BS 6708 Flexible cables for use at mines and quarries.
22.11.6 All cables which have a voltage to earth exceeding 65 V (except for supplies from
welding transformers to welding electrodes) shall be of a type having a metal sheath
and/or armour which shall be continuous and effectively earthed. In the case of
Page: GS22- 3 of 6
Draft No. DFA/3337
flexible or trailing cables, such earthed metal sheath and/or armour shall be in
addition to the earth core in the cable and shall not be used as the sole earth
conductor.
22.11.7 Armoured cables having an over-sheath of polyvinyl chloride (PVC) or an oil resisting
and flame retardant compound shall be used whenever there is a risk of mechanical
damage occurring.
22.11.8 For resistance to the effects of sunlight, overall non-metallic covering of cables shall
be black in colour.
22.11.9 Cables which have applied to them a voltage to earth exceeding 12 V but not
normally exceeding 65 V shall be either one of the type as described in clause 0
above or alternatively of a type insulated and sheathed with a general purpose or
heat resisting elastomer.
22.11.10 All cables that are likely to be frequently moved in normal use shall be flexible cables.
22.11.5 Flexible cables shall be in accordance with BS 6500 and BS 7375.
22.12 Lighting Installation

22.12.3 Lighting circuits shall be run separate from other sub-circuits and shall be in
accordance with BS 7375 and BS 4363.
22.12.4 Voltage shall not exceed 55 V to earth except when the supply is to a fixed point and
where the lighting fixture is fixed in position.
22.12.5 Luminaries shall have a degree of protection not less than IP 54. In particularly bad
environments where the luminaries are exposed to excesses of dust and water, a
degree of protection to IP 65 shall be employed.
22.12.6 Where the Employer’s Representative requires Site inspection of the Works, the
Contractor shall upgrade the lighting level to a minimum of 200 lux by localised
lighting in all areas.
22.12.7 Use of wire guards or other such devices shall provide mechanical protection of
luminaries against damage by impact whenever risk of damage occurs.
22.13 Electrical Motors

22.13.3 Totally enclosed fan cooled motors to BS 4999:Part 105 shall be used.
22.13.4 Motor control and protection circuits shall be as stipulated in BS 6164. Emergency
stops for machinery shall be provided.
22.14 Inspection and Testing

Electrical installations on Site shall be inspected and tested in accordance with the
requirements of the IEE Wiring Regulations (16th Edition/ latest).
Page: GS22- 4 of 6
Draft No. DFA/3337
22.15 Identification
Identification labels of a type reviewed without objection by the Employer’s
Representative shall be affixed to all electrical switches, circuit breakers and motors
to specify their purpose.
22.16 Maintenance
Strict maintenance and regular checks of control apparatus and wiring distribution
systems shall be carried out by an electrician (duly qualified to carry out the said
checks) to ensure safe and efficient operation of the systems. The Contractor shall
submit for review by the Employer’s Representative details of his maintenance
schedule and maintenance works record.
22.17 Maintenance Record

All portable electrical appliances shall be permanently numbered (scarf tag labels or similar)
and a record kept of the date of issue, date of the last inspection carried out and the
recommended inspection period.
22.18 Metering
22.18.3 For the purposes of the clause 22.18 above, “construction works” shall mean the Works
excluding both the Contractor's on and off Site, fabrication facilities, workshops, work-yards,
offices and stores.
22.18.4 The Contractor shall install a separately metered and invoiced supply or supplies of electricity
for:-
(1) Site fabrication facilities;
(2) Site workshops and work-yards; and
(3) Site offices and stores.
22.19 Inability to Supply

Wherever, the Project Contractor is not in a position to supply construction power and water
supply to the Systemwide Contractor, he ( the Systemwide Contractor) shall arrange for his
own separate construction power and water supply.
* End of Chapter *
Page: GS22- 5 of 6
Draft No. DFA/3337
Draft No. DFA/3337
CHAPTER 23
NOT USED
Page: GS 23-1 of 1
Draft No. DFA/3337
Draft No. DFA/3337
APPENDIX 1
MONTHLY PROGRESS REPORT

1.Topics
1.1 The Monthly Progress Report required under clause 2.17 of the GS shall include as
a minimum the following sections and topics:
(1) Executive Summary, highlighting any matters of concern and explaining
corrective action to be taken
(2) Three month Rolling Programme and overall progress
(3) Physical progress report (see Paragraph 2.19 of the General
Specification)
(4) Achievement of Key Dates and Milestone Dates planned vs actual dates
(5) Planning, Interface and Interface co-ordination progress
(6) Approval of design and drawings, vendor finalisation
(7) Issue of purchase orders for equipments, expected date of inspection,
expected date of arrival at site.
(8) Installation / erection on Site
(9) Commissioning activity
(10) System integration tests
(11) Training
(12) Maintenance issues
(13) Payments / invoices
(14) Employer’s Representative’s instructions and variation orders
(15) Claims / potential claims
(16) Contractor’s resources (details of all staff and sub-contractors engaged on
the Works)
2. PROGRESS REPORTS
The Monthly Progress Reports shall be accompanied by:
a) the Works Programme, marked to show the status of progress to

date;
b) control schedules for document submissions and issues of a

repetitive or multiple nature;
c) where appropriate, exception reports to highlight any problem areas

including any submissions and information which are overdue;
d) the programme analysis report, in accordance with Paragraph 2.18

of the General Specification;
e) the physical progress (earned value) report, in accordance with

Paragraph 2.20 of the General Specification;
Page: Appx: 1-1 of 3

Draft No. DFA/3337
f) “S” curve showing current status of the Contract;
g) a full list of all submissions and their current status in comparison to

the Submissions Programme. Special commentary shall be
provided for each item that is late to this programme giving the
reasons for the delay and the proposed corrective action that will
ensure that the delay does not affect any overall or stage
completion dates, particularly those that interface with other parties;
h) identification and discussion of significant accomplishments,

problem areas encountered, actions taken or planned to resolve
actual or potential problems and conflicts, and other comments or
proposals on matters (including the interfacing works) affecting or
likely to affect the Works; and
i) a critical items action list which identifies outstanding problems

associated with the timely completion of the Works including
anticipated actions for their resolution.
2.1 The programmes shall show current status to provide a comparison between the
Works Programme and reported progress.
2.2 Actual progress shall be reported for each activity in the Works Programme in the
following terms:
(1) the percentage of the work which is complete;
(2) the remaining duration of the work;
(3) the actual start date; and
(4) the actual completion date.
2.3 Actual progress shall reflect the physical scope of the work that has been completed
and shall not be calculated based on elapsed time or hours worked. Any automatic
statistical indications in the Contractor’s software that is based on this principle shall
be disabled.
2.4 Each Monthly Progress Report shall include a programme activity listing and an
analysis report. All activities that have negative float shall be analysed by the
Contractor to identify the impact on the achievement of target dates.
3.0 Copies
3.1 The Contractor shall submit 1 unbound original and 4 bound hard copies of all
Monthly
Progress Reports and of the accompanying documents plus one copy in electronic
format compatible with Microsoft Office and Primavera P3 applications.
* End of Appendix 1 *

Draft No. DFA/3337

Draft No. DFA/3337
Draft No. DFA/3337
APPENDIX 2
PROJECT CALENDAR
(vii) (1) The Project Weeks shall be commenced on a Monday. A day shall
be deemed to commence at 0001 hour on the morning of the day in
question. Where reference is made to the completion of an activity or
Milestone by a particular week, this shall mean by midnight on the
Sunday of that week.
(viii) (2) Requirements for the computation of Key Dates are given in FOT of
the Contract.
(ix) (3) A 7 day week calendar shall be adopted for various (Work)
programme schedules for scheduling purposes.
(x) (4) For Project purposes, the presentation shall be in ‘Week’ units.

Draft No. DFA/3337

Draft No. DFA/3337
APPENDIX 3SUBMISSION FOR REVIEW REQUEST FORM

SUBMISSION FOR REVIEW REQUEST
Reference No. (see Paragraph 4.3.2) Date
Programme reference and scheduled date:
Submission Stage (see Paragraph 3.5.1.1)
Title
We hereby submit for review by the Employer’s Representative the documents or articles listed below:
(Introduction and list of items submitted – see Paragraph 4.3.5.2 – continue on separate sheet if
necessary)
I confirm that the material submitted is in full compliance with the Contract.
Signed (Contractor’s responsible engineer)
Employer’s Representative’s Response Dated
The material submitted has been reviewed and the following decision is given:
“No Objection” / “No Objection Subject To” (see below) / “Rejected” (see below)
The following comments are made and a re-submission is to be made by the Contractor within 10
working days demonstrating fully how all of these are taken into account:
(Employer’s Representative’s comments)
Signed (Employer’s Representative)

Draft No. DFA/3337

Draft No. DFA/3337
APPENDIX 4
SCHEDULE OF ITEMS TO BE SUBMITTED BY CONTRACTOR

This Appendix lists the principal items to be submitted by the Contractor for review by the Employer’s
Representative. This list is not exhaustive and the Contractor is reminded to satisfy itself of the
requirements for all submissions whether or not they are included within this Appendix. Engineer at
his sole discretion may accept any genuine delay in submission of the items mentioned in the list
below
S.No. Article Reference To be submitted

Paragraph(
s)
a)Documentation submission within 14 days of commencement of work
1 Contractor’s GCC 4.3 Unless it is mentioned in the contract, within 14 days of
Representative “Notice to proceed”, submit to the engineer for consent
the name and particulars of the person the contractor
proposes to appoint.
2 Proposals for the Within 14 days of the Commencement Date of the Works
construction of the
Employer’s
Representative’s Site
Offices
3 Particular Uses of Site 17.2.1 Within 14 days of the Commencement Date of the
Works
b)Documentation submission within 30 days of commencement of work
4 Initial Works Programme Appendix-7 Within 15 days of the Notice to proceed
& SCC 11
5 3 month rolling Appendix-7 Within 30 days of the Notice to proceed
Programme
6 Particulars of agent 3.3.1.6(6) 30 days before the Commencement Date of the Works
7 Contractor’s Health and 3.6.2.2 Within 30 days of the Commencement Date of the Works
Safety Documentation
8 Project Document Control 4.3.2 Within 30 days of the Commencement Date of the Works
Procedure
9 Quality Manual& Quality 5.2.3 Within 30 days of the Commencement Date of the Works
System Procedures
10 Details of Quality 5.2.6 Within 30 days of the Commencement Date of the Works
Manager
11 Management Quality Plan 5.3 Within 30 days of the Commencement Date of the Works
c)Documentation submission within 60 days of commencement of work
12 Detailed Works Appendix 7 Within 60 days of the approval of Initial Works
Programme Programme but in any case before 3 months from issue
of Notice to Proceed.
13 Deleted
14 Deleted
15 Management Plan 3 Preliminary within 60 days of Commencement of work
followed by detailed plan within 60 days of preliminary
submission.
16 Interface Management 3.3.2b) Within 60 days of notification from the Employer’s
Plan Representative of the identity of each Project Contractor
Draft No. DFA/3337

Paragraph(
s)
17 Safety Plan 3.4.5 As stated in the PS, or if none is given, within 60 days of
the Commencement Date of the Works. It includes site
safety plan and RAMS plan (if applicable).
18 Contractor’s Factory 3.5.1 As stated in the PS, or if none is given, within 60 days of
Testing Plan the Commencement Date of the Works
19 Procurement, 3.5.2 As stated in the PS, or if none is given, within 60 days of
Manufacturing and the Commencement Date of the Works
Delivery Plan
20 Site Quality Plan 5.5 60 days prior to the commencement of the construction
works
21 Packaging Materials & 8.4.1 As stated in the PS, or if none is given, within 60 days of
Procedures the Commencement Date of the Works
22 Construction & Installation As1stated in the PS, or if none is given, within 60 days of
Plan the4 Commencement Date of the Works, and in any case
not. less than 12 weeks before starting the construction of
the1 Works on Site
.
1
d)Documentation submission with miscellaneous timelines

th
23 Monthly Progress Report , GCC 4.14 & The 5 day of each month.
Monthly quality report and GS 2.17.1,
supporting documentation GS 5.11
24 Detailed Interface 3.3.2d) Within 90 days of notification from the Employer’s
Document Representative of the identity of each Project Contractor
25 Test Reports 0 Immediately after the completion of Factory Testing
26 Commissioning Plan 3.7.2 First draft within 180 days of the Commencement Date of
the Works
27 Installation Test Schedule 3.7.2.2b. (i) As stated in the PS or if not given, not later than two
months in advance of the Date scheduled for
commencement of respective tests
28 Partial Acceptance Tests 3.7.2.2b. (ii) As stated in the PS or if not given, not later than four
Plan months in advance of the Date scheduled for
commencement of Partial Acceptance Tests
29 System Acceptance Tests 3.7.2.2b. (iii) As stated in the PS or if not given, not later than four
Plan months in advance of the Date scheduled for
commencement of System Acceptance Tests
30 Integration Tests & 3.7.2.2b. (iv) As stated in the PS or if not given, not later than four
Commissioning Plan months in advance of the Date scheduled for
commencement of Tests on Completion
31 Operation & Maintenance 3.7.3.2 As stated in the PS or if not given, not later than nine
Manuals Plan months prior to the issue of the Taking Over Certificate
for the Works
32 Training Plan 3.7.4.2 As stated in the PS or if not given, not later than six
months prior to the issue of the Taking Over Certificate
for the Works
33 Defects Liability 3.7.6 Upon issuance of the Taking Over Certificate
Management Plans
34 Proposed Corrective & 5.2.7 Within 14 days of issue of CAR
Preventive Action Plan

Draft No. DFA/3337

Paragraph(
s)
35 Reports of Quarterly 5.7.2 Every Three months
Quality Audits
th
36 Quality Control Register 5.8 7 working day of every month
37 Latest drawings, test 9.2.7.4 At least 15 days prior to each First Article Inspections (
procedures, specifications FAI )
and quality documentation
for inspection of
equipment
38 Installation Tests Reports 9.4.3.3 Immediately after the completion of each test
39 Proposed Partial 9.4.4.7 As stated in the PS or if not given, not later than two
Acceptance Tests months in advance of the Date scheduled for
Records commencement of tests
40 Partial Acceptance Tests Immediately
9 following the successful Partial Acceptance
Records Tests
.
4
.
4
.
9
41 System Acceptance Tests 9.4.5.8 Immediately following the successful System Acceptance
Records Tests
42 Integration Tests & 9.4.6.8 Immediately following the successful Tests on

Commissioning Records Completion of the system
43 Service Trial Records 9.4.7.8 Immediately following the successful Service Trial of the
system
th
44 Summaries of Inspection 9.6.11 7 day of the following month
and/or Test
45 Operation & Maintenance 11.4.1 As stated in the PS or if not given, not later than 6
documentation (Draft months prior to the issue of the Taking Over Certificate
Version) for the Works
46 Operation & Maintenance 11.4.3 As stated in the PS or if not given, not later than 1 month
documentation prior to the issue of the Taking Over Certificate for the
Works
47 Spare Parts & Tools and 13.1.3 As stated in the PS
Tackles List
48 Detailed written report of Error! Within 7 days of occurrence/accident
accidents, incidents and Reference
dangerous occurrence source not
found.
49 Name and qualification of 22.3.3 Not later than 4 weeks before appointment
safety representative for
temporary site electricity

Draft No. DFA/3337
APPENDIX 5
TYPICAL TYPE TEST REQUIREMENTS

1 Electronic and Electrical Equipment
The initial visual inspection shall be carried out to ensure that the equipment is of
sound construction and, so far as can be ascertained, meets the requirements of the
Specification.
1.1 Initial Performance Test

i. The initial performance tests shall consist of a comprehensive series of
measurements of the characteristics of the equipment to demonstrate that its
performance is in accordance with its functional requirements, including detailed
requirements of the Specification.
ii. This test shall normally be performed at an ambient temperature of 40°C +5°C
while supplied at its normal voltage and frequency, if relevant.
iii. This test shall extend to demonstrating compliance with any limitation on self-
generated vibration or interference as stated in the Specification.
1.2 Modes of Testing

i. Electrical tests will generally be applied to the 'external terminals' of the item of
equipment to be tested which are normally used to interface the subject
equipment to other equipment or external circuits, e.g. power supply terminals,
signal input/output terminals, frame (safety) earth terminals, etc. Tests may be
applied in Common Mode and/or Series Mode, as described below.
ii. Common mode tests generally involve testing circuits with respect to the
equipment's frame earth. All accessible metal parts (intended to be connected to
earth) are to be connected to the frame earth.
iii. All the terminals of the circuit to be tested shall be connected together, where
practicable. All terminals of circuits not involved in the test shall preferably be
connected to earth.
iv. For example, a common mode test on the AC power supply circuit of an item of
equipment would involve connecting all the supply circuit terminals together (e.g.
phase (s) and neutral) and applying the test between those connected terminals
and the equipment's frame earth terminal. The terminals of all other circuits, e.g.
signal input/output terminals, shall preferably be connected to earth.
v. Series mode tests generally involve testing circuit connections with respect to
each other.
vi. Where an item of equipment to be tested has a large number of identical
interfaces circuits series mode testing may be restricted to a representative
sample of those interfaces, the proportion being to the agreement of the

Draft No. DFA/3337
vii. The test is applied between terminals (other than the earth terminal) either
associated with the same circuit (e.g. between power supply terminals) or
associated with different circuits (e.g. between input signal terminals and output
signal terminals). All terminals of circuits not involved in the test shall preferably
be connected to earth.
viii. For example, a series mode test on an RTU analogue input circuit would involve
applying the test between the positive and negative analogue signal input
terminals, preferably with all other terminals connected to earth.
ix. For each item of equipment to be tested, there may be many combinations of
terminals to which series mode testing could be applied. Not all combinations
may be relevant or subject to the conditions against which a particular test is to be
performed. However, the Contractor shall test all combinations unless specifically
agreed otherwise by the Employer’s Representative.
2 Mechanical Tests
2.1 Drop Test

i. The drop test is intended to be carried out on units and sub-assemblies that are
portable. It is not intended that it be carried out on complete racks of equipment.
ii. Casings or dust covers, which have to be removed for servicing, shall be removed
after subjecting equipment to this test to inspect for damage. The test is designed
to reveal any weakness of assembly and to ensure that the component mountings
are of adequate strength. It is not designed to check whether doors or windows
made of glass will fracture and to this end meters, glass windows, etc., may be
removed.
iii. The equipment shall not be deemed to have failed the drop test if externally
accessible components such as control knobs or connectors are damaged.
The Employer’s Representative however reserves the right to ask for some form
of guard, to prevent such damage, to be fitted at the Contractor's cost.
iv. Test conditions shall be in accordance with IEC 68-2-31. Information required for
paragraph 4.2 of that test:
a. Visual inspection and function test to specification.
b. Assembled ready for installation.
c. Connectorised cables removed, casings or covers in place.
d. Not applicable.
e. All.
f. 25mm, 6 times.
g. 25mm, 6 times.
v. Visual inspection and function test to specification.
vi. Topple (or push over) test is not required.

Draft No. DFA/3337
2.2 Vibration Test

i. The vibration test is designed to reveal any parts or components of the
equipment that may be prone to any resonance severe enough to cause
possible damage or malfunctioning.
ii. The test shall be in accordance with IEC 68-2-6 1982. Information required for
Chapter 12 of that standard:
a. Measuring Points: If four or less fixing points are used for the specimen, these
shall also be used as checkpoints. If more than four fixing points are used then
those nearest the corners shall be used as checkpoints. The checkpoints shall
be located as close as possible to the fixing points.
b. Transverse Motion: Any transverse motion in excess of that specified in the
above standard clause 4.1.2 shall be noted and recorded in the test results.
c. Distortion: As defined in clause 3 in excess of the limits in clause 4.1.3 of the
above standard shall be noted as defined in clause 4.1.3 paragraph 4 of the
same standard.
d. Derivation of Control Signal Single point.
e. Tolerances at check points shall be as clause 4.1.4.2 of the above standard.
Where these cannot be achieved, the actual values shall be recorded.
f. Monitoring of Specimen(s): The equipment shall be rigidly mounted in a jig so
designed as to transmit the input vibration with minimum modification.
2.3 Vibration Test 1
i. Equipment intended for use with vibration isolators shall normally be tested with
its isolator. When this is not possible, the equipment shall be rigidly secured to
the vibrator and the input vibration levels modified to include transmissibility of the
isolators.
ii. Equipment under test is to be mounted in its normal operational attitude.
iii. Frequency Range: See Chapter 6, Paragraph 5.5 (Equipment Requirements).
iv. Vibration Amplitude: See Chapter 6, Paragraph 5.5 (Equipment Requirements).
v. Special crossover frequency: See Chapter 6, Paragraph 5.5 (Equipment
Requirements).
vi. Type and duration of endurance:
a. Endurance by sweeping 6 hours, i.e. 2 hours per axis
b. Endurance at critical frequencies (as defined in the above standard clause 8.1): 1
minute at each frequency providing not more than four such frequencies exist per
axis.
vii. Pre-conditioning: None.
viii. Initial measurements Functional test to the appropriate test procedure.
ix. Axes of vibration: Three mutually perpendicular axes in turn.
x. Force Limitation: Not required.

Draft No. DFA/3337
xi. Test stages to be performed in the sequence below:

a. Vibration response investigation.
b. Endurance at fixed frequencies derived from vibration response investigation.
c. Endurance by sweeping.
xii. The equipment functionality shall be verified throughout the sweep test to the
appropriate test procedure.
xiii. Action to be taken after vibration response investigation. If less than four critical
frequencies are found in each axis, then endurance testing for the prescribed
duration shall be performed at each frequency.
xiv. Final response test not required.
xv. Predetermined frequencies shall be derived from the vibration response
investigation.
xvi. Conditioning at the resonance frequencies of the specimen on its isolators (where
fitted) shall be included.
xvii. Final measurements Functional test to the appropriate test procedure.
xviii. Any resonance liable to affect the performance or reliability of the equipment shall
be reduced to an acceptable level by suitable modifications and the complete test
repeated.
3. ENVIRONMENTAL TESTS
3.1 Dry Heat Test
i. The dry heat test shall be carried out on each complete piece of equipment or
assembly, with all doors and covers being in place and closed as in normal
operation.
ii. Test conditions shall be in accordance with IEC 68-2-2. Information required for
paragraph 44 of that test:
a. Laboratory ambient.
b. Visual inspection.
c. Assembled and mounted in rack, enclosure or cabinet ready for operation or
installation.
d. On.
e. Maximum class temperature (see Chapter 6, Chapter 5.2, Equipment
Requirements) for 16 hours.
f. At maximum class temperature after 16 hours, switch on and function test to
specification.
g. Recovery at laboratory ambient.
h. Visual inspection and function test to specification.
i. None.

Draft No. DFA/3337
3.2 Low Temperature Test (in case applicable for Delhi ambient
temperature range)
i. The low temperature test shall be carried out on each complete piece of
equipment or assembly, with all doors and covers being in place and closed as in
normal operation.
a. Laboratory ambient.
b. Visual inspection and function test to specification.
c. Assembled and mounted in rack, enclosure or cabinet ready for operation or
installation.
d. Off.
e. Minimum class temperature (see Chapter 6, Paragraph 5.2, Equipment
Requirements) for 16 hours.
f. At minimum class temperature after 16 hours, switch on and function test to
specification.
g. Recovery at laboratory ambient.
h. Visual inspection and function test to specification.
i. None.
3.3 Change of Temperature Test

i. If both Dry Heat and Low Temperature Tests are required (as decided by the
Employer’s Representative) they may be replaced by a single test in accordance
with IEC 68-2-14.
ii. Information required for paragraph 2.9 of that test:
i. Assembled and mounted in rack, enclosure or cabinet ready for operation or
installation.
ii. Minimum class temperature.
iii. Maximum class temperature.
iv. Per Minute.
v. One.
vi. Visual inspection.
vii. On.
viii. Hours.
ix. None.
x. Recovery at laboratory ambient.
xi. Visual inspection and function test to specification.
3.4 Damp Heat Test

i. The damp heat test shall be carried out on each complete piece of equipment or
assembly, with all doors and covers being in place and closed as in normal operation.

Draft No. DFA/3337
i. Maximum class temperature, two cycles.
ii. Visual inspection and function test to specification.
iii. Switched on, ready to use.
iv. None.
v. Variant 2.
vi. At maximum class temperature after 12 hours, function test to Specification. At 6
hours after the temperature starts to fall a further function test to specification. Tests
to be repeated during second cycle.
vii. Laboratory ambient conditions.
viii. None.
ix. Visual inspection and function test to specification within 4 hours.
3.5 Driving Rain Test

i. The test conditions shall be in accordance with IEC 68-2-18 Method Rb 2.2.
ii. Information required for paragraph 5.3.8 of that document:
a. Minutes/m2 for a minimum of 15 minutes.
b. No preconditioning of seals.
c. Visual inspection and function test to specification.
d. Table V1: a = 60°. B = 60°C. duration = 10 minutes.
e. Table V2: diameter = 0.40mm. water flow = 0.10 + 0.005 dm3/min. supply
pressure = 80 kpa.
iii. Equipment functioning throughout the test to be verified by testing.
iv. Any ingress of water shall be reported to the Employer’s Representative, the
equipment shall be visually inspected and function tested to Specification.
04 Electrical Tests
4.1 Supply Variations
Measurements of equipment performance and maximum VA consumption shall be
made, for supply voltage and frequency variations in all possible combinations of
upper limit, normal and lower limit as detailed in the Specification. Throughout these
tests, the equipment shall function in accordance with the Specification.
2.3 Supply Interruptions

i. The supply input to the equipment under test shall be interrupted for periods of 10
ms.
ii. The tests shall be performed ten times at random for ac supplies and three times
at random for dc supplies.
iii. The equipment shall be capable of withstanding these interruptions of supply
input without damage, interruption or resetting by the operator and shall continue
to function and operate correctly in accordance with the Specification.

Draft No. DFA/3337
2.4 High Frequency Disturbance Test

i. The High Frequency Disturbance test is required to determine whether an item of
equipment will continue to operate correctly when specified high frequency
transients, representative of practical system conditions, are applied to
the fully operating equipment.
ii. The test to be applied is based on IEC 255-4, Appendix E.
iii. This test shall be performed for all equipment required to operate in environments
subject to Electrical Interference Class 2 or 3 (refer to Table 8-3) and shall be
applied to the AC power supply terminals of that equipment.
iv. Waveform: a damped oscillatory wave with the envelope decaying to 50% of peak
value at the end of three to six cycles.
a. Frequency: 1 MHz tolerance + 10%.
b. Source impedance: 200 ohm tolerance + 10%.
c. Repetition rate: the test wave is applied to the equipment under test at a repetition
rate of 400 per second.
d. Duration of test: 2 s tolerance + 10% 0% (see Sub-clause E5.2.7 of IEC 255-4,
Appendix E).
e. Standard value of test voltage: Refer to Table 8-3.
f. Test voltage tolerance: +0 -10%.
v. The test voltage levels are the voltages at the output of the test circuit before the
equipment to be tested is connected to the test circuit terminals.
vi. The test leads shall not be longer than 2 m.
vii. The disturbance test shall be applied to the AC supply terminals of the equipment
under test in series mode (refer to Sub clause 2.1.3).
viii. The tests shall be carried out with the equipment operating under nominal supply
conditions.
ix. The equipment shall function in accordance with the Specification throughout the
test.
2.5 Radio Frequency Interference

i. Portable radio communication transmitters are a common source of radio
frequency interference when they are operated in close proximity to equipment. A
field strength of 10 V/m shall be assumed to be present in the VHF and UHF
bands.
ii. These field strengths are approximately those expected at a distance of 35 cm
from a 5 watt hand portable radiotelephone. These fields can induce currents of
the order of 100 mA into cables, screens and metalwork.
iii. Other possible sources are low level radiation from adjacent equipment including
fluorescent lamps and signals from powerful but more distant radio, television and
radar transmitters.

Draft No. DFA/3337
iv. The test to be applied is based on IEC 801-3 over a frequency range of 27 MHz
to 500 MHz. The Severity Level (Chapter 5) to be applied shall be as follows:
v. The Contractor shall state to what field strength the equipment is immune, and
include as an option the cost of testing to 10 V/m. The equipment functionality
and performance shall not be degraded during or after the RFI test.
vi. With regard to RTUs and tele-protection equipment, the command outputs shall
be immune to mal-operation with the cubicle doors open when the equipment is
subjected to the radiated field strengths mentioned above.
2.6 Electrical Stress Impulse Voltage Withstand

i. The Impulse Voltage Withstand test is designed to demonstrate that the
equipment has been correctly designed to withstand, without damage, the
electrical stresses to which it might be subjected in practice.
ii. The test to be applied is based upon IEC 255-4, Appendix E.
iii. This test shall be performed for all equipment required to operate in environments
subject to Electrical Interference Class 2 or 3 (refer to Table 8-3) and shall be
applied as follows:
a. To all AC power supply input and output terminals of all equipment.
b. To all signal input/output, communication interface and DC power supply
terminals of RTU and tele-protection equipment.
c. For the withstand test, the impulse voltage is a periodic transient voltage without
appreciable oscillations (see IEC Publication 60, High-voltage Test Techniques).
iv. Impulse waveform: This shall be the standard 1.2/50 impulse specified in IEC
Publication 60 and having the following tolerances:
a. Voltage rise time: + 30%.
b. Voltage falls time: + 20%.
c. Source impedance: 500 ohm tolerance + 10%.
d. Source energy: 0.5 J tolerance + 10%.
e. Standard value of test voltage: Refer to Table 3.
f. Test voltage tolerance: +0 -10%.
v. The test voltage levels are the voltages at the output of the test circuit before the
equipment to be tested is connected to the test circuit terminals.
vi. The test leads shall not be longer than 2m.
vii. Three positive and three negative impulses shall be applied at intervals of not less
than 5s. Both common mode and series mode tests shall be performed (refer to
Sub-clause 2.1.3).
viii. After the above tests, the equipment shall be visually inspected and function
tested to check compliance with the Specification.
2.7 Insulation Resistance (Across Isolating Barrier) Test

Draft No. DFA/3337
i. Where a barrier is used to provide isolation from external circuits, its insulation
resistance shall be measured.
ii. If the barrier is required to withstand high voltage stresses, then it shall be
stressed at the specified voltage to demonstrate its withstand capability and a
further insulation resistance test shall be made to ascertain that it has not been
significantly degraded as a result of the stress being applied.
iii. The insulation of all circuits that include contacts of switches, relays or contractors
for isolation functions shall be tested for insulation resistance, R1. R1 shall not be
less than 20 mega ohm when measured at 500 V dc.
iv. For switches, relays and contractors, 500 V is to be applied between:
a. The opposite ends of each circuit with contacts in open position.
b. Both ends of each circuit to earth with contacts in closed position.
v. For circuits intended for connection to 100 V ac or dc and above, 2 kV RMS shall
be applied for one minute and this shall be followed by a further test for insulation
resistance, R2.
vi. Stress to be applied between:
a. The individual circuits of this type.
b. Each circuit of this type and all other circuits including earth. These other
circuits can be strapped together electrically for the purpose of this test.
vii. Final insulation resistance shall be such that either:
a. R2 > 20 megohm, or
b. R2/R1 > 0.7.
viii. For circuits intended to provide isolation against large differences in earth
potential, the barrier shall, after the initial resistance measurement, be stressed to
the design voltage and this shall be followed by a further insulation resistance
test.

Draft No. DFA/3337

Draft No. DFA/3337
Draft No. DFA/3337
APPENDIX 6
3 REQUEST FOR INSPECTION OF WORKS FORM

DELHI METRO RAIL CORPORATION
CONTRACTOR
REQUEST FOR INSPECTION OF WORKS
To the Date
Employer’s
Representative
* Location ) Will be ready for your inspection
) on
* Description of Works ) at prior to
)
) on at hrs
* Labour and plant to be
used
Signed for Contractor. Received by

for Employer’s
Representative date
time
Filled in by Engineer Mr Please arrange inspection
Mr Please check setting out
Signed
Filled in by Inspector The above work was inspected and permission was given / not given
to proceed with next operation.
* The following remedial works were

required
* Contractor informed verbally (to MR

by Mr on at hrs)
* Remedial works inspected and permission given to proceed with next
operation on at hrs)
as supervised
by
Signed
Date Time
Verbal or written permission by the Employer’s Representative or his staff shall in no way
relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities under the Contract.
* To be completed if applicable.
Page: Appx:6-1 of 2
Draft No. DFA/3337
Draft No. DFA/3337
Appendix 7
PROGRAMME REQUIREMENTS
1. GENERAL
(1) Purpose of Programme
There are two primary purposes for the requirement of Programme (Scheduling)
information described in this document:
a. Evaluation of Tender
b. Status Reports during Project
To provide the Engineer with status reports for managing, monitoring and
coordinating the awarded contracts during their execution within the overall
multi-contract project schedule.
The requirements are organized in two stages. The first stage is a requirement for all
Tenderers and shall be submitted as part of Tender. The second stage is a
requirement of the Employer and describes a series of reports to be submitted by the
Contractor to the Engineer during the execution of the contract, following the award
of Contract.
(2) The Tenderer/ Contractor shall programme his work at all times to meet the Key
Dates stated in FOT of the Contract and the specified interface periods for the design
and installation of the Works with those of the Designated Contractors and shall
during the progress of the Works constantly monitor his progress against the
programmes described below.
(3) The Tenderer/ Contractor shall include in all programmes his work obligations
towards shared access, shared Site areas and other coincident or adjacent Works
Areas.
(4) The Works Programme, and all more detailed or revised versions, shall be submitted
to the Engineer in hard copy as well as soft copy for his consent in accordance with
the provisions of the GCC.
2. METHODOLOGY
. (1) The computerized Critical Path Method (CPM) network using the Precedence
Diagramming Method (PDM), has been selected by the Employer as the technique
for contract management system and in co-coordinating the multi-contract project.
This technique shall also be employed by the Tenderer in preparing their Tender
submissions and by the Contractor in their Project Stage submissions.
. (2) Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, all programmes submitted by the

Draft No. DFA/3337
Contractor shall be produced using computerized Critical Path Method (CPM)

Networks developed implementing the Precedence Diagramming Method (PDM) with
Cost Loaded Charts and Tables.
. (3) The Contractor shall implement and use throughout the duration of the Contract, a
computerized system to plan, execute, maintain and manage the planning, design,
pre- construction, construction, procurement, installation, testing and commissioning
and sub-contracts in executing the CPM scheduling by PDM. The reports, documents
and data provided shall be an accurate representation of the current status of the
Works and of the work remaining to be accomplished, shall provide a sound basis for
identifying problems, deviations from the planned works, and for making decisions,
and shall enable timely preparation of the same for presentation to the Engineer.
3. PROGRAMME MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE
. (1) CPM programming software used shall be Primavera Project Planning (P6)
Program - latest version. Any other compatible system capable of direct file
interchange capability with software program used by the Employer -
Primavera (P3), latest version can be used with Engineer’s consent.
Scheduling software and relevant instruction manuals, licensed for use in
connection with the contract, shall be provided by the Contractor according to
the Employer’s specifications.
. (2) The Tenderer may use a system other than Primavera but will be required to
demonstrate that full electronic data transfer to Primavera is available and
that the various levels of reporting and coding capabilities are at least
equivalent to Primavera. Compatibility and comparable performance between
Primavera and the Tenderer's proposed system shall be demonstrated in his
Tender submission. Should compatibility not be demonstrated to the
Employer's satisfaction the Contractor shall utilise Primavera for
development, statusing, updating and revision of all the Programmes during
the duration of the Contract. Upon the Engineer's consent of a system other
than Primavera, the Contractor shall supply the Engineer with an original
licensed copy, including manuals and approved training of the software and
any subsequent versions thereof at no extra cost.
4. (Not Used)
5. POST CONTRACT AWARD
. 5.1 The Contractor shall develop his Tender Programme into the Initial Works
Programme including an outline Narrative Statement and submit within 15 days of
the date of the Notice to Proceed and its more detailed version within sixty (60) days
of receiving the Engineer’s consent to the proposed Initial Works Programme.
. 5.2 The first Three Month Rolling Programme shall be submitted within thirty (30) days of
the date of Notice to Proceed and all subsequent editions shall accompany the

Draft No. DFA/3337
Monthly Progress Report. The Monthly Progress Reports shall also include a
Programme Update as described below. These programmes shall subsequently be
updated as described below.
. 5.3 Following the Contractor's Initial Works Programme submission but in any case no
later than three (3) months from the date of award of contract, the contractor shall
make submissions of the detailed Works Programme suitably amended to take into
account the programmes of Designated Contracts. It is the Contractor's responsibility
to ensure timely co-ordination with the Designated Contractors to review, revise and
finalise his Initial Work Programme so as not to affect the progress of Works/ and or
the works of the Designated Contractors. The resubmitted programme when
approved by the Engineer shall form the Baseline Programme against which actual
progress of the Contract shall be reckoned. As the work progresses, it may be
necessary to update/ revise the Baseline programme but such updating shall only be
carried out with the prior consent of the Engineer or when directed by them.
. 5.4 For Initial & Detail Work Programme submission, one (1) original and three (3) copies
each of the following Programmes and Reports shall be submitted to the Engineer:
a) Programme: Baseline CPM Network
b) Programme: Baseline Milestone based Cost Activity Schedule
c) Baseline Schedule Report
d) Narrative
e) Baseline Physical Progress 'S' curve
f) Baseline Resource Charts
5.4.1 The Engineer shall review and comment on the Contractor’s programmes and
information submitted under this Clause. The Engineer will confirm his consent or
otherwise of the submissions within thirty (30) calendar days.
. 5.5 The Engineer shall require the Contractor to re-submit within thirty (30) calendar days
if he is of the opinion that the programmes and information submitted by the
Contractor is unlikely to meet the Contract key dates or has not given consent to
Contractor’s programme due to any other discrepancy/comments.
. 5.6 If in the opinion of the Engineer, any of the Contractor's revised programmes or
Baseline Schedule Report is not acceptable, it shall be construed as a failure of the
Contractor to meet a Milestone.
. 5.7 Notwithstanding the above, the Engineer may at any time during the course of the
Contract require the Contractor to reproduce the computer-generated Baseline
Schedule Report described above to reflect actual activity dates and generate
schedules based upon "what if" statements. The initial computer-generated report

Draft No. DFA/3337
after receiving the Engineer’s consent will serve as the base against which the
contract progress will be measured. Any changes to the Report reflected in
subsequent Baseline Schedule Reports shall also require the Engineer’s consent.
. 5.8 Failure to include any element of work required for performance of the Contract shall
not relieve the Contractor from completing all works required under the Contract to
achieve the original or any extended key completion date.
6. WORKS PROGRAMME
. (1) The Works Programme shall show the Contractor's plan for organising and carrying
out whole of the Works. The Works Programme shall demonstrate by reference to its
Sub-Programmes, Supplementary Programmes and associated Management Plans,
the sequence and duration of activities and any restraints thereto, that the Contractor
shall adopt to achieve Key Dates and to fulfil all Contract obligations. The Works
Programme shall become the Employer’s Representative’s basis of administration of
the time-related aspects of the Contract.
. (2) The Works Programme shall be a computerised Critical Path Method (CPM) network
developed using the Precedence Diagramming Method (PDM) and shall be present
in bar chart and time-scaled network diagram format to a weekly or monthly time
scale. The Contractor shall provide the Employer’s Representative with
substantiation for each constraint whether target start, target finish or mandatory
constraint entered by the Contractor into the Works Programme. The number of
constraints shall be kept to an absolute minimum in order that the CPM networks
developed can be freely analysed.
. (3) Tasks in the Works Programme shall be sufficiently detailed to describe activities and
events clearly showing all logical interdependencies that include, but are not limited
to, the following:
. (a) Key Dates, Access Dates,
. (b) All physical work to be undertaken in the performance of the Contract

obligations, including Temporary Works,
. (c) The requested date for issue of any drawings or information by the Engineer,
preparation, submission and review of Documents showing all items where
review by the Employer’s Representative is required
. (d) Incorporation of principal aspects of the Design Submission Programme and

other submissions,
. (e) Procurement of major materials and the delivery and/or partial delivery date
on- Site of principal items of Contractor's Equipment,
. (f) Installation, testing and commissioning,

Draft No. DFA/3337
. (g) Installation of temporary construction facilities,
. (h) Interface periods with Designated Contractors or utility undertakings,
. (i) Design, supply and/or construction activities of sub-contractors,
. (j) Any software development requirements,
. (k) Training and Transfer of Technology,
. (l) Any outside influence which will or may affect the Works like permits and other
statutory approvals.
. (4) The Works Programme shall show achievement of all Key Dates.
. (5) Activity descriptions shall be unique, describing discrete elements of work. Any
activity creating an imposed time or other constraint shall be fully defined by the
Contractor.
. (6) The Works Programme shall be organised in a logical work-breakdown-structure

including work stages and phases, and shall clearly indicate the critical path(s).
Each activity in the Works Programme shall be coded to indicate:
. (a) Activity ID and Activity Code.
. (b) The Engineer may request additional activity coding to the extent available without
restraint to the Contractor’s utilisation of the programme software. When requested,
the Contractor shall add the required additional coding to the Programme. The
Contractor shall use additional code fields as requested to comply with the
requirements and for the use of the Contractor.
. (7) Activity duration shall not exceed two (2) weeks, unless otherwise consented to by
the Engineer, except non-construction activities such as submittals, submittal
reviews, procurement and delivery of materials or equipment and concrete curing.
The Contractor shall submit a Programme/Project Calendar cross reference clearly
indicating the allowance for holidays.
. (8) The Works Programme, in each submission, shall be accompanied by an Activity

Report and a Narrative Statement as described below in both electronic (Flash Drive
or CD-R) and hard copy format (time scale logic diagrams in A1 size, reports in A4
size).
. (9) Activity Report shall list all activities, and events in the Works Programme, sorted by
activity identification number. The Activity Report shall include the following for each
activity and event:
. (a) Activity identification number and description,

Draft No. DFA/3337
. (b) Duration expressed in Days,
. (c) early and late start, & early and late finish dates. Planned start and finish
dates,
. (d) Calculated total float and free float,
. (e) Predecessor and successor(s), accompanying relationships and lead/lag

duration,
. (f) Imposed time or date constraints,
. (g) Calendar.
. (10) Narrative Statement
The Narrative shall be a comprehensive statement of the Contractor’s plan and

approach for the execution of the Works and the achievement of key dates, handover
dates, submission dates and any intermediate dates. It shall incorporate outline
method statements in respect of major items of work including construction
sequences and primary item of plant, Construction Equipment, Temporary Works and
the like. It shall fully explain the reasons for the main logic links in the Programme
and include particulars of how activity duration are established. This shall include
estimated quantities, production rates, hours per shift, work days per week and a
listing of the major items of Construction Equipment planned for use on the project.
Activities, which may be expedited by use of overtime or additional shifts, shall be
identified and explained. A listing of holidays, and other special non-work days being
used for the computer reports shall be included.
(11) Baseline Physical Progress 'S' Curve
The Contractor shall also submit a forecast Cumulative Physical Progress 'S' curve
based on the time-phased distribution of cost in the CPM Network Logic Diagram,
expressed in percentage terms. This ‘S’ curve shall be generated from the
computerised CPM Network Logic Diagram.
(12) Baseline Resource Charts
The Contractor shall also submit a Resource Charts, generated from the Contractor's
CPM Network Diagram, showing the anticipated manpower and main Construction
Equipment usage during the execution of the Project.
As an additional monitoring facility, indicator resources shall be assigned to relevant

activities for the major items of work. Resource indicators may be input as a daily
rate, expected required rate, or as an activity total in the relevant units. These are
purely indicative quantities and do not form part of contract.
(13) All submissions of proposed Works Programmes subsequently, after approval of the
Initial Works Programme, shall include the actual physical progress of work and

Draft No. DFA/3337
forecast of the remaining work. Actual progress shall be stated in percent complete,
remaining duration, and actual start and finish dates for each activity in the Works
Programme.
7. INITIAL WORKS PROGRAMME
(1) The Initial Works Programme submitted as under Clause 5.1 need not include the full
details given under Clause 6 above. It should be a condensed version with combined
activities of longer. The outline Narrative Statement shall be in sufficient detail to
clearly show the Contractor's intention.
(2) Within sixty (30) days of the Engineer’s consent to the Initial Works Programme, the
Contractor shall submit to the Engineer an expanded and more detailed version of
the Initial Works Programme containing all of the information and detail required
under Clause 5 above.
(3) Such submission shall make use of the Tender Programme submitted earlier but
refined to include the best estimates of dates for the work of Designated Contracts
which has impact on the Contractor's programme. Such programmes shall be
amended subsequently to incorporate the actual dates/ schedule of the affecting
contracts. It is the Contractor's responsibility to ensure timely co-ordination with the
Designated Contractors to finalise the Initial Programme, without affecting progress
of the work.
8. WORKS PROGRAMME REVISIONS
. (1) The Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer in writing of the need for any
changes in the Works Programme, whether due to a change of intention or of
circumstances or for any other reason. Where such proposed change affects timely
completion of the Works or any other Key Date the Contractor shall within fourteen
(14) days of the date of notifying the Engineer submit for the Engineer's consent its
proposed revised Works Programme and accompanying Narrative Statement. The
proposed revised Works Programme shall show the sequence of operations of any
and all works related to the change and the impact of changed work or changed
conditions.
. (2) If at any time the Engineer considers the actual or anticipated progress of the work
reflects a significant deviation from the Works Programme, he may request the
Contractor to submit a proposed revised Programme which together with an
accompanying Activity Report and Narrative Statement, shall be submitted by the
Contractor within fourteen (14) days after the Engineer's instruction. The proposed
revised Works Programme shall show the sequence of operations of any and all work
related to the change and the impact of changed work or changed conditions.
. (3) All activities that have negative float must be analysed by the Contractor to identify
the impact on the timely completion of the Works or on the achievement of Key
Dates.

Draft No. DFA/3337
9. THREE MONTH ROLLING PROGRAMME
(1) The Three Month Rolling Programme shall be an expansion of the current Works
Programme, covering sequential periods of three months. The Three Month Rolling
Programme shall provide more detail of the Contractor's plan, organisation and
execution of the work within these periods. In particular, the Contractor shall expand
each activity planned to occur during the next three(3) month period, if necessary to
a daily level of detail.
(2) The Three Month Rolling Programme shall be developed as a Critical Path Method
(CPM) network, and shall be presented in bar chart and time-scaled network diagram
format. Bar charts shall be presented on an A4 and time-scaled networks diagrams
on an A1 size reproducible media. Tasks in the programme shall be derivatives of
and directly related to tasks in the approved Works Programme.
(3) The Contractor shall describe the discrete work elements and work element inter-
relationships necessary to complete all works and any separable parts thereof
including work assigned to sub-contractors.
(4) Activity duration shall not exceed two (2) weeks unless otherwise consented to by the
Engineer.
(5) Each activity in the Three Month Rolling Programme shall be coded, or described so
as clearly to indicate the corresponding activity in the Works Programme.
10. THREE MONTH ROLLING PROGRAMME REVISIONS AND UPDATE
. (1) The Three Month Rolling Programme shall be extended forward each month as
described under Clause 5(1) above. Each submission of the Three Month Rolling
Programme shall be accompanied by a Programme Analysis Report, describing
actual progress to date, and the forecast for activities occurring over the next three-
month period.
. (2) If the Three Month Rolling Programme is at variance with the Works Programme, the
Programme Analysis Report shall be accompanied by a supporting Narrative
Statement describing the Contractor's plan for the execution of the activities to be
undertaken over the three month period, including programme assumptions and
methods to be employed in achieving timely completion.
. (3) The Contractor shall revise the Three Month Rolling Programme or propose revisions
of the Works Programme, or both, from time to time as may be appropriate to ensure
consistency between them.
11. THREE WEEK ROLLING BAR CHART SCHEDULE
Once a week, on a day mutually agreed to by the Engineer and the Contractor, a
meeting will be held to assess progress by the Contractor during the previous work
week. The Contractor shall submit a construction schedule listing activities completed

Draft No. DFA/3337
and in-progress from the previous week and the activities scheduled for the
succeeding two weeks based on the detailed Works Programme. Copies of the
schedule shall be submitted on A3 sized paper.
12. PROJECT CALENDAR
For the Project, the Contractor shall adopt 7 days a week calendar, identical calendar
for the purpose of programming and Execution of Works. Official documents shall be
transacted during 5 days week - Monday through Friday, except for National (Govt. of
India) Holidays. For Project purposes, a week begins at 0001 hours on a Monday
and ends at 2359 hours on a Sunday. The completion of an activity or the
achievement of an event when given a week number shall be taken to mean midnight
on the Sunday at the end of the numbered week. An access date or activity start date
when given as a week number shall be taken to mean 0001 hours on a Monday of
the Numbered week.
13. PROGRAMMING PERSONNEL
The Contractor shall submit, as part of its Staff Organisation Plan, the names and
required information for the staff to be employed on Works Programming. The principal
Works Programmer shall hold reputable professional qualifications acceptable to the
Engineer including at least five (5) years relevant experience in programming similar
engineering works. Others in the group, as per site requirement, shall have at least three (3)
years experience in such work. The programmers shall be employed by the Contractor full
time on the Contract until the completion or such earlier time the Engineer may give his
consent.
14. PROGRAMME AND REPORT SUBMISSION FORMAT
The Contractor shall submit one (1) original and three (3) copies and one (1) reproducible
(for Programmes) of all submissions to the Engineer. All submissions shall be in AO, A1, A3
or A4 size, as appropriate except as may otherwise be agreed by the Engineer. In addition,
the computerised programme and report shall be submitted in Flash Drive/CD (similarly for
submissions required under Clause 5.4).
The format for all Programme and Report submissions shall be strictly in accordance with
the format as stated herein or as requested by the Engineer.
15. FAILURE TO SUBMIT PROGRAMME
Failure of the Contractor to submit any programme, or any required revisions thereto within
the time limits stated for acceptance by the Engineer, shall be sufficient reason for not
making the relevant stage on account payment by the Engineer.

Draft No. DFA/3337

Draft No. DFA/3337

Draft No. DFA/3337
Draft No. DFA/3337
APPENDIX 8
FIRST AID REQUIREMENTS

1. Provisions by others
(1) First aid bases will be located at the Contractor’s principal Works Areas. The
bases will consist of a treatment room fitted with two treatment couches, a
hand wash basin, sterilising equipment and lockable cupboards to contain
sufficient medical supplies for the Contractor's workforce, the Employer's
Representative's site supervisory staff, the Designated Contractors working in
the area and any visitors to the Site. The first aid post will be air-conditioned,
with cooling capability sufficient to maintain the temperature of the inside of
o
the building at 20 C.
(2) A qualified doctor, nurse and assistant nurse will be in attendance at the first
aid base during all times when work is being undertaken on the Site,
including work by the Designated Contractors and periods when only
emergency activities are being undertaken, such as during periods of
inclement weather.
(3) A fully equipped ambulance and driver will be provided at the first aid base
during all working hours. The ambulance will be equipped with emergency
life support equipment suitable for application in construction site accidents.
2. Provisions by the Contractor

2.1 The Contractor shall supply portable first aid boxes maintained fully equipped at each local
site offices and any work locations where 20 or more persons work at a time.
2.2 In each site office and work location at least one of the Contractor’s employees shall be
trained in first aid and should be available at all working hours for purpose of attending to
emergencies.
2.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for making his employees aware of the location and
access route to the nearest first aid base and if necessary shall provide facilities for
evacuating a workman by stretcher from the worksite.
2.4 The Contractor shall keep the first aid base personnel informed of the number and identity of
staff working within the area of responsibility of each first aid base.

Draft No. DFA/3337

Draft No. DFA/3337
APPENDIX 9
WORKS AREAS
1. Works Areas
(a) Temporary occupation of land is governed by Part VI of land acquisition Act

1894 which limits occupation to 3 years.
(b) Deleted.
(c) Deleted.
(d) Deleted.
(e) Prior to the Works Area Handover Dates for returning any Works Area, the
Contractor shall carry out the following works:
(i) construct all Permanent Works within the area, to the extent defined
in this Appendix, in accordance with the requirements of the
Contract,
(ii) reinstate the area to the condition as close as possible to its condition
when it was taken over,
(iii) form the area to the approved lines and levels and carry out such
other works as may be required by the Employer's Representative,
(iv) remove all rubbish, debris and other materials.

.

Part 02-2 de 04 PS GS

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Part 02-2 de 04 PS GS

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Part 02-2 de 04 PS GS

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Contract- DE-04 – Particular Specification- Annexure-23 (25 kV cable Specification) of Chapter 8A

Draft No. DFA/3337 Attachment:Section VI Employer’s Requirements PS (Part-3).pdf

SPECIFICATIONS FOR 25 kV CABLES FOR ELEVATED AND Revision-0

DMRC/Contract DE-04 /Vol-4/PS

SPECIFICATIONS FOR 25 kV CABLES FOR ELEVATED AND Revision-0

 The values and tolerances are strictly as per IEC.

Periodical inspections of the Manufacturer works, manufacturing processes, Internal

5. MAINTENANCE & LIFE

DMRC/Contract DE-04 /Vol-4/PS

SPECIFICATIONS FOR 25 kV CABLES FOR ELEVATED AND Revision-0

DMRC/Contract DE-04 /Vol-4/PS

SPECIFICATIONS FOR 25 kV CABLES FOR ELEVATED AND Revision-0

DMRC/Contract DE-04 /Vol-4/PS

SPECIFICATIONS FOR 25 kV CABLES FOR ELEVATED AND Revision-0

8. DATA SHEET- 25KV CABLES

DESCRIPTION UNIT VALUES

Circular compact stranded Circular compact stranded

DMRC/Contract DE-04 /Vol-4/PS

SPECIFICATIONS FOR 25 kV CABLES FOR ELEVATED AND Revision-0

DMRC/Contract DE-04 /Vol-4/PS

SPECIFICATIONS FOR 25 kV CABLES FOR ELEVATED AND Revision-0

*Cross sectional Area

DMRC/Contract DE-04 /Vol-4/PS

SPECIFICATIONS FOR 25 kV CABLES FOR ELEVATED AND Revision-0

9. TENTATIVE LIST OF TEST TO BE PERFORMED ON CABLES

INDICATIONS TYPE of TEST

Lightning Impulse test X

Short Circuit test* X

High Voltage Test X X

Partial discharge test X X

Flame Spread Test X

Acid Gas Generation X

Smoke density test X

Oxygen index test on outer sheath X

Temperature index test on outer

Outer sheath test X X

DMRC/Contract DE-04 /Vol-4/PS

SPECIFICATIONS FOR 25 kV CABLES FOR ELEVATED AND Revision-0

10. JOINTS AND TERMINATIONS

10.1 System Data

DMRC/Contract DE-04 /Vol-4/PS

SPECIFICATIONS FOR 25 kV CABLES FOR ELEVATED AND Revision-0

10.2 Governing Specification for Straight Through Joints

ii. Heat Shrink Tubing-

DMRC/Contract DE-04 /Vol-4/PS

SPECIFICATIONS FOR 25 kV CABLES FOR ELEVATED AND Revision-0

c. The recommended lengths of the stress control material.

iii. Earthing and Bonding-

10.3 Governing Specification for Terminations-

DMRC/Contract DE-04 /Vol-4/PS

SPECIFICATIONS FOR 25 kV CABLES FOR ELEVATED AND Revision-0

ii. Heat Shrink Tubing

iii. Earthing and Bonding-

DMRC/Contract DE-04 /Vol-4/PS

SPECIFICATIONS FOR 25 kV CABLES FOR ELEVATED AND Revision-0

10.4 PACKING AND MARKING:

10.5 Additional requirement-

DMRC/Contract DE-04 /Vol-4/PS